sobota 5. února 2011




Acknow ledgments
There are so many beings—in the hundreds—who have helped bring this work to completion. I can’t name them all, but I feel a need to recognize a few.
First of all, the two angels who entered my life long ago and who have lovingly guided my life, you are most honored. Thoth, the ascended master from Atlantis, Egypt and Greece, has given me a great deal of the information in this book. My family, my wife Claudette and my children, who have been my greatest love and inspiration in life. The 200 facilitators teaching this work of the Flower of Life in 33 countries, who have given me invaluable feedback, support and love that has kept me strong. The thousands of students who have written loving letters telling how this work has changed their lives; this has given me strength to continue. Livea Cherish, who put this work into book form from the video format, and Margaret Pinyan, whose fine editing ability allows this book to read so smoothly. Tim Stouse, who created about half the computer graphics, and Michael Tyree, who created the other half; they have made it possible to understand what was being said. And O’Ryin Swanson, the owner of Light Technology Publishing, who had the faith in me to publish this work.

To the rest of you who are too numerous to name, I thank you all from my heart with the prayer that this work will actually help people understand who they really are so that together we can create a more loving world—and perhaps even a more loving universe. Thank you, dear ones.

Only one Spirit.
Long before Sumeria existed, before Egypt had built Saqqara, before the Indus Valley nourished, Spirit lived in human bodies, dancing in high culture. The Sphinx knows the truth. We are much more than we know. We have forgotten.


The Flower of Life was and is known by all life. All life, not only here but everywhere, knew it was the creation pattern — the
way in, the way out. Spirit created us in this image. You know this is true; it is written in your body, in all your bodies.
Long ago we fell from a very high state of consciousness, and the memories are just now beginning to emerge. The
birth of our new/old consciousness here on Earth will change us forever and return us to the awareness that there is truly
only one Spirit.
What you’re about to read is a journey of my life through this reality, how I learned about Great Spirit and about the relationships that each of us have with all life everywhere. I see Great Spirit in the eyes of everyone, and I know that He/She is within you. You already hold within your deepest being all the information I will be sharing with you. When you first read it, it may seem like something you’ve never heard before, but it isn’t. This is ancient information. You can remember things that are deep inside you, and it’s my hope that this book will trigger these things so you can remember who you are, why you came here, and what your purpose is for being here on Earth.
It is my prayer that this book will become a blessing in your life and give you a new awakening about yourself and some-
thing about you that is very, very old. Thank you for sharing this journey with me. I love you deeply, for in truth we are old friends.
We are One.

Part of my purpose in presenting this work is to assist people to be aware of certain events that have happened on this planet or are presently happening or are about to happen, events that are radically affecting our consciousness and the way we’re living today. By understanding our present situation, we can open to the possibility of a new consciousness, a new humanity emerging on Earth. In addition, perhaps, my dearest purpose is to inspire you to remember who you really are and give you the courage to bring your gift to this world. For God has given each one of us a unique talent which, when truly lived, changes the physical world into a world of pure light.
I’ll also be giving mathematical and scientific evidence to show how we got here, as spiritual beings in a physical world, in order to convince the left-brain analytical part of us that there is only one consciousness and one God, and that we are all part of that Oneness. This is important, for it brings both sides of the brain into balance. This balance opens the pineal gland and allows the prana, the life-force energy, to enter the innermost part of our physical being. Then and only then is the body of light called the Mer-Ka-Ba possible.
However, please understand that the evidence I originally learned this information from is in itself not important. The
information could in most cases be completely changed to different information without affecting the outcome. In addition, I
made many mistakes because I am now human. What is most interesting to me is that every time I made a mistake, it led into
a deeper understanding of the Reality and a higher truth. So I say to you, if you find an error, look deeper. If you get hung up on

the information by overestimating its value, you will totally miss the point of the work. What I have just said is paramount to understanding this work.
I’ll also be giving my personal experiences, many of which are, I admit, outrageous by the ordinary world’s standards. Perhaps they are not so outrageous by the old world’s standards, but it is you who must decide if they are true or are just stories — or if it even matters. Listen deeply with your heart, for your heart always knows the truth. Then I intend to share with you, as much as I can in the second volume, a specific breathing technique that will help you return to the vastly higher state of consciousness from which we all came. It is the remembrance of the breath connected to the lightbody of the Mer-Ka-Ba. This is one of the primary purposes of this work.
At this point a short story of how this book came about is in order. You will read about the angels, so I will not begin there, but rather with the later events. In 1985 the angels asked me to begin teaching the meditation of the Mer-Ka-Ba. I first learned it in 1971 and had been practicing it ever since, but I did not want to become a teacher. My life was easy and fulfilled. Basically, I was comfortable and didn’t want to work so hard. The angels said that when someone is given spiritual knowledge, they must share it. They said it was a law of creation.
Knowing they were right, I opened my first class to the public in the spring of 1985. By 1991 my workshops were filled and overflowing, with hundreds of people on the waiting list. I didn’t know how to reach everyone who wanted this information. In fact, I could not. So in 1992 I made a decision to release a video of one of my workshops and let it go out to the world.
Within less than a year it was exploding in sales, but there was one big problem. Most of the people who were watching the
videos could not really understand what was presented because it was outside the context and content of their spiritual under-
standing. I gave a lecture to ninety people in Washington State, all of whom had seen the video tapes but had never been to one
of my live workshops. It was there that I realized that only about 15 percent of the people actually knew how to live the
meditation by using only the instructions on the video tapes. It was not working. Eighty-five percent were confused and unclear
about the instructions.
Immediately I took the video tapes off the market. This, however, did not stop the video from continuing to be sold. People wanted the information, so they began to copy the existing tapes and give, sell or lease them to people worldwide. By 1993, it has been estimated that there were approximately 100,000 sets of these tapes in the world.
A decision was made. It was determined that the only way we could be responsible with this information was to have a trained person in the room when someone watched the video tapes. Trained means that we had carefully instructed a person to know and live the Mer-Ka-Ba. That person could then orally teach another. This is how the Flower of Life facilitator program was born. There are now over 200 trained facilitators in at least 33 countries. And the system has worked very well.
Now things are changing again. People are beginning to understand higher consciousness and its value and concepts. It is
now time to release this book to the general public, which is now ready, we feel. A book has the advantage that people can take
more time to study the drawings and photos carefully at leisure. And it will also have current updated information such as


Update: The times they are a-changing for sure! According to Dow Jones Company, Inc. in their magazine American Demo’ graphics, February 1997, a ten-year scientific study has revealed that a brand-new culture is emerging in America and the Western world at this moment. Some have called this new culture the New Age, but it has had other names, depending on the country.
From our experience, we believe it is a worldwide emerging culture. It is a culture that deeply believes in God,
family, children, spirit, Mother Earth and a healthy environment, femininity, honesty, meditation, life on other planets
and the unity of all life everywhere. The members of this new culture believe, according to the study, that they are few
and scattered. The survey revealed, however, to everyone’s complete surprise, that “they” are one in every four
adults in America — an amazing 44 million adults strong.’ Something huge is happening here. Now that the money
movers are aware of this enormous new market, you bet things will change. Everything from movie and TV content
to the use of energy to the foods we eat and much more will be affected. Our very interpretation of the Reality may
even eventually change. You are not alone, and it will not take long now for this fact to be apparent to everyone.
Ever since the angels first appeared in 1971,1 have been following their guidance. This is still true today. It was the angels
who gave me the meditation of the Mer-Ka-Ba, and it is the meditation that is important here, not the information that is
presented. The information is used just to bring us to a point of clarity so we can enter into a particular state of consciousness.
Understand that as I received the scientific information in the early years from 1971 to about 1985, I thought it was for my
own personal growth. When I would read a scientific paper or magazine, I would discard it, not realizing that in the future I would
have to prove what I was saying. Most of the articles have been located, but not all. Yet this information needs to go out. You,
the reader, have strongly requested it. Therefore, wherever I can I will document my statements, but some proofs are lost, at
least for the moment.
Also, part of the information is from nonscientific sources such as angels or interdimensional communications. We understand that “straight science” needs to be separated from a source who is considered psychic. Scientists are concerned about their credibility. As a side note, I would like to comment that this is similar to a male saying to a female that her feelings are not valid and that only logic is true or valid, that logic must be followed. Naturally, she knows another way; it is the way of life itself. It flows. It has no “male logic,” but it is equally true. I believe in both, in balance.
If you can conceive of a person using both science and psychic abilities together to explore the Reality, you have come to the right place. Whenever possible I will differentiate between the two types of sources so that you are clear. This means that you must go within yourself to see if this information is true within your world. If something does not feel right, then discard it and go on. If it feels right, then live it and see if it is really true. But it is my understanding that the mind will never really know the Reality until it has joined with the heart. Male and female complete each other.
When you read this work you have two choices: You can come from your left brain, your male side, and take notes and carefully see the logic in each step, or you can come from your right brain, your female side, just let go and don’t think — feel, watch it like a movie, expanded, not contracted. Either way will work. It is your choice.


Finally, as I prepared this book, I had to make another decision. Should the final stages of the meditation, the Mer-Ka-Ba
itself, be released? I still feel that an oral teacher is best. Would you jump to the final stages ofTi-betan Buddhism after reading
one book? What has been decided is that everything will be given here up to the time of the 1993 video, with the precaution that
you carefully enter the Mer-Ka-Ba and still seek out a Flower of Life facilitator. That information will be given at the end of the
second volume. Much has been learned after and beyond these writings that can only be given orally and experientially.
The reason I am giving out the full information is that there are now at least seven other authors who have reprinted this work in one form or another. Some have taken it word for word, some have paraphrased me, and some have used my artwork and sacred geometry drawings. Some have asked and some have not. But the end result is that the information is out. Much of it has been distorted and sometimes it is just plain not true. Please know that it is not to protect myself, but to be responsible for the integrity of the work. This information belongs to the universe, not me. It is only the purity of the information that I am concerned with, and your clear understanding of it.
The exact instructions for the meditation are on the Internet [], but of course not the hidden knowl-
edge. That is experiential. You must live it. There is other information on the Net that states it is coming from me when it is not. There is also information out about the Flower of Life that is simply wrong or out of date. Hopefully, this work will make clear what has been veiled or distorted. I understand that these people were coming from their hearts, looking for the truth, but it is still my responsibility to you.
Therefore, in order to be clear and set the record straight, I am writing this book for all of you who wish to truly understand and know the truth.
In love and service, Drunvalo Melchizedek


Remembering Our Ancient Past

our life

How the Fall of Atlantis Changed Our Reality
little less than 13,000 years ago, something very dramatic happened in
the history of our planet that we’re going to explore in great detail,
because what happened in the past is now affecting every aspect of
today. Everything we experience in our daily living, including the particu-

lar technologies we use, the wars that erupt, the foods we eat and even the way we perceive our lives, is the direct result of a certain sequence of events that happened during the end of Atlantean times. The consequences of these ancient events have entirely changed the way we live and interpret reality.
Everything is connected! There is only one Reality and one God, but there are many, many ways that the one Reality can be interpreted. In fact, the number of ways to interpret the Reality are just about infinite. There are certain realities that many people have agreed on, and these realities are called levels of consciousness. For reasons we’ll get into, there are specific realities that extremely large numbers of beings are focusing on, which include the one you and I are experiencing right now.
At one time we existed on Earth in a very high level of awareness that was far
beyond anything we can even imagine right now. We hardly have even the capabil-
ity to imagine where we once were, because who we were then is so out of context
with who we are now. Because of the particular events that happened between
16,000 and 13,000 years ago, humanity fell from that very high place through many
dimensions and overtones, ever increasing in density, until we reached this particu-
lar place, which we call the third dimension on planet Earth, the modem world.
When we fell—and it was like a fall—we were in an uncontrolled spiral of con-
sciousness moving down through the dimensions of consciousness. We were out
of control, and it was very much like falling through space. When we arrived here in
the third dimension, certain specific changes took place, both physiologically and in
the way we functioned in the Reality. The most important change was in the way we

Fig. 1-1. The star tetrahedral
field that surrounds each of us.

breathed prana, a Hindu word for the life-force energy of this universe. Prana is more critical to our survival than air, water, food or any other substance, and the manner in which we take this energy into our bodies radically affects how we perceive the Reality.
In Atlantean times and earlier, the way we breathed prana was directly related to the electromagnetic energy fields that surround our bodies. All the energy forms in our fields are geometric, and the one we will be working with is a star tetrahedron, which consists of two interlocked tetrahedrons [Fig. 1-1]. Another way of thinking of it is as a three-dimensional Star of David.
The apex of the upward-pointing tetrahedron terminates one hand’s length above the head, and the apex of the downward-pointing tetrahedron terminates one hand’s length below the feet. A connecting tube runs from the upper apex to the lower point through the body’s main energy centers, or chakras. This tube, for your body, has the diameter of the circle you make when you touch your longest finger to your thumb. It looks like a glass fluorescent tube, except it has a crystalline structure at the ends that fit into the two apexes of the star tetrahedron.
Before the fall of Atlantis, we used to bring prana simultaneously up and down this tube, and the two prana flows would meet inside one of our chakras. Specifically how and where the prana meets has always been an important aspect of this ancient science, which today is still being studied throughout the universe.
Another major point in the human body is the pineal gland, located almost in the center of the head, which is a huge factor in consciousness. This gland has degenerated from its original size, comparable to a ping-pong ball, to its present size, that of a dried pea, because we forgot how to use it a long time ago—and if you don’t use it, you lose it.
Pranic energy used to flow through the center of the pineal gland. This gland, according to Jacob Liberman, author of Light, the Medicine of the Future, looks like an eye, and in some respects it is literally an eyeball. It’s round and has an opening on one portion; in that opening is a lens for focusing light. It’s hollow and has color receptors inside. Its primary field of view—though this has not been determined scientifically—is upward, toward the heavens. Just as our eyes can look up to 90 degrees to the side from the direction they face, the pineal gland can also “look” as much as 90 degrees away from its set direction. Just as we cannot look out the back of our heads, the pineal gland cannot look down toward the Earth.
Held inside the pineal gland—even in its shrunken size—are all the sacred geometries and understandings of exactly how
the Reality was created. It’s all there, in every single person. But these understandings are not accessible to us now because
we lost our memories during the Fall, and without our memories we started to breathe differently. Instead of taking in prana
through the pineal gland and circulating it up and down our central tube, we started breathing it in through the nose and mouth.
This caused the prana to bypass the pineal gland, which resulted in our seeing things in a totally different way, through a
different interpretation (called good and evil or polarity consciousness) of the One Reality. The result of this polarity conscious-
ness has us thinking that we’re inside a body looking out, somehow separated from what’s “out there.” This is pure illusion. It
feels real, but there is no truth at all to this perception. It’s merely the view of reality we have from this fallen state.

For example, there is nothing wrong with anything that happens, for God is in control of the creation. But from one point of
view, a polarity view, looking at the planet and how it evolves, we should not have fallen down here. In a normal curve of
evolution, we should not be here. Something happened to us that was not supposed to happen. We went through a mutation—
we had a chromosome breakage, you might say. So the Earth has been on red alert for almost 13,000 years, and many beings
and levels of consciousness have been working together to figure out how to get us back onto the path (DNA) where we were
The effect of this “mistaken” fall in consciousness and the ensuing efforts to get us back on track is that something really good—something unexpected, something amazing—has resulted. Beings from all over the universe who have been trying to help us with our problem have initiated various experiments on us in an effort to assist, some legally and some without license. One particular experiment is resulting in a scenario that no one anywhere had ever dreamed would become a reality, except one person in a single culture from a long-distant past.

The Mer-Ka-Ba
There’s another major factor that we’re going to focus on in this story. Thirteen thousand years ago we were aware of something about ourselves that we’ve since completely forgotten: The geometric energy fields around our bodies can be turned on in a particular way, which is also connected to our breath. These fields used to spin at close to the speed of light around our bodies, but they slowed down and stopped spinning after
the Fall. When this field is turned back on and spins, it’s called a Mer-
Ka-Ba, and its usefulness in this Reality is unparalleled. It gives us an
expanded awareness of who we are, connects us with higher levels
of consciousness and restores the memory of the infinite possibilities
of our being.
A healthy spinning Mer-Ka-Ba is fifty to sixty feet in diameter,
proportionate to one’s height. The rotation of a spinning Mer-Ka-Ba
can be displayed on a computer monitor using the appropriate instru-
ments, and its appearance is identical with the infrared heat envelope
of the galaxy [Fig. 1-2]—the same basic shape as the traditional fly-
ing saucer.
The word Mer-Ka-Ba is made up of three smaller words, Mer, Ka
and Ba, which, as we are using them, came from ancient Egyptian. It
is seen in other cultures as merkabah, merkaba and merkavah. There
are several pronunciations, but generally you pronounce it as if the
three syllables are separate, with equal accents on each. Mer refers

to a specific kind of light that was understood in Egypt only during the

Fig. 1-2. Infrared photo of a galaxy, called the Sombrero galaxy, showing its heat envelope.

Eighteenth Dynasty. It was seen as two counterrotating fields of light spinning in the same space, which are generated by certain breathing patterns. Ka refers to the individual spirit and Ba refers to the spirit’s interpretation of its particular reality. In our particular reality, Ba is usually defined as the body or physical reality. In other realities where spirits don’t have bodies, it refers to their concepts or interpretation of the reality they bring with them.
So the Mer-Ka-Ba is a counterrotating field of light that affects spirit and body simultaneously. It is a vehicle that can take
spirit and body (or one’s interpretation of reality) from one world or dimension into another. In fact, the Mer-Ka-Ba is much more
than this, because it can create reality as well as move through realities. For our purposes here, however, we will focus mainly
on its aspect as an interdimensional vehicle (Mer-Ka-Vah means chariot in Hebrew) that will help us return to our original higher
state of consciousness.

Returning to Our Original State
To be clear, returning to our original state is a natural process that can be easy or difficult according to our belief patterns.
However, simply be’ coming involved with the technical relationships of the Mer-Ka-Ba, such as correcting our breathing
patterns or mentally realizing the infinite connections to all patterns of life, for example, is not enough. At least one other factor
is even more important than the Mer-Ka-Ba itself, and that is the understanding, realization and living of divine love. For it is
divine love, sometimes referred to as unconditional love, that is the primary factor that allows the Mer-Ka-Ba to become a living
field of light. Without divine love, the Mer-Ka-Ba is just a machine, and this machine will have limitations that will never allow the
spirit that created it to return home and reach the highest levels of consciousness—the place where there are no levels.
We must be experiencing and expressing unconditional love in order to move beyond a certain dimension, and the world is fast heading toward that higher place. We are heading away from the place of separatism where we see ourselves inside the body looking out. That view will be gone soon, to be replaced with a different view of reality where we’ll have the sense and knowledge of absolute unity with all life; and that sense will grow more and more as we continue to move upward through each level on our journey home.
Later we will explore special ways of opening the heart—to kindle compassionate, unconditional love so that you can have
a direct experience. If you can just let this happen, you may discover things about yourself that you didn’t know before.
Dear reader: There are procedures in the workshops that cannot be reproduced on the tapes or in this book because they
are totally experiential. They are just as important as the knowledge, for without them the knowledge is worthless. The only
way we can give these experiences now is through oral tradition through a living workshop. But that may
change in the future.

A Higher, Inclusive Reality
Another component we’re going to focus on has many names, but in present-day terms it’s usually re-
ferred to as the higher self. In the higher-self reality, we literally exist in other worlds besides this one. There
are so many dimensions and worlds that it almost surpasses human capability to conceive of it. These levels

are very specific and mathematical, and the spacing and the wavelengths in and between these levels are identical to the relationships within musical octaves and other aspects of life. But right now your third-dimensional consciousness has probably been severed from your higher aspect, so you’re aware only of what’s going on here on Earth. This is not the norm for beings existing in a natural unfallen state. The norm is that beings first become aware of several levels at once, like chords in music, until finally, as they grow, they become aware of everything everywhere at once. The following example is unusual, but it demonstrates what is being talked about.
I’m in communication with someone right now who is aware of many levels at once. The scientists who are studying
her are speechless; they cannot understand how she does what she’s doing. She might be sitting in a room, yet she
claims to be watching from outer space. NASA checked her out by asking her to “see” a specific satellite and give specific
information that could be known only if someone were actually there. She gave them readings off their instruments, which
I’m sure seemed impossible to the scientists. She said she was flying alongside the satellite and simply read them. Her
name is Mary Ann Schinfield. She is legally blind, yet she can walk around a room and no one would know that she cannot
see. How does she doit?
Recently she called me, and while we were talking she asked if I would like to see through her eyes. Of course I said yes. Within a few breaths, my field of vision opened up, and I was looking at or through what looked like a huge television screen chac filled my field of vision. What I saw was astounding. It seemed that I was moving very fast through space without a body. I could see the stars, and at that moment Mary Ann and I, seeing through her eyes, were moving alongside a string of comets. She was very close to one of them.
It was one of the most real out-of-body experiences I have ever had. Around the perimeter of this “TV screen” there were about twelve or fourteen smaller TV screens, each one giving extremely fast images. One of them up in the upper right-hand comer was flashing rapidly moving images such as triangles, light bulbs, circles, wavy lines, trees, squares etc. It was this screen that told her what was in the immediate space where her body was located. She could “see” through these seemingly unrelated images. There was another screen in the bottom left-hand corner where she communicated with other extraterrestrial life that was within this solar system.
Here is a person who is in a three-dimensional body on Earth, but has full memory and experience of living in other dimensions. This manner of interrupting the Reality is unusual. People do not normally see inner TV screens, but we do exist in many other worlds even though most of us are not aware of it.
You presently exist on probably five or more levels. Though there is a break between this dimension and others, when you
connect with your higher self you mend that break, after which you start becoming aware of the higher levels and the higher
levels start paying more attention to you— communication begins! This connection to the higher self is probably the most
important thing that could happen in your life—more important than understanding any of the information I’ll be giving. Connect-
ing with the higher self is more important than learning to activate the Mer-Ka-Ba, because if you connect yourself to your Self,
you will get absolutely clear information on how to proceed step by step through any reality and how to lead yourself back home
into the full consciousness of God. When you connect with your higher self, the rest will happen automatically. You will still have

to live your life, but everything you do will have great power and wisdom within your actions, thoughts and emotions.
Exactly how to connect with one’s higher self is what many people, including myself, have been trying to understand. Many people who have somehow made this connection often don’t know how it happened. In this course I’ll attempt to explain exactly how to connect with your higher self. I’ll do my best.

Left- and Right-Brain Realities
There’s one more component to this picture. I’ll be spending perhaps half of our time on left-brain information like geom-
etries and facts and all kinds of information that to many spiritual people would seem totally unimportant. I’m doing this because
when we fell, we divided ourselves into two—really three, but primarily into two—main components, which we call male and
female. The right brain, which controls the left side of our body, is our feminine component, though it’s truly neither male nor
female. This is where our psychic and emotional aspect lives. This component knows that there’s only one God and that
oneness is all there is. Though it can’t really explain it, it just knows the truth. So there are not a lot of problems with the female
The problem is on the left side of the brain—the male component. Because of the nature of how the male brain is oriented—a mirror image of the female—it has its logical component forward (more dominant), while the female has its logical component toward the back (less dominant). The left brain does not experience oneness when it looks out into the Reality; all it sees is division and separation. For that reason, the male aspect of us is having a difficult rime down here on Earth. Even our major sacred books such as the Koran, the Hebrew Bible and the Christian Bible have divided everything into opposites. The left brain experiences that there is God, but then there’s also the devil—perhaps not quite as strong as God, but a huge influence. So even God is seen in terms of duality, as one pole of the opposing forces of dark and light. (This is not true in all sects of these religions. A few of them see that there is only God.)
Undl the left brain is able to see the unity running through everything, to know that there is truly one spirit, one force, one consciousness moving through absolutely everything in existence—until it knows that unity beyond any doubt—then the mind is going to stay separated from itself, from its wholeness and from the fullness of its potential. Even if there’s the slightest doubt at all about unity, the left-brain aspect will hold us back, and we can no longer walk on water. Remember, even Thomas walked on water for a short moment when Jesus asked him to, but one little cell in his big toe said, “Wait a minute, I can’t do this,” and Thomas sank into the cold water of polarity reality.

Where We’re Going with This Information
I’m dedicating a lot of our rime to showing you beyond any shadow of a doubt that there is only one image in everything. There is one and only one image that created all that exists, and that image is the same image that has formed the electromagnetic field around your body. The same geometries that are in your field can be found around everything—planets and galaxies and atoms and everything else. We will examine this image in great detail.

We’re also going to go into the history of the Earth, because it is very
important to our present situation. We cannot really understand how
we got here if we don’t know the process that led us to this point.
So we’ll spend a considerable length of time talking about what
happened a long time ago; then slowly we’ll come forward until we
get to what’s going on today. It’s all tied together. The same old
thing has been going on all along, and it’s still going on—in fact, it
has never stopped.
Those of you who are predominantly right-brained may feel inclined to
skip this left-brained material, yet it is most important for you to hang in there. It is through balance that spiritual health returns.
When the left brain sees absolute unity, it begins to relax and the corpus callosum (the band of fibers joining the two
hemispheres) opens in a new way, allowing an integration between the two sides. The link between the left and right brain
widens, a flow starts, information is passed back and forth, and the opposing sides of the brain begin to integrate and
synchronize with each other. If you’re hooked up for biofeedback, you can actually see this happening. This action turns
on the pineal gland in a different manner and makes it possible for your meditation to activate the lightbody of the Mer-Ka-
Ba. Then the whole process of regeneration and recovery of our previous higher levels of consciousness can proceed.
It is a growth process.
If you are studying any other spiritual practice, you do not need to stop in order to begin the work with the Mer-Ka-
Ba—unless, of course, your teacher does not want to mix traditions. Other meditations that are based on truth can be extremely useful once the Mer-Ka-Ba is spinning, because then noticeable results can evolve very, very quickly. I will repeat myself just so you know for sure: The lightbody of the Mer-Ka-Ba does not contradict or inhibit any other meditation or religion that upholds the belief that there is only one God.
So far we’ve talked only about the ABCs of spirituality. These are just the beginning steps. But these first steps are the most important ones I know.
Your left brain may love all this information and file it away in neatly labeled pigeonholes; this is fine. Or you can just relax and read this like an adventure story, a mind-stretcher, a fantasy. However you read it, the fact that you are reading this book is what matters, and you will receive whatever you’re meant to receive.
In the spirit of oneness, then, let us embark upon this journey of exploration together.


Challenging the Belief Patterns of Our Parents
Many ideas we believe today and “facts” we’ve been taught in school are
just not true, and people are now beginning to realize this worldwide. Of course,
usually these patterns were believed to be true at the time they were taught, but
then concepts and ideas changed, and the next generation was taught different
For example, the concept of the atom has changed dramatically so many
times over the last ninety years that at this point they don’t really adhere to a
concept. They use one, but with the understanding that it may be wrong.
At one time the atom was thought to be like a watermelon and the electrons were like seeds inside the watermelon. We really know very little about the Reality that exists around us. Quantum physics has now shown us that the person performing the experiment influences the outcome. In other words, consciousness can change the outcome of an experiment, depending on its belief patterns.
There are other aspects of ourselves we hold true that may not be true at all. One idea that has been held for a long time is that we’re the only planet in existence with life on it. In our heart of hearts we know this is not true, but this planet will not admit this truth in modern times even though there is powerful evidence of UFO sightings that have been coming from all over the world nonstop for over fifty years. Any subject other than UFOs would have been believed and accepted by the world had this subject not been so threatening. Therefore, we’re going to look at evidence that suggests there is a higher consciousness in the universe, not only in the stars, but perhaps right here on the Earth.
As a side note, I suggest that you see two videos aired on NBC Television as a special, hosted try Charlton Heston: “The Mysterious Origins of Man” and “The Mystery of the Sphinx.” Both are distributed by BC Video at I -800-508-0558.


Gathering the Anomalies

The Dogon Tribe, Sirius B and Dolphin Beings
This drawing [Fig. 1-3] is truly remarkable. The information in it came from a book about Sirius, The Sirius Mystery by Robert Temple. He had, I was told, between ten and twelve different subjects to choose from, each one of which would lead to the same conclusion but from a totally different point of view. I’m glad he chose the one he did, because it happens to relate to another aspect of what we will be talking about.
Robert Temple was one of the first people to reveal certain
facts— though scientists have known for a long time—about an
African tribe near Timbuktu called the Dogons. This tribe holds
information that is simply impossible for them to have by any

standards in our view of the world today. Their information de-
stroys everything we think we know about ourselves in regard to being alone.
You see, the Dogons have a cave on their land that stretches way back into a mountain, and in this cave are wall drawings over 700 years old. One particular man, the holy man of their tribe, sits at the front of this cave to protect it. This is his lifetime job. They feed him and take care of him, but no one can touch him or get close to him. When he dies, another holy man takes his place. In this cave are amazing drawings and bits of information.
I’m going to tell you about two of these bits—and these are only two of many.
First of all, we’re referring to the brightest star in the sky
(with an apparent magnitude of-1.4)—Sirius, now called Sirius
A. If you look at Orion’s Belt, those three stars in a row, and
follow the line downward to your left, you see a very bright star,
which is Sirius A. If you follow them upward about twice the dis-
tance, you see the Pleiades. The information in the Dogon cave
specifically showed another star rotating around Sirius. The

Fig. 1-3. Dogon drawing or Nommo, the great culture hero who brought
civilization to Earth. Because both eyes are shown in the drawings, they are presumed to be plan views, which means the tail is opposed (like a dolphin) rather than lateral, as it is with a fish. The waterline is clearly indicated,
implying that the Nommo iis air-breathing. This drawing came out of the Australian magazine Simply Living.

Fig. 1-4. Two linear extensions, representing the revolution of Sirius B around Sirius A. The diagram on the left is based on Dogon drawings; the projection of the right was calculated by Robert Temple.

Dogons are very specific about this star. They say it’s very, very old and very small, and that it’s made out of what they called the “heaviest matter in the universe” (which is close, but not actually correct). And they say that it takes “close to fifty years” for this small star to rotate around Sirius. This is detailed stuff. Astronomers were able to validate the existence of Sirius B, a white dwarf, in 1862, and only about fifteen or twenty years ago could they validate the other information.
Now, stars are very much like people, as you will begin to see. They’re alive, and they have personalities and many
qualities like we have. On a scientific level, they have growth stages. They start out as hydrogen suns, like ours, where two
hydrogen atoms come together in a fusion reaction to form helium. This process creates all the life and light that’s on this
As a star further matures, another fusion process begins—the helium process—where three helium atoms come together to form carbon. This growth process continues through various stages until it gets all the way up through a particular level of the atomic table, at which point the star has reached the length of its life span. At the end of its life, as far as we know, there are two primary things a star can do. New data on pulsars and magnetars give other options. One, it can explode and become a supernova, a huge hydrogen cloud that becomes the womb for hundreds of new baby stars. Two, it can rapidly expand into what’s called a red giant, a huge explosion that engulfs all its planets—burns them up and destroys the whole system, then stays expanded for a long time. Then slowly it will collapse into a tiny old star called a white dwarf.
What the scientists found rotating around Sirius was a white dwarf, which corresponded exactly to what the Dogons say.
Then science checked to see how much it weighed, to see if it really was the “heaviest matter in the universe.” The original
computations—made about twenty years ago—determined that it weighed about 2000 pounds per cubic inch. That would
certainly qualify for heavy matter, but science now knows that this was an extremely conservative estimate. The newest
estimate is approximately 1.5 million tons per cubic inch! Black holes aside, that would surely seem to be the heaviest matter
in the universe. This means that if you had a cubic inch of this white dwarf, which is now called Sirius B, it would weigh about one
and a half million tons, which would go right through anything you set it on. It would head toward the center of the Earth and
actually oscillate back and forth across the core for a long time until friction finally stopped it in the very center.
In addition, when they checked the rotational pattern of Sirius B around the larger Sirius A, they found it to be 50.1 years. Now, that absolutely could not be a coincidence! It’s just too close, too factual. Yet how did an ancient primitive tribe know such detailed information about a star that could be measured only in this century?
But that is only part of their information. They also knew about all the other planets in our solar system, including Neptune,
Pluto and Uranus, which we have discovered more recently. They knew exactly what these planets look like when you approach
them from space, which we have also only recently learned. They also knew about red and white blood cells, and had all kinds
of physiological information about the human body that we’ve recently learned. All this from a “primitive” tribe! ,
Naturally, a scientific team was sent over to ask the Dogons how they knew all this. Well, that was probably a big mistake
for these researchers, because if they accepted that the Dogons really have this information, then ^ by default they must accept
how they got it. When they asked, “How did you learn this?” the Dogons replied that the drawings on the walls of their cave
showed them. These drawings show a flying saucer—it looks just like that very familiar shape—coming out of the sky and

landing on three legs; then it shows the beings in the ship making a big hole in the ground, filling it with water, jumping out of the ship into the water, and coming up to the edge of the water. These beings look very much like dolphins; in fact, maybe they were dolphins, but we don’t know for certainfig. Then they started communicating to the Dogons. They described where they came from and gave the Dogon tribe all this information.
That’s what the Dogons said. The scientists just sat there. Eventually they said, “Nooo, we didn’t hear that.” Because it didn’t fit into anything they thought they knew, they just kind of hid the information somewhere under a carpet in their minds. Most people, scientists included, just do not know what to do with these kinds of facts. There has been a lot of information like this that we just don’t know what to do with. Since we can’t find a way to integrate this unusual information with what we already think we know, we just stick it away somewhere—because the theories don’t work, you know, if we keep it.
Here’s another thing the Dogons knew. This little drawing was on the walls [Fig. 1 -4], but the scientists didn’t know what the heck it was ... until computers calculated the orbits of Sirius A and Sirius B. As seen from Earth, this pattern shown in the Dogon cave is identical to the pattern made by Sirius B moving around Sirius A—in a specific time frame, which happens to be from the year 1912 to the year 1990. The dolphins, or whoever those beings were, gave this present-day diagram/time pattern to the Dogons at least 700 years ago!
Now, as this has unfolded in my life, I’ve discovered that both 1912 and 1990 were very important years. In fact, the period
between these two years was probably one of the most important periods ever in the history of the Earth. I’ll explain more about
this as we go on, but briefly, in 1912 time-travel experiments began, as did experiments between the extraterrestrial Grays and
humans. (We will explain later.) And 1990 was the first year that the ascension grid for our planet was completed. And many
other events happened during this period. The fact that the Dogon wall drawings pinpointed this period could be considered
clearly prophetic.

A Trip to Peru and More Dogon Evidence
I first came upon this Dogon information in 1982 or ’83. I found myself around a group of people who were working with the Dogon tribe, who were actually going there and communicating with them. Then in 1985 I took a group of people to Peru, including one of these Dogon researchers. We checked into a plush hotel in Cuzco called the Hotel San Agustin, intending to go walking the following day on the Inca Trail, about forty miles over the mountain tops. You walk up to about 14,000 feet, then drop down to Machu Picchu about 5000 feet below. It’s beautiful.
Our hotel was a Spanish adobe palace hidden behind high walls in the center of town. We were paired off so we could get
cheaper rates. I was with the Dogon researcher, and he was constantly telling me about what they were learning, including a lot
more than we’re discussing here. We got a room, and the room number was 23. He got all excited and exclaimed, “Room 23!—
a very auspicious number!” From Africa, where the Dogons live, the star Sirius disappears below the horizon and is out of sight
for a couple of months; then it appears again on the morning of July 23, when it rises about one minute before the Sun. It
appears, bright ruby-red, just above the horizon, almost exactly due east. Sixty seconds later the Sun emerges. So you can see

Sirius for just a moment, then it’s gone. This is called the heliacal rising of Sirius, which was a very important moment for most of the ancient world, not just for the Dogons and Egypt.
This is the moment when Sirius and the Sun and the Earth are in a straight line across space. In Egypt, almost all the temples were aligned with this line, including the gaze of the Sphinx. Many of the temples had a tiny hole in the wall somewhere; then there would be another tiny hole through another wall, then through another wall and another, going into some dim inner chamber. In that chamber there would be something like a cube or Golden Mean rectangle of granite sitting in the middle of the room with a little mark on it. At the moment of the heliacal rising of Sirius, a ruby-red light would strike the altar for a few seconds, which would begin their new year and the first day of the ancient Sothic calendar of Egypt.
Anyway, here we were in Peru, getting the room and remarking about the num-
ber 23. We walked into the room and set our things down; then we both looked at

the bed, and on the bedspread we saw this image [Fig. 1-5].
We just stood there in amazement, looking at it for about five minutes before we could even speak, because the wheels in our heads were going around so fast, trying to figure out how this could be.
If you look again at the image of the beings who got out of the flying saucer, they looked very similar. They were half in and half out of water—air-breathing mam-
mals—and their tail fins were horizontal, not vertical like fish. The only sea crea-
tures with such fins are cetaceans such as dolphins and whales.
But the Dogon image is from Africa ... and here we were in Peru, staring at a very similar-looking mammal. This just didn’t compute. So we asked the hotel per-
sonnel, “What do you know about this emblem?” They didn’t know much. They were mostly of Spanish descent and weren’t tied much into Indian legends. They didn’t know the old stories of creation, so they had no idea what it meant. Here’s a picture of the whole insignia [Fig. 1-6]:
In order to find out more, we rented a little car and drove around the area
asking other people. We finally ended up at Lake Titicaca, talking to some Uros
Indians. At one point I asked, “What do you know about this?” They said, “Oh,
yeah,” and proceeded to tell me a story that sounded very much like what the Dogons
had told! This is their creation story: A flying saucer came out of the sky and landed
in Lake Titicaca on the Island of the Sun. These dolphinlike creatures jumped into

Fig. 1-5. Logo on bedspread in Cuzco hotel.

Fig. 1-6. Logo of Hotel San Augustin, Cuzco.

the water, came up to the people, told them where they came from, and in the beginning, began an intimate relationship with the pre-Inca peoples. It was this connection with the Sky People, according to the story, that launched the Incan empire.
I just sat there with my mouth open. Afterward, Simply Living magazine out of Australia published a whole series of articles
on this subject. When people started investigating, they found that cultures all over the world have similar stories. There are twelve different cultures in the Mediterranean alone that tell a similar story.
We’ll come back to the dolphins a lot in this work because it seems they played a huge role in the unfoldment of consciousness on this planet.

A Sanskrit Poem and Pi
Let’s look at something totally different now to suggest that the ancient beings of this world were perhaps more evolved than we give them credit for. Figure 1-7 is a phonetic translation of a Sanskrit poem. It was shown in an article published in Clarion Call magazine, in the early eighties, I believe. The English translation is shown below the Sanskrit.

Fig. 1-7. From Clarion Call magazine:
“Mathematics and the Spiritual Dimension” by David Osborn.

Over many years researchers have discovered that each one of these Sanskrit sounds corresponds to a numerical value. It took them a long time to figure this out. Figure 1-8 shows all the various sounds that are possible in Sanskrit. Each sound has a numerical value from zero to nine, and some syllables have two number values. For instance, ka, a primary sound, translates as spirit and corresponds to either zero or one, depending on its usage, I assume.
When researchers took these different sound values and applied them to this
particular poem, a mathematical figure came up that is extremely significant:
0.3141592653589 . . . continuing out to thirty-two digits. This is the exact number of pi
divided by ten carried to thirty-two digits! No one has ever figured out how to calculate
Fig. 1-8. All Sanscrit sounds, with their numerical values.

for the decimal point, which is why this is pi over ten. If you move the decimal point one digit to the right, then it would be 3.1415 etc., the diameter of a circle divided into its circumference. Well, they might have known about the diameter of a circle divided into its circumference, but in our culture’s understanding of who these ancients were, there is no possibility that they could have calculated it with that kind of accuracy. Yet here is undeniable evidence.
There are many, many of these poems and many, many other writings in Sanskrit. I don’t know how far they’ve come in deciphering all of it, but I think that when all is said and done, it’s going to be pretty remarkable.
How did they do that? Who were these people, really? Is it possible that our understanding of them is not exactly correct?
Were they maybe a little more advanced than we thought? This poem definitely suggests this.

How Old Is the Sphinx?
The following is also probably one of the most important discoveries on the planet ever. It’s happening right now at this moment. However, it began about forty
years ago with R.A. Schwaller de Lubicz.
He’s a famous self-educated Egyptian ar-
chaeologist who has written many books.
He and his stepdaughter, Lucie Lamy, have
demonstrated a profound understanding of
sacred geometry and the Egyptian culture.
While observing the Sphinx, Schwaller
de Lubicz became especially interested in
the tremendous wear on its surface. To-
ward the back of the Sphinx there are wear
patterns that cut twelve feet deep into its
surface, and this type of wear pattern is
totally different from the patterns on other
buildings in Egypt [Fig. 1-9]. The wear pat-
terns on other buildings, supposedly built
at the same time, are textured by sand and
wind, which is consistent if the buildings
are, as believed, around 4000 years old.
But the wear patterns on the Sphinx look
like they’ve been smoothed with water. Ac-
cording to mainstream thought, the Sphinx,
the Great Pyramid and other associated Fig. 1-9. Sphinx

buildings were built about 4500 years ago in the Fourth Dynasty under Cheops.
When this discrepancy was brought up to Egyptian archaeologists, they
refused to listen. This went on for about forty years. Other people noticed it,
but the Egyptians simply would not admit the obvious. Then a man named
John Anthony West became interested. He has written many books on Egypt,
including Serpent in the Sky and a fine Egyptian guidebook. When he heard
about the Sphinx dispute, he went to look for himself. He could see that the
wear was incredibly excessive and that it did look like water had caused the
wear. He also found, like Schwaller de Lubicz, that he could not get the ac-
credited archaeologists to listen to his beliefs about the Sphinx.
There’s a reason for this denial, I believe. Please understand, I am not
trying to discredit a major religion. I am merely reporting. You see, there are
around 5000 Egyptian archaeologists in the world, and they all pretty much
agree with each other in most ways. This agreement has become a tradition.
They make little changes, but not too many (and not too fast, either), and
most agree on the age of the pyramids. All of these archaeologists are Mus-
lim, with a few exceptions, and their holy book is the Koran. The Koran, in its
traditional interpretation, says that creation began about 6000 years ago. So
if a Muslim were to say that a building is 8000 years old, he would be disputing their bible. They cannot do that, they simply cannot, so they won’t even talk about it, won’t even discuss it.
If you say that anything is more than 6000 years old, they will not agree. They will do anything to protect their belief, making sure that no one knows about any man-made objects that might be more than 6000 years old. For instance, they’ve enclosed the pyramids of the First Dynasty, which are older than Saqqara, and built military fortifications around and within the walls so nobody can get to them. Why? Because they are older than or close to 6000 years. So John Anthony West stepped outside the Egyptian archaeology world and brought in an American geologist named Robert Schoch, who did a computer analysis that gave a totally different, scientific point of view. Lo and behold, beyond any doubt at all, the Sphinx does have water wear patterns—and in a desert that’s at least 7000 years old, it puts it well over the age of 6000 years.
On top of that, computers have calculated that it would take a minimum of 1000 years of continuous, torrential rains
dumped on the Sphinx— nonstop for twenty-four hours a day—to cause that kind wear. This means the Sphinx has to be at
least 8000 years old minimum. Because it’s not likely that it bucketed rain nonstop for 1000 years, they figured that it’s got to be
at least 10- to 15,000 years old, maybe a lot older. When this evidence gets out to the world, it will be one of the most powerful
revelations on this planet in a very, very long time. It’s going to have a bigger effect on the world’s view of itself than probably
any other discovery. This evidence has not entered the schools or general knowledge yet, though it has gone all around the
planet. It has been looked at and checked out and thought about and argued over, and in the end most scientists have agreed

that it cannot be doubted.
So the age of the Sphinx has now been put back to at least 10,000 years, maybe 15,000 or a lot more, and it’s already changing the entire worldview of the people on the cutting edge of archaeology. You see, judging by everything we presently think we know, the oldest civilized people in the world were the Sumerians, and they go back to approximately 3800 B.C. Before that, conventional knowledge says there was nothing but hairy barbarians—no civilization at all anywhere on the whole planet. But now we have something man-made and civilized that’s 10,000 to 15,000 years old. That changes everything!
In the past, when something new like this is discovered that has a major influence on the viewpoint of the world, it takes about a hundred years for it to get to the people, for the average person to say, “Oh, yes, that is true!” But this time it’ll happen a lot quicker because of television, computers, the Internet and the way things are today. Now scientific circles, for the first time ever, are actually beginning to look at the words of Plato in a new light when he talked about another culture, another continent, from a dim past called Atlantis.
The Sphinx is the largest sculpture on the planet. It was not done by hairy barbarians, but by a very sophisticated
culture. And it was not done by anybody we now know here on Earth. From a scientific point of view, this is the first solid
evidence to be accepted about the true age of civilization. There has been lots of other evidence, but people just kept
putting it under the table. This information on the Sphinx has made a crack in our worldview. This took place about 1990,
and the crack is now widening. We now have the accepted evidence that there absolutely had to have been someone on
Earth who was highly civilized as early as 10,000 years ago. You can see how that’s going to completely change our view
of who we think we are.
Edgar Cayce, the Sphinx and the Hall of Records
I find it extremely interesting that the Sphinx is causing this change, especially in view of what the A.R.E. [Association for Research and Enlightenment] has been saying. The A.R.E., a foundation based on teachings of “the sleeping prophet,” Edgar Cayce, says that the Sphinx contains the opening to the Hall of Records. The Hall of Records is an alleged underground chamber containing physical proof of superior ancient civilizations on Earth.
Cayce is a very interesting prophet. He made about 14,000 predictions in his lifetime, and by 1970, 12,000 of
those predictions had come true and 2,000 were still in the future. And in all those predictions, he made only one tiny
mistake. Out of 12,000 predictions, that’s incredible. You can almost forgive him for that one mistake: He received a
letter from a man in France asking for a health reading, but Cayce mistakenly gave a reading on the inquirer ’s twin
brother. That was his only mistake. Every other thing came true exactly as Cayce had predicted—up until 1972.
However, after 1972 mistakes began to happen, and I’ll explain why at the right time. (For those who think Cayce’s
prediction that Atlantis would rise to the surface before 1970 did not come true, check out the January 1970 issue of
Life magazine. Islands did come to the surface in the area where Cayce said Atlantis was located; some sank again


and some are still above water today.)
According to Cayce, the right paw of the Sphinx is the opening to the Hall of
Records. Both Thoth and Cayce have said that there are physical objects hid-
den in a room underground near the Sphinx that absolutely prove that there
were advanced cultures on this planet long before us. Thoth says that these
objects will prove the existence of these advanced cultures as far back as five
and a half million years. In comparison, our level of culture is but a child to these
ancient cultures.
In fact, according to Thoth, civilization on this planet actually extends back 500 million years, and our very first culture originally came from the stars. But something colossal happened five and a half million years ago that affected the akashic records. I cannot understand how that could even take place, because of what I understand the akashic records to be. According to what I know, anything that occurs, occurs forever in vibrational form. So I don’t understand how the akashic records can be destroyed; yet I’m told this is true.

Introducing Thoth
Who is Thoth? What you’re seeing in this illustration [Fig. 1-10] is Egyptian
hieroglyphics. Everything in the picture is hieroglyph, not just the images at the top.
“Hieroglyph” means holy writings. These hieroglyphs are drawn on papyrus, which
was supposedly the first paper in the world. The person depicted here is a man
named Thoth, pronounced with a long o. (Some day people say Thawth, but he
pronounces it Thoth.) The hieroglyph shows his head as an ibis, a bird. So when-
ever you see this man with wide shoulders and a strange-looking bird head, it’s a
hieroglyph depicting this particular being, Thoth. He’s holding papyrus reeds be-
cause he was the person who introduced writing to the world. The introduction of
writing was a profoundly important event, probably the most influential act that has
ever occurred on this planet in this cycle. It made more changes in our evolution
and consciousness than any other single act in our known history.
Thoth is also holding in his left hand something called the ankh, which is the
symbol for eternal life. The ankh is an extremely significant symbol in this work, just
as it was one of the primary symbols in Egyptian times. There is an electromagnetic

Fig. 1-10 Hieroglyphs for Thoth


energy field surrounding our bodies shaped like the ankh. The remembrance of it, ac-

White Ibis

Fig. 1-12. As Thoth is said to have invented
writing, he is often depicted with a papyrus roll

Fig. 1-13. Thoth writing (figure on right, an original wall carving)
cording to the Egyptian point of view, is the beginning of our returning home to eternal life and true freedom, so the ankh is a primary key.
All these things are an introduction. I’ll be skipping all over the place, talking about many different subjects that won’t seemingly be tied together; then slowly, as we proceed, I’ll bring them all together in one coherent picture.
On my second trip to Egypt, I went everywhere looking for this little bird called
an ibis. They supposedly lived in the reeds, so I looked through the reeds with my
camera. I kept looking for one the whole time I was there. I looked from one end of
Egypt to the other but never saw a single ibis. I had to wait until I got back to the Albuquer-
que Zoo to take this picture [Fig. 1-11]. They look kind of like short-legged storks with bright pink feathers.
Here is Thoth writing [Fig. 1-12]. This is a copy off a wall, and this next photo
[Fig. 1-13] is an actual wall sculpture. He’s kneeling here, holding the pen and writing.

and stylus. Copy of a wall sculpture.

Fig. 1-11. White Ibis


This was a revolutionary act that had never been attempted before in this cycle. According to the conventional version of history, this act took place in Egypt during the time of Saqqara, but I have my doubts. I personally believe that it took place about 500 years earlier. Saqqara was built during the First Dynasty, approximately 3300 B.C. When we talk about the pyramids older than Saqqara, you will understand why I believe this.

My Story

Berkeley Beginnings
Some of you may not accept the possibility of communication with beings on other dimensional levels, but this is what took place in my life. I didn’t ask for it, it just happened. As it turned out, I had almost daily communication on interdimensional levels for a number of years with this man Thoth. Now that I understand it more, my personal relationship with Thoth really began when I was in college at Berkeley.
I majored in physics and minored in mathematics until I was just about to receive my diploma. I needed only one more
quarter to graduate. I decided I didn’t want the degree, because I had discovered something about physicists that turned me off
to the idea of becoming involved in a science that I believed was no science at all. This is all changing now. This in itself could
be a book, but the why of it is related to the same thing I said about archaeologists. Physicists, just like archaeologists, will turn
their heads away from the truth if it means too much of a change too fast. Perhaps the real truth is that this is human nature. So
I switched to the other side of my brain and started majoring in fine arts. My counselors thought I was nuts. “You’re going to give
up a physics degree?” they asked. But I didn’t need it, didn’t want it. Then to graduate I had to go for two more years majoring
in fine arts and art history.
Changing majors makes sense now, because when you study the ancient writings, you find out that the ancients perceived art, science and religion as interwoven, interconnected. So the programming I was putting myself through was appropriate for what I’m doing now.

Dropping Out to Canada
I got my degree in 1970. After going through Vietnam and looking at what was happening in our country at that time, I finally
said, “I’ve had it! This is it! I don’t know how long I’m going to live or what’s going to happen, but I’m just going to be happy and
do what I’ve always wanted to do.” I decided to get away from everything and go live in the mountains like I had always wanted.
So I left the United States and went to Canada, not knowing there would be thousands of Vietnam War protesters following me
a year later. I married a woman named Renee, and the two of us went into the middle of nowhere and found a little house on
Kootenay Lake. We were a long way away from anything. You had to walk four miles from the nearest road to get to my house,

so we were really isolated.
I began to live my life exactly like I had always wanted to live. I had always wanted to see if I could live on nothing, so I gave
it a try. It was a little scary at first, but it got easier as time went on, and pretty soon I became adept at natural living. I lived a
wonderful and full life on basically no money. After a while I realized, Hey, this is a lot easier than holding a job in a city! I had to
work hard for only about three hours a day, then I had the rest of the day off. It was great. I could play music and run around and
have a good old time. And that’s exactly what I did. I had fun. I played music about ten hours a day, with lots of friends who came
from miles around. Our place had gained quite a reputation by then. We just had fun. In doing this, which is very important to my
understanding now, I discovered something about myself. It was from this—”returning to my inner child” is how I phrase it these
days—that my inner child was released, and in that releasing, something happened to me that was the catalyst that led into my
life as it is today.

The Two Angels and Where They Led Me
While in Vancouver, Canada, we decided that we wanted to know about meditation, so we started studying with a Hindu teacher who lived in the area. My wife and I were very serious about wanting to understand what meditation was about. We had made hooded white silk robes to show respect. Then one day, after practicing meditation for about four or five months, two tall angels about ten feet high appeared in our room! They were right there—one was green and one was purple. We could see through their transparent bodies, but they were definitely there. We did not expect this to take place, nor did we ask for it. We were just following the instructions that our Hindu teacher was giving us. I don’t believe he fully understood either, as he kept asking us many questions. From that moment on my life was never the same. It wasn’t even close.
The first words the angels said were, “We are you.” I had no idea what they meant. I said, “You’re me?” Then slowly they began to teach me various things about myself and the world and about the
nature of consciousness. Finally my heart completely opened to them. I could feel tremendous love
from them, which totally changed my life. Over a period of many years they led me to about seventy
different teachers. They would actually tell me in meditation the address and the phone number of
the teacher I was to go see. They would tell me either to call first or just show up at his or her house.
So I would do this—and it would always be the right person! Then I would be instructed to stay with
that person for a certain length of time. Sometimes, right in the middle of a particular teaching, the
angels would say, “Okay, you’re done. Leave.”
I remember when they sent me to Ram Dass. I hung out in his house for about three days, wondering what the heck I was doing there; then one day I went to touch him on the shoulder to say something, and I got a zap that practically knocked me to the floor. The angels said, “That’s it. You can leave now.” And I said, “Okay.” Ram Dass and I became friends, but what ever I was supposed to leam from him was over within that one second.


The teachings of Neem Karoli Baba, Ram Dass’s teacher, are very important to me. It was his belief that “the best form to see God is in every form.” I’ve also been exposed to Yogananda’s work and cherish who he was. Later we’ll be talking about Sri Yukteswar and some of his work. I’ve been intensely involved in almost all the major religions. I’ve resisted the Sikhs because I do not believe that military preparation is necessary, but I’ve studied and practiced almost all the rest of them—Muslim, Jewish, Christian, Taoist, Sufi, Hindu, Tibetan Buddhist. I’ve deeply studied Tao-ism and Sufism— I spent eleven years with Sufism. However, through all this study, the most powerful teachers for me have been the Native Americans. It was the Indians who opened the doorway for all my spiritual growth to take place. They’ve been a very powerful influence in my life. But that’s another story, some of which I’ll give in time.
All the world’s religions are speaking of the same Reality. They have different words, different concepts and ideas, but there’s really only one Reality, and there’s only one Spirit moving through all life. There might be different techniques to get to different states of consciousness, but there’s only what is real, and when you’re there you know it. Whatever you want to call it—you can give it different names—it’s all the same thing.

Alchemy and the First Appearance of Thoth
At one point the angels led me to a Canadian man who was an alchemist and who, amongst other things, was
actually turning mercury into gold (though it can also be done from lead, which is more difficult). I studied alchemy for two
years with him and watched this process with my own eyes. He had a sphere of glass about 18" in diameter filled with a
liquid, and little bubbles of mercury would rise into it. They would go through a series of fluorescent colors and changes,
rise to the top, turn into little balls of solid gold, then sink down to the bottom. Then he would collect all these little balls of
gold to use for his spiritual work. He owned an ordinary-looking little house in Burnaby, British Columbia, on an ordinary-
looking street. If you drove down the street, his house would look like any of the others. But under his house was a hidden
laboratory. He had taken the millions of dollars in gold and dug straight down, building a huge complex filled with ev-
erything from electron balances to you-name-it so that he could further his work. He didn’t care about money at all. And
of course the purpose in alchemy is not to make gold or money, but to understand the process of how mercury or lead
changes into gold.
It’s the process that’s important. Because the process of going from mercury to gold is identical to the process that a
human follows going from this level of consciousness into Christ consciousness; there is an exact correlation. As a
matter of fact, if you were to study all of alchemy, you would have to study every single chemical reaction in existence,
because every reaction has a corresponding experiential aspect to something in life. It’s the old “as above, so below”
saying. (By the way, Thoth is the man who originally spoke those words when he was known as Hermes in Greece.)
At one point I was sitting in front of this alchemist teacher, and we were doing a particular kind of open-eyed medita-
tion where we were locking breaths and breathing a certain way. He was sitting about three feet away from me, and we
had been in this meditation for maybe an hour or two, a pretty fair length of time. Then something happened—something

I had never seen before, ever! He kind of went fuzzy, then disappeared right before my eyes! He was just gone. I’ll never forget it. I sat there for a moment and didn’t know what to do. Then I hesitantly reached over and felt for him. There was nobody there. I thought, Wow! I was totally in astonishment. It blew my mind (as we would say in the ’60s and ’70s), it definitely did! I didn’t know what to do, so I just continued to sit there. Then pretty soon a different person appeared in front of me, somebody completely and absolutely different! It wasn’t even close. My alchemist teacher was about thirtyfive years old and this guy was maybe sixty or seventy, and a lot shorter—maybe five feet three or four.
He was a little guy, and he looked Egyptian. He had dark skin and his hair was kind of long, but pulled back. He had a clean-shaven face except for a thick beard growing from his chin that was perhaps six inches long and tied in five places. He was dressed in simple tan-colored cotton clothing with long sleeves and pants and sat cross-legged facing me. After my shock wore off, I just looked into this person’s eyes. There I saw something I hadn’t seen before except in babies’ eyes. When you look into a little baby’s eyes, you know how easy it is because there’s nothing going on, no judgment, no nothing. You can just fall into their eyes, and they’ll fall into yours. Well, that’s what it was like to look at this man. There were just these big baby eyes in this old body. He didn’t have anything going on. I had an instant connection with this person, and there were no barriers. He touched my heart like no one had ever done before.
Then he asked me a question. He said there were three missing atoms in the universe, and did I know where they were? I had no idea what he meant, so I said, “Well, no.” Then he gave me an experience, which I’m not going to describe, that sent me way back in time to the beginning of creation and brought me forward again. It was a very interesting out-of-body experience. When I came back, I understood what he meant about the three missing atoms—at least I thought I did. And I said, “Well, I think what you mean is this,” and proceeded to tell him what I thought. When I finished, he just smiled, bowed and disappeared. A little later my alchemist teacher reappeared. My teacher didn’t know the change had taken place. Everything that happened seemed to be only in my experience.
I went away from that totally preoccupied with the experience. At the time, the angels had me working with four other teachers, so I was going from one to the next to the next, and my life was really full. But I couldn’t think about anything except this little man who had appeared to me. I never asked him who he was, and he didn’t return. Time went on, and finally the experience started to fade away. But I always carried the question, who was that guy? Why did he have me go look for those three atoms, and what was this all about? I had a longing to see him again, because he was the purest person I had ever met—ever. Twelve years later I found out who he was. It was Thoth. On November 1, 1984, he reappeared in my life ... and taught me so much. But again, that’s another story for later.

Thoth the Atlantean
This man, Thoth of Egypt, goes almost all the way back to the beginning of Atlantis. He figured out, 52,000 years ago,
how to stay conscious in one body continuously without dying, and he has remained in his original body since then—until
1991, when he moved into a new way of being far beyond our understanding. He lived through most of the period of

Atlantis and even became king of Atlantis for a period of 16,000 years. During those times he was called Chiquetet Arlich
Vomalites. His name was actually Arlich Vomalites, and Chiquetet was a title that meant “the seeker of wisdom,” because
he really wanted to be what wisdom was. After Atlantis sank (we will discuss this subject in great detail soon), Arlich
Vomalites and other advanced beings had to wait for about 6000 years before they could begin to reestablish civilization.
When Egypt began to come to life, he stepped forward and called himself Thoth, keeping that name all through the time of Egypt. When Egypt died, it was Thoth who started the next major culture, which was Greece. Our history books say that Pythagoras was the father of Greece and that it was from and through the Pythagorean school that Greece unfolded and from Greece that our present civilization emerged. Pythagoras says in his own writings that Thoth took him by the hand, led him under the Great Pyramid and taught him all the geometries and the nature of the Reality. Once Greece was born through Pythagoras, Thoth then stepped into that culture in the same body he had during the time ofAtlantis and called himself Hermes. So it is written, Arlich Vomalites, Thoth and Hermes are the same person. True story? Read The Emerald Tablets, written 2000 years ago by Hermes.
Since that time he’s had many other names, but I still call him Thoth. He came back into my life in 1984 and worked with me just about every day until 1991. He’d come in and spend maybe four to eight hours a day teaching me about so many things. This is where the largest body of the information I’ll be sharing with you came from, though it correlates with other information and has been substantiated by many other teachers.
The history of the world, especially, came from him. You see, while in Egypt,
where he was called the Scribe, he wrote down everything that took place. He
was the perfect person for it, right? He was constantly alive, so as a scribe he
would just sit there and watch life go by. He was a good impartial witness, as that
was a major part of his understanding of wisdom. He seldom talked or acted
except when he knew that it was in divine order. Eventually Thoth discovered
how to leave Earth. He would go to another planet where there was life and just
sit there and watch. He would never interfere, wouldn’t say a single word. He’d
be absolutely silent and just watch —just to see how they lived their lives, to get
wisdom, to understand—for maybe a hundred years on each planet. Then he
would go somewhere else and watch.
Altogether, Thoth was gone from Earth for about 2000 years studying other
life forms. But he considers himself an Earth person. Of course, we have all
come from somewhere else at one point or another in the game of life, because
the Earth is not that old. It’s only about five billion years old, and spirit is forever,

always has been and always will be. You always have been and always will be.

Fig. 1-14. Shesat, Thoth’s wife

Spirit cannot die, and any other understanding is just an illusion. But Thoth considers himself from here because it was here that he made the first step that led him into immortality.
This is Thoth’s wife, Shesat [Fig. 1-14]. She’s a most extraordinary person—in some ways at least as extraordinary
as Thoth, if not more so. She was the first person to bring me consciously to Earth, which was in, roughly, 1500 B.C. I was
not physically here, but we had made a conscious link across the dimensions. She connected with me because of
problems the Egyptians were having within their country that, from her point of view, would eventually affect the whole
world and the outcome of humanity. We worked very closely together. I still have a very deep love for her and a really
close connection, though she’s no longer here. Neither is Thoth. In 1991, together they left this entire octave of universes
and stepped over into a completely different kind of experience of life. Their actions are important to us, as you will see.
In 1984, Thoth came back into my life, twelve years after my first experience with him while meditating with my alchemy teacher. The first thing he did was to lead me through an initiation in Egypt. He had me travel all over Egypt and perform ceremonies and accept initiations at certain temples. I was asked to enter a particular space under the Great Pyramid, repeat long phrases in the original Atlantean language and enter a state of consciousness where my body was only light. I’ll tell that story when it’s time, I promise.
Thoth, Geometries and the Flower of Life
After I had been back from Egypt for three or four months, Thoth came in and said, “I want to see the geometries that
were given to you by the angels.” The angels had given me the basic information/geometries of how reality is related to
spirit, and the angels had taught me the meditation I’m going to give to you. This meditation was one of the first things
Thoth wanted from me. That was the exchange: I received all of his memories and he received the meditation. He
wanted the meditation because it was a lot easier than the method he was using. His way of staying alive for 52,000
years was very tenuous—it was like hanging on by a thread. It required him to to spend two hours every day in meditation
or he would die. He had to spend one hour with his head to the north and his feet to the south, in a very specific
meditation; then he had to spend another hour in the reverse position doing a different meditation. Then once every fifty
years, in order to keep his body regenerated, he had to go into what’s called the Halls of Amenti and sit for ten years or
so before the Flower of Life. (This is a pure flame of consciousness that resides deep in the womb of the Earth and to
which humanity’s level of consciousness is completely dependent for its very existence. More later on this subject.)
Thoth was very interested in this new meditation because what took him two hours to accomplish takes only six
breaths with the Mer-Ka-Ba meditation. It’s quick, efficient and far more accurate; and its potential is much greater, as it
leads into a permanent form of awareness. So Thoth began to give me vast amounts of what he knew. When he would
appear in my room, we would not speak with words like we’re doing now. We would speak using a combination of
telepathy and holographic images. His thoughts to me were holographic, I guess you would say. But there was even
more going on than that. If he wanted to describe something to me, I would taste, feel, smell, hear and see his thoughts.

He said he wanted to see what the angels had given me in terms of geometries, so I gave it to him telepathically, with a little ball of light, third eye to third eye. Then he looked at the whole thing, and about five seconds later said that I was missing many levels of interconnected information. So for many hours of every day I would si t there making drawings and figuring out what all this stuff was that we now call sacred geometry.
At that time I had no words for this way of seeing. I didn’t know what it was, and in the beginning I had no idea what
it really meant. And I didn’t know anybody else who was aware of it except in the past. I thought I was the only one in the
whole world. But the more I became involved, the more I realized that it’s been going on forever and it’s everywhere
throughout the Earth’s history and throughout the universe. He taught me in this way for a long time. Finally we came up
with a single drawing [Fig. 1-15], which he said contains everything—all knowledge, both male and female, no excep-
tions. This is the one:
I know this is an outrageous statement to make this early in this writing, but this one drawing, according to Thoth, contains within its proportions every single aspect of life there is. It contains every single mathematical formula, every law of physics, every harmony in music, every biological life form right down to your specific body. It contains every atom, every dimensional level, absolutely everything that’s within waveform universes. (I’ll explain in just a moment about waveform universes.) After he taught me, I understood the above statement; but to just throw out that statement right now sounds incredible. God willing, I will prove what I’m saying. Obviously, I cannot prove that this drawing contains every single aspect of creation, because there are too many things that exist to do that
in one book. But I can show you enough proofs so that you’ll be able to see that you can carry it over to everything.
Thoth then told me that I would find this image of the Flower of Life in Egypt. There were two times that I doubted him in all the years I worked
with him, and this was one of those times. My little mind went, “No
way!” because I had by now read almost every book there was on
Egypt, and I had never seen this anywhere. In my mind I scanned
through everything I could think of. No, I thought, that symbol is not
anywhere in Egypt. But he said I would find it, and then he left. I didn’t
even know where to begin to look for it.
About two weeks later, I saw my friend Katrina Raphaell, who has
written, I believe, three books on crystals. She had just returned from
Egypt and was in a grocery store in Taos, New Mexico, when I walked
in. She was standing at the film counter and had just gotten back the
photographs from her most recent trip to Egypt. She had a stack about
ten inches high sitting on the counter and was taking them out, thirty-six at a
Fig. 1-15. Flower of Life

time, and stacking them. We started talking, and at one point she said to me, “Oh, by the way, my guiding angel told me that I’m supposed to give you a photograph as soon as I see you.” I said, “Okay, what is it?” She said, “I don’t know.” She turned away from the pile and went through it behind her back, pulled one out at random, handed it to me and said, “This is the one I’m supposed to give you.”
Now, Katrina had no idea of the work I was doing, though we had been friends for a couple years, because I didn’t talk to many people in those days about my work—and I definitely had not talked to her. The picture she pulled out was this one—the Flower of Life on a wall in Egypt [Fig. 1-16]!
That particular wall is probably one of the oldest walls in Egypt, in a temple
that’s almost 6000 years old, one of the oldest temples on the planet. When I saw
the Flower of Life in that photo, I couldn’t say anything but “wooooowww.” Katrina
asked, “What is that thing, anyway?” All I could say was, “You don’t understand, but

Fig. 1-16. Flower of Life on wall in Abydos,
photo by Katrina Raphaell.


The Secret of the Flower Unfolds

The Three Osirian Temples in Abydos
This temple is in Abydos [Fig. 2-1]. It was built by Seti the First and dedicated to Osiris. Behind it is another very old temple called the 1 Osirian Temple, where the wall carving of the Flower of Life was found by Katrina Raphaell. There is still a third temple, also dedicated to Osiris and also called the Osirian Temple. Figure 2-2 is what the plan looks like.
Evidently, when they were digging back into the mountain to build the Seti I temple, with full knowledge that the third Osirian temple was there, they found the older, second Osirian temple between the two. Seti I changed the plan
for the newer temple into an L shape to avoid destroying the more an-
cient temple. It’s the only L-shaped temple in all of Egypt, which
strengthens this idea.
Some people say that Seti I built the older temple, too. However, the
older one is a completely different construction design and has much larger
stone blocks. Most Egyptian archaeologists agree that it is a much older
temple. It is also lower in elevation than the Seti temple, which gives cre-
dence to its age. When Seti I began construction of his new temple, the
second one looked like a hill. The third temple, the long, rectangular one in
the back, is also dedicated to Osiris, and it is one of the oldest temples in

Egypt. Seti I was building his temple on this site because the other (third)
temple was very old and he wanted to dedicate a new temple to Osiris. We’ll look at the Seti I temple, then the third one, then the second and oldest one.


Fig 2-1. Temple of Seti the First. This view is of the small
projection at far right of the L-shaped building in Fig. 2-2

Fig 2-2. Plan of the three
adjacent Osirian temples
at Abydos.

Carved Bands of Time
In recent times archaeologists have discovered something very in-
teresting about the wall carvings in Egyptian temples. Tourists usually
notice that there appears to be a great deal of vandalism on the walls,
where a lot of the hieroglyphs, especially ones of the immortals, had
been chipped off and destroyed. What they might not notice is that the
chipping is in a specific horizontal band, from about eye height up to
about twelve to fifteen feet. There is no chipping above or below that. I
didn’t even notice that when I was there; it just didn’t click. It didn’t click
for a lot of Egyptian archaeologists either for hundreds of years, until
somebody finally said, “Hey, the destruction is always in this very spe-
cific region.” From that realization, they began to understand that there
was a difference between the region below the destruction and the one
They finally figured out that there are time bands on the walls. The
band from about eye height down to floor level would represent the past;
the band from eye height up to about fifteen feet or so would represent
the present (the time the temple was built); and higher than that (these
temples sometimes go up forty feet and more) would tell about what will
occur in the future.
The archaeologists then realized that the only people who could have
understood this relationship and actuallychipped the hieroglyphs was
the priesthood of the temple. The priests were the only ones who would Fig. 2-3 Front of the Seti I temple at Abydos, looking down the
have known that they were chipping out only the present. An ordinary length of the temple facade in Fig. 2-1
vandal would not have been so precise in selecting only the band representing the present. Besides, the destroyers did not come in with a sledgehammer; they actually chipped certain things out very carefully. It has taken all these centuries to figure this out.
The Seti I Temple
This is the front of the Seti I temple at Abydos [Fig. 2-3]. This is a small portion of a huge, huge temple.
I know now of at least two proofs that the Egyptians could see into the future. I have a picture of one of these: Way
up high on one of the beams in this portion of the first temple at Abydos is something that, if you’ve never seen it before,

is hard to believe, but it’s there. I’m going to get a
picture of the other one the next time I visit Egypt,
because I know exactly where it is.
I think these two pictures are absolute proof, beyond any doubt at all, that they were able to see the future. How they did it I don’t know; that’s up to you to figure out. But the fact is, they did. At the very end I’ll show the picture that proves this.
The “Third” Temple
This is the third temple of the three—a long, open
temple [Fig. 2-4]. This temple was considered the
most sacred spot in all of Egypt by the ancient kings
and pharaohs, because they believed that this was
where Osiris had experienced resurrection and be-

come immortal. King Zoser, who built the beautiful
funerary complex at Saqqara with its famous Step Pyramid, supposedly for his burial, did not bury him-
self there. Instead, he buried himself at this little unpre-
tentious back temple.
They don’t allow anyone into this third temple. But I couldn’t stand to just look down into it. There was nobody around that I could see, so I dropped down over the wall into a courtyard. I managed to get about five minutes of space before the Egyptians be-
gan yelling at me to get out.
I thought they were going to arrest me, but they
didn’t. The hieroglyphics in there are extraordinary—
nothing like you would see anywhere else. The sim-
plicity and perfection of the drawings is remarkable.


Fig. 2-4 The Osirian “third” temple at Abydos. Top of the wall is as ground level.

Fig. 2-5. Second (middle) temple at Abydos. Reeds are growing in the water covering
the floor. The arrow at right indicates the wall where the Flower of Life is inscribed.

The “Second” Temple’s
Sacred Geometry and Flower
of Life
This is the second temple of the
three [Fig. 2-5], which is lower than
the other two. It was buried under
the earth before they dug it out.
(The ramp, seen at the right edge,
was built to allow access from the
higher ground level.) I took this pic-
ture from the third temple, looking
toward the Sen I temple, whose
back wall can be seen in the back-
ground . The second temple is
where the Flower of Life drawings
in Katrina’s photo were found.
They allow you to go into only
one place in the second temple,
which happened to be the perfect
place. The second temple is mostly
filled with water now because the
Nile has risen, but when it was first
found, it was open and dry.
Here are two inside views [Fig.
2-6] of the center of the temple be-
fore it filled with water. There are three
distinct areas: (1) the steps that come
in from below to the center of the
temple, where there is an altarlike
stone; (2) the altarlike stone itself; and
(3) the steps that go back down on
the other side of the altar, which can’t
be seen here. You will see these

They allow you to go into only one place
in the second temple, which happened to be the perfect place. The second temple is mostly filled with water now because the Nile has risen, but when it was first found, it was open and dry.
Here are two inside views [Fig. 2-6] of the
center of the temple before it filled with
water. There are three distinct areas: (1)
the steps that come in from below to the
center of the temple, where there is an al-
tarlike stone; (2) the altarlike stone itself;
and (3) the steps that go back down on
the other side of the altar, which can’t be
seen here. You will see these three levels
represented in the three phases of the Osiris
religion. You can see the two sets of steps
in the plan of the Osirian “second” temple
on the next page [Fig. 2-7].

Fig. 2-6. Steps inside
the second temple,
before it became
partly filled with water.
[From Robert Lawlor’s
Sacred Geometry]

three levels represented in the three phases of the Osiris religion. You can see the two sets of steps in the plan of the Osirian “second” temple on the next page [Fig. 2-7].
Lucie Lamy shows here what the original plan of the
temple looked like. The two back-to-back pentagons show
the sacred geometry that was hidden in its plan. Now I
need to give you some background on this geometry.
The shape shown at A [Fig. 2-8] is an icosahedron.
The surface of an icosahedron is made up of equilateral
triangles arranged into five-sided pentagonal shapes,
shown at B, which are called icosahedral caps in sacred
geometry. Here the triangles are equilateral. If you were
to take the icosahedral caps off the icosahedron and fit

Fig. 2-7. Plan of the Osirian second temple (from Sacret Geometry — “Philosophy and
Practice” by Robert Lawlor).
them onto each surface of a dodecahedron (twelve penta-
gons put together as at C), the resulting shape happens to
be the stellated dodecahedron D, of the specific propor-
tions of the Christ consciousness grid around the Earth.
Without this grid there would not be a new consciousness
emerging on this planet. You will understand before the end
of this work.
Two of these icosahedral caps hinged together are
like clamshells, indicated at E. These caps are the key, as
they demonstrate the geometry used in the Christ-con-
sciousness grid. And that’s what, I feel, they’re depicting

Fig. 2-8. Shapes. D is the Christ consciousness grid.

in the geometry and plan of this ancient temple. I find it very. appropriate that they used back-to-back pentagons in the plan for a temple dedicated to Osiris and resurrection. Resurrection and ascension lead into Christ consciousness.
Figure 2-9 is down in the second
temple. The arrow indicates the place
where Katrina unknowingly took a
photograph of the Flower of Life.
Here’s the same picture taken with my
camera [Fig. 2-10]. My photo came
out better than hers, and you can see
in the shade that there’s another
Flower of Life pattern on the same
stone, side by side. To the left of these

Fig. 2-9 Looking through
the second temple. Arros
shows where Katrina took

Fig. 2-10. The same Flower of Life
that was in Katrina’s photo. [Fig. -16]

Fig. 2-11. Seed of Life on left. This is
the same stone wall as above, but
farther to the left.

two Flower of Life patterns, on the
same stone, are other related figures.
The stones that were used to build
this temple, including the one in these
figures, are huge. I would say they
weigh at least 70 to 100 tons. It makes
you wonder how those hairy barbari-
ans moved all those hundred-ton
stones around.
There are many related patterns
on these walls. The left one in this
photo [Fig. 2-11] is called the Seed of
Life, which comes directly out of the
Flower of Life pattern, as shown in Fig-
ure 2-12.


There was water at
the bottom of this wall, so
I couldn’t get in there. But

I was wondering what was
on the other side of the
stone, so I leaned around,
put the camera on auto-
matic and took a picture to
see what would come out.
This is what I got [Fig. 2-
13]. You can barely see it
in this photograph, but it
shows many of the com-
ponents that are aspects
of what we’re going to be
studying in this course.
It was an amazing feeling to look at these drawings
because they were so familiar to me, and I knew what
they meant. And here they were, arranged on an Egyp-
tian wall thousands of years old. The drawings were an-
cient, yet I knew exactly what they were.
Carvings of the Copts
This next shot shows a wall in the second temple
taken from a long way away using an 80mm lens. On
this wall is a drawing, which you can barely see in this

Fig. 2-13.
Flower of Life,
with other
components at

Fig. 2-12. Seed of Life in
middle of Flower of Life
Fig. 2-14. Coptic sign.

photo [Fig. 2-14], though we could see it clearly when we were there. It looks like Figure 2-15.
It’s a symbol for Christianity, but it originated with a group of Egyptians called Copts, who lived
at the time when the Egyptian empire was dying. They later became the very first Christians, if we
include two other Egyptian groups who were connected with them—the Essenes and the Druids.
You might not think that these two other groups had Egyptian roots, but we believe they did.
This is a Coptic symbol, and when I saw it, I realized it was probably the Copts who made these

drawings related to the Flower of Life, not the original builders. The Copts came much later, but

Fig. 2-15. Coptic symbol

Fig. 2-16. Coptic design #1 Fig. 2-17. Coptic design #2
they probably knew this was a place for resurrection and used it for the same purpose. The building would have been
several thousand years old when they made these drawings. In this case the drawings would have been no older than
500 B.C., which is when the Copts began.

This is the actual Coptic symbol, a cross and the circle [Fig. 2-16], sometimes found inside a triangle.


Fig. 2-18. Another
Coptic design.

Fig. 2-19. Fish
breathing air.

This is another one, in which you see the cross and the circle, though it’s very worn [Fig. 2-17]. At the top you see the six loops of the center of the Flower of Life. In Egyptian drawings, whenever you see a sphere over a head, it means that the focus is whatever is inside the sphere. That’s what they’re thinking about or what the purpose is at that moment.
Figure 2-18 is another way this symbol is sometimes used—four intersecting arcs with an outer circle around them.
I find this photo very interesting [Fig. 2-19]. You see the fish breathing air.
This was done before Christ. It’s Coptic. It has thirteen little notches, or scales, if you want to call them that, and it’s breathing air. We’ve seen a fish breathing air before, with the Dogons and in Peru. Now here it is in Egypt—and it is seen in other places around the world as well.
The Early Church Changes Christian Symbolism
When you go back and really study some of the older writings, you find that there was a big change in the Christian
religion about 200 years after Christ died. In fact, he wasn’t very well known for about 200 years, at which time the Greek
Orthodox Church, which was the most influential church of the day, made many changes in the Christian religion. They
discarded many beliefs, added others, and changed things around to fit their needs. One thing they changed was an

important symbol. All the way back to the time of Christ, from everything we’ve
been able to read, Christ was not known as the fish, but as the dolphin. It was
changed from the dolphin to the fish during the Greek Orthodox editing. To-
day Jesus is referred to as the fish, and even modem Christians use the fish
to represent Christianity. What this means exactly, I don’t know. I can only
speculate when we talk about dolphins. In addition, the Greek Orthodox
Church also removed from the Bible all references to reincarnation, which
previously had been fully accepted as part of the Christian religion.

The Flower of Life: Sacred Geometry
This image of the Flower of Life [Fig. 2-20] is not only found in Egypt, but
all over the world. I’ll show you photographs of it worldwide in volume 2. It’s
found in Ireland, Turkey, England, Israel, Egypt, China, Tibet, Greece and Ja-
pan—it’s found everywhere.

Fig. 2-20. Flower of Life
Update: In recent times we
have found the Flower of Life
image in eighteen more places,
including Sweden, Lapland, Iceland and the Yucatan.

Fig. 2-21.
Tree of Life

Fig. 2-21. Seed of Life, extracted from flower.

Almost everywhere around the world it has the same name, which is the Flower
of Life, though elsewhere around the cosmos it has other names. Two of the main
names would be translated as the Language of Silence and the
Language of Light. It’s the source of all language. It’s the primal
language of the universe, pure shape and proportion.
It’s called a flower, not just because it looks like a flower,
but because it represents the cycle of a fruit tree. The fruit tree
makes a little flower, which goes through a metamorphosis
and turns into a fruit— a cherry or an apple or something. The
fruit contains within it the seed, which falls to the ground, then
grows into another tree. So there’s a cycle of tree to flower to
fruit to seed and back to a tree again, in these five steps. This
is an absolute miracle. But you know, it just goes right over our
heads. It’s so normal that we simply accept it and don’t think
much about it. The five simple, miraculous steps in this cycle
of life actually parallel the geometries of life, which we’ll con-
tinue to see all through this work.

The Seed of Life
As I was showing earlier [Fig. 2-12], in the middle of the Flower of Life are
seven interconnected circles which, if you take them out and draw a circle
around them, would create the image called the Seed of Life [Fig. 2-21].

The Tree of Life Connection
Another image in this pattern, which you’re probably more familiar with, is
called the Tree of Life [Fig. 2-22]. Many people have thought that the Tree of Life
originated with the Jews or Hebrews, but it did not. The kabbalah did not originate
the Tree of Life, and there is proof. The Tree of Life does not belong to any cul-
ture—not even the Egyptians, who carved the Tree of Life on two sets of three
pillars in Egypt at both Kamak and Luxor around 5000 years ago. It’s outside any
race or religion. It is a pattern that is intimately part of nature. If you go to distant
planets where there is consciousness, I’m sure you’ll find the same image.
So if we have a tree, then a flower, then a seed, and if these geometries do in fact Fig. 2-23. Superimposed Tree and Seed of Life
parallel the five cycles of a fruit tree that we see on Earth, then the source of the tree
would have to be perfectly contained within the seed. If we take the images of the Seed of Life and
the Tree of Life and superimpose them, we can see this relationship [Fig. 2-23].
See how perfectly they fit? They become like a key, one fitting directly over the other.
In addition, if you look at the Tree of Life that was found on Egyptian pillars, you’ll see one
more circle above and one below [Fig. 2-24]. This means there were originally twelve
components, and the twelve-component version also fits perfectly over the whole Flower
of Life image. (There is a thirteenth circle to the Tree that can either be there or not.)
I’m approaching sacred geometry as though you never heard the words in your life.
We’re starting from the very bottom, and we’ll slowly build on this until we get to the place

where it makes sense. First you can see the synchronicity of the way sacred geometry
forms move together and fit perfectly into each other. This is a right-brain way of un-
derstanding the special nature of this geometry. As we study more and more complex
patterns, you’ll keep seeing the same kind of amazing relationships moving through ev-
erything. The odds of some of these geometrical relationships happening at all is prob-
ably a zillion to one, yet you will consistently see these mind-boggling relationships unfold.


Fig. 2-24. Tree of Life with two extra circles.

Fig. 2-25. Versica piscis with key axes.

The Vesica Piscis
In sacred geometry there’s a pattern that looks like this [Fig. 2-25]. It’s formed when the centers of two equal-radius circles are placed on each other’s circumferences. The area where the two circles intersect forms what’s called a vesica piscis. This configuration is one of the most predominant and important of all relationships in sacred geometry, as you’ll begin to see.
There are two measurements in the vesica piscis—one that runs through the center across the narrow width, and one that connects one point to the opposite point through the center—that are keys to a great knowledge within this information. What many people don’t know is that every line in the Tree of Life, whether it has 10 or 12 circles, measures out to either the length or the width of a vesica piscis in the Flower of Life. And they all have Golden Mean proportions. If you look carefully at the superimposed Tree of Life, you’ll see that every line corresponds exactly to either the length or the width of
a vesica piscis. This is the first relationship that became visible as we came out of the Great Void. (The Great Void is another key that will be discussed soon.)
Egyptian Wheels and Dimensional Travel

Fig. 2-26. Wheel on an Egyptian wall.

These wheels [Fig. 2-26] are some of the old-
est symbols known. So far they’ve been found only
on the ceilings of certain very old Egyptian tombs.
They’re always found in sets of four or eight, and
nobody knows what they are. The world’s most fa-
mous Egyptian archaeologists don’t have the vagu-
est idea what they mean. But to me they’re proof
that the Egyptians knew that the Flower of Life was
more than just a pretty design and that they knew
most, perhaps even more, of the information that
will be shared here. In order to understand where
the wheels are in the Flower of Life, you have to

Fig. 2-27. Wheels; not all eight are
visible here.

study the tremendous levels of knowledge contained within it. You would never get there by just looking at designs. It’s nothing that you could just happen on—you’d have to know the ancient secret of the Flower of Life.
This photo shows most of a set of eight of these
wheels [Fig. 2-27]. The next picture [Fig. 2-28] is
very dark and hard to see details. This is a ceil-
ing, and it was pitch black where I took the pic-
ture. Walking toward the right along the bottom
of the drawing are seven people with animal
heads. They’re called neters, or gods, and each
of them has an orangish red oval above its head,
which Thoth called the egg of metamorphosis.
The neters are concentrated on the time when
we go through a certain stage of resurrection,
which is a rapid biological change into a differ-

ent life form. They’re holding an image of that
transition as they’re walking along the line, then
suddenly the line comes to an end and there’s a

Fig. 2-28. Wheels, neters and 90-degree turn at right. The dark circles are above the heads of figures, the seven at the bottom having animal heads.

90-degree shift upward, and they’re walking perpendicular to their first direction.
This 90 degrees is a very important part of this work. The 90-degree turn is crucial to understanding how to make resurrection or ascension real. The dimensional levels are separated by 90 degrees; musical notes are separated by 90 degrees; the chakras are separated by 90 degrees—90 degrees keeps coming up over and over again. In fact, in order for us to enter into the fourth dimension (or any dimension, for that matter), we must make a 90-degree turn.
Probably at this point I need to make sure we have a common understanding about what dimensions are—like third dimension, fourth dimension, fifth dimension and so forth. What are we talking about? I’m not talk-ing about dimensions in a normal mathematical sense, as in the three axes or so-called dimensions of space: the x, y and z axes—front to back, left to right and up and down. Some people call these three axes the third dimension and say that time becomes the fourth dimension. This is not what I’m talking about.


Dimensions, Harmonics and the Waveform Universe
What I’m seeing as the various dimensional levels has to do more with
music and harmonics than anything else. There are probably different con-
notations of what I’m talking about too, though most people who study this pretty
much agree. A piano has eight white keys from C to C, which is the familiar
octave, and in between those are the five black keys. The eight white keys and
the five black keys produce all the sharps and flats in what’s called the chro-
matic scale, which is thirteen notes (actually twelve notes, with the thirteenth
beginning the next octave). So from one C to the next is really thirteen steps,
not just eight.
Keeping that in mind, I want to show you the concept of a sine wave. Sine
waves correspond to light (and the electromagnetic spectrum) and the vibra-
tion of sound. Figure 2-29 shows some samples. We’re all probably familiar

Fig. 2-29. Sample sine waves.

with this. In the entire Reality we’re in, every single thing is based on sine waves. There are no exceptions I know of except the Void itself and perhaps spirit.

Everything in this Reality is sine wave, or cosine, if you want to look at it like that. What makes one thing different from another is wavelength and pattern. A wavelength extends from any point on the curve to the point where the entire curve starts over, as from A to B on the longer wavelength, or from C to D on the shorter wavelengths. If you get into a really long wavelength, they look almost like straight lines. For example, your brain waves are about ten to the tenth power centimeters, and they’re almost like straight lines coming out of your head. Quantum physics or quantum mechanics looks at everything in the Reality in one of two ways. They don’t know why they can’t look at it in both ways at once, though the geometries tell why if you study them very carefully. You can consider any object, such as this book, as being made up of tiny particles like atoms; or you can forget that idea and just look at it as a vibration, a waveform, such as electromagnetic fields or even sound, if you like. If you look at it as atoms, the laws can be seen to fit that model; if you look at it as waveforms, the laws can be seen to fit that model.
Everything in our world is a waveform (sometimes called pattern, or sine-wave signature) or could even be seen as sound. All things—your bodies, planets, absolutely everything—are waveforms. If you choose this particular way of looking at Reality and superimpose that view over the reality of the harmonics of music (an aspect of sound), we can begin to talk about different dimensions.


Wavelength Determines Dimension
The dimensional levels are nothing but differing base-rate wavelengths. The only difference between this dimension and any other is the length of its basic waveform. It’s just like a television or radio set. When you turn the dial, you pick up a different wavelength. Then you get a different image on your TV screen or a different station on your radio. It’s exactly the same for dimensional levels. If you were to change the wavelength of your consciousness, and in so doing change all your body patterns to a wavelength different from this universe, you would literally disappear out of this world and reappear in the one to which you were tuned.
This is exactly what the UFOs do when you see them shooting across the sky, if you’ve ever seen one. They shoot across at unbelievable speeds, then make a 90-degree turn and disappear. The people onboard those ships are not being carried through space like we are on airplanes. Spaceship passengers are consciously connected psychically to the vehicle itself, and when they get ready to go into another world, they go into meditation and link all aspects of themselves into oneness. Then they make either a 90-degree shift or two 45-degree shifts all at once in their minds, actually taking the whole ship, along with its passengers, into another dimension.
This universe—and by that I mean all the stars and atoms going infinitely out and infinitely in forever—has a base wavelength of about 7.23 centimeters. You can pick any spot in this room and go infinitely in or infinitely out forever within this particular universe. In a spiritual sense this 7.23-cm wavelength is Om, the Hindu sound of the universe. Every object in this universe produces a sound according to its construction. Each object makes a unique sound. If you average the sounds of all the objects in this universe, this third dimension, you would get this 7.23-cm wavelength, and it would be the true sound of Om for this dimension.
This wavelength is also the exact average distance between our eyes, from the center of one pupil to the other—that
is, if you take a hundred people and average them. It’s also the exact average distance from the tip of our chins to the tip
of our noses, the distance across our palms and the distance between our chakras, to give a few more examples. This
7.23-cm length is located throughout our bodies in various ways because we are emerged within this particular universe, and it is embedded within us.
It was Bell Laboratories that discovered this wavelength, not some spiritual person sitting in a cave somewhere.
When they first put up the microwave system that went around the United States and pulled the on switch, they found
static in their system. You see, Bell Labs just happened to pick for the system’s sending frequency one slightly longer
than seven centimeters. Why they chose that wavelength, I don’t know. They tried to find the static, looked through their
equipment, tried everything they could. First they thought it was coming from inside the Earth. Eventually they looked into
the heavens and found it, and said, “Oh, no, it’s coming from everywhere!” In order to get rid of the static, they did
something that we as a nation and a planet are still suffering from: They upped the power 50,000 times over what they
would normally need, which created a very powerful field, so that the 7.23-cm wavelength coming from everywhere
would not interfere.

Dimensions and the Musical Scale
For reasons such as the above, I believe that 7.23 centimeters is the wavelength of our universe, this third dimen-
sion. As you go up into dimensional levels, the wavelength gets shorter and shorter, with higher and higher energy. As
you go down in dimensional levels, the wavelength gets longer and longer, with lower and lower energy, more and more
dense. Just as with a piano, there’s a space between the notes, so that when you hit one note, there’s a very definite
place where the next note is. In this waveform universe we exist in, there is a very definite place where the next dimen-
sional level exists. It’s a specific wavelength relative to this one. Most cultures in the cosmos have this basic understanding of
the universe, and they know how to move between dimensions. We’ve forgotten it all. God willing, we will remember.
Musicians, music theorists and physicists discovered long ago that there are places between the notes called overtones. Between each step of the chromatic scale there are twelve major overtones. (A group in California has discovered over 200 minor overtones between each note.)
If we show each note in the chromatic scale as a circle, we have thirteen circles [Fig. 2-30]. Each circle represents a
white or black key and the shaded circle at the end would be the thirteenth note that begins the next octave. The black
circle on this illustration represents the third dimension, our known universe, and the fourth circle, the fourth dimension.
The twelve major overtones between any two notes, or dimensions, are a replica of the larger pattern. It’s holographic. If
you carry it further, between each overtone you’ll find another twelve overtones that replicate the whole pattern. It goes
down and up literally forever. This is called a geometrical progression, only in harmonics. If you continue to study it, you’ll

Fig. 2-30. An octave between the walls. The black circle represents the third dimension; the shaded circle ends one octave and begins the next.

find that each of the unique musical scales that have been discovered produces a different octave of experience—more universes to explore! (This is another subject we will come back to.)
You’ve probably heard people talk about the 144 dimensions and how the number 144 relates to other spiritual subjects.
This is because there are twelve notes in an octave and twelve overtones between each note; and 12 x 12 = 144 dimensional
levels between each octave. To be specific, there are 12 major dimensions and 132 minor dimensions within each
octave (though in truth the progression goes on forever). This diagram represents one octave. The thirteenth note
repeats, then there’s another octave above that one. There’s an octave of universes below this and an octave above,
and it stretches on theoretically forever. So as big and as infinite as this universe seems (which is just an illusion any-
way), there are still an infinite number of other ways to express the one Reality, and each dimension is experientially
completely different from any other.
That’s what much of this teaching is about—reminding us that we here
on Earth are sitting in the third dimension on a planet that is in the process right now of becoming fourth-dimensional and beyond. The third-dimensional component of this planet is about to be nonexistent for us after a while—we’re going to be aware of this dimension for only a short time longer. First we’ll go into certain overtones of the fourth dimension. Most people in the higher dimensions who are watching and helping with this process now believe that we’re going to keep moving on up through higher dimensions quite rapidly.
The Wall between Octaves
Between each whole-note universe and between each subspace or overtone universe, there is nothing—no thing, absolutely zip. Each of these spaces is called a void. The void between each dimension is called the duat by Egyptians or the bardo by Tibetans. Each time you pass from one dimension or overtone into the next, you pass through a void or blackness that’s in between. But certain voids are “blacker” than others, and the blackest of these exist between the octaves. They’re more powerful than the voids that exist within an octave. Please understand that we are using words that cannot fully explain this concept. This void that exists between octaves can be called the Great Void or the Wall. It’s like a wall you have to pass through to get to a higher octave. God put these voids there in a particular way for certain reasons that will soon become apparent.
All of these dimensions are superimposed over each other, and every point in space/time contains them all. The
doorway to any of them is anywhere. That makes it convenient—you don’t have to go looking for it, you just have to
know how to access it. Although there are certain sacred places in the geometries of our reality here on Earth where
it’s easier to become aware of the various dimensions and overtones—sacred sites, which are nodal points con-
nected to the Earth and the heavens (we’ll also talk about them later)—there are also specific places in space that
are tied to the geometries of space. These places are sometimes referred to by explorers as stargates, openings to
other dimensional levels where it’s easier to get through. But in truth, you can be anywhere to go anywhere. It really

doesn’t matter where you are if you truly understand the dimensions and, of course, are capable of divine love.
Changing Dimensions
Going back to those guys on the temple ceiling (a few
pages ago), they’re changing dimensions. They’re making
a 90-degree turn and changing their wavelength. And those
wheels, as you’re going to see later, are connected to the
harmonics of music—and you now know that the harmon-
ics of music are connected to the dimensional levels. Since
the people on the ceiling are making this change while think-
ing about metamorphosis and resurrection, I believe these
wheels are actually telling us exactly where they went, into
which dimension. By the time we finish, you’ll understand
what I’m talking about.

The Star Tetrahedron
This star tetrahedron with Leonardo’s image behind it
[Fig. 2-31 ] is going to become one of the most important
drawings for this work. What you’re looking at is two-di-
mensional, but think of it in three dimensions. A star tetra-
hedron, just as shown here, happens to exist around each
human body. We’re going to spend a great deal of time to
get you to the point where you can see that you do have
this image around your body. Notice especially that there’s
a tube running down the center of the body through which
we can breathe life-force energy, and the two apexes at
the top and bottom of this tube connect the third dimension
to the fourth dimension. You can inhale fourth-dimensional
prana directly through the tube. You could be in a vacuum,
a total void, with no air to breathe, and completely survive if
you could live the principles of this understanding. 51

As Richard Hoagland has shown the United Nations and NASA, we are now beginning to scientifically rediscover
this field. Just as it is shown around Leonardo, it is also around planets, suns and even larger bodies. This could
become the standard explanation of how some of these outer planets survive. Why? The planets are radiating off the
surface far more energy than they’re receiving from the Sun, a lot more. Where is it coming from? With this new understand-
ing, if Leonardo were a planet instead of a person, the points at the north and south poles would be bringing in huge
amounts of energy from another dimension (or dimensions). Planets literally exist in more than one dimension, and if you
could see the whole Earth in all its glory—the various fields and energies around a planet—you’d be astounded. Mother
Earth is far more intricate and complex than we at this dense level can perceive. This channeling of energy is actually
how it works for people, too. And the particular dimension (or dimensions) that this energy comes from depends on how
we breathe.
On Leonardo’s drawing, the tetrahedron pointing up to the Sun is male. The one pointing down toward the Earth is
female. We’re going to call the male one a Sun tetrahedron and
the female one an Earth tetrahedron. There are only two sym-
metrical ways that a human being can look out of this star-tetra-
hedral form with one point of the star above the head and one
point below the feet and with the alignment of the human body
looking toward the horizon: For a male body looking out of his
form, his Sun tetrahedron has a point facing forward, and the op-
posite flat face is behind him; his Earth tetrahedron has a point
facing out the back, and the opposite flat face is in front [Fig. 2-3
For a female body looking out other form, her Sun tetrahe-
dron has a flat face forward, and a point facing out the back; and
her Earth tetrahedron has a point facing forward, and the oppo-
site flat face is behind her [Fig. 2-320]. We’ll explain the Mer-Ka-
Ba meditation through the fourteenth breath in volume 2. First I
would like to introduce other aspects so that you can begin to
remember and prepare yourself for the eventual reactivation of
your lightbody, the Mer-Ka-Ba. Beginning soon, we’ll start talking
about yogic breathing, which probably many of you are already
familiar with. Then we’ll learn about mudras after that. We’re go-
ing to keep going step by step until we are ready to experience
spherical breathing, the state of being from which your Mer-Ka-


Ba can come to life.

Threeness in Duality: The Holy Trinity
To understand the situation here on Earth, we will offer another piece of information to refer to as we proceed. In nature, the law of opposites appears to be manifesting throughout our reality, such as male and female or hot and cold. In truth, this is incomplete. Actually, every manifestation in our reality has three components. You hear people talk about male and female polarity and about polarity consciousness; that isn’t the full truth. There has never been a polarity in this reality without a third component, with one rare exception we will talk about in a moment.
There is a trinity in almost every situation. Let’s think of some exam’ pies of what we usually call polarity. How about black and white, hot and cold, up and down, male and female and Sun and Earth? For black and white, there’s gray; for hot and cold, there’s warm; for up and down, there’s the middle; for male and female, there’s a child, for the Sun and the Earth (male and female), there’s the Moon (child). Time is also in three components: past, present and future. The mental relationship of how we see space is with the x, y, z axes—front and back, left and right, up and down. Even in each of these three directions there’s a middle or neutral point, creating three parts.
Probably the best example is the fabric of matter itself in this third dimension. Matter is made of three basic particles:
protons, electrons and neutrons. On the next higher level of organization from the three basic particles you will find
atoms, and on the next lower level, finer particle divisions. In a similar manner, consciousness perceives itself in the
middle between the macrocosm and the microcosm. If you look closely into either level, you will always find threeness.
There is a special exception, as there almost always is. It relates to the beginning of things. Primal aspects usually do have twoness, but they are extremely rare. An example is found in number sequences. Sequences such as 123456789... or 2-4-8-16-32..., or 1-1-2-3-5-8-13-21... —and in fact all sequences known—strangely enough need a minimum of three successive numbers of the sequence in order to calculate the entire sequence, with one exception: the Golden Mean logarithmic spiral, which needs only two. This is because that spiral is the source of all other sequences. In the same manner, atoms all have three parts, as mentioned before, with the single exception of the first atom: hydrogen. Hydrogen has only one proton and one electron; it has no neutron. If it has a neutron, which is the next step up, it is called heavy hydrogen, but the very beginning of matter has only two components.
Since we mentioned numbers exhibiting threeness, we might as well bring up color. There are three primary colors rrom which the three secondary colors are created. This means that the universe as we now know it—all created things— is composed of three primary parts except in its rare primal areas. In addition, the very nature of how the universe is perceived by human consciousness is through the three major ways we just spoke of: time, space and matter, all of which are reflections of the sacred holy trinity.


An Avalanche of Knowledge
Most people by now are aware that something unusual is going on here on Earth. We are in extremely accelerated time, and many events are happening that have never been seen before. There are more people on the planet than have ever been known before, and if we continue at the same rate, in a few more years we will double our population to about eleven or twelve billion people.
Regarding our human evolutionary learning curve, the supply of information on the planet is growing far faster than
the population. Here’s a fact according to the Encyclopedia Britannica. From the time of our oldest known human civiliza-
tion, the ancient Sumerians (circa 3800 B.C.), continuing for almost 5800 years until about A.D. 1900, a certain number
of bits of information had been collected, a certain number of so-called facts that were added up to determine precisely
how many things we knew. Fifty years later, from 1900 to 1950, our knowledge had doubled. That means it took 5800
years to learn a certain amount, then it took fifty years to double it—amazing! But then in the next twenty years, by about
1970, we doubled it again. It took only ten more years, to about 1980, to double that! Now it’s doubling every few years.
Knowledge is coming in like an avalanche. The information was coming so fast in the mid-eighties that NASA couldn’t
put it into their computers fast enough. I heard that in approximately 1988 they were eight or nine years behind in simply
entering the incoming data. At the same time this avalanche of knowledge is building up, the computers themselves,
which are boosting the acceleration, are about to make a huge change. Approximately every eighteen months comput-
ers are doubling both speed and memory. First we came out with the 286, then the 386; then we had the 486, and now
the 586 is out [this was 1993], which makes the 486 obsolete. We didn’t even know how to use the 486 yet, and here’s
the 586. And we’ve already got the 686 planned. By the turn of the century or soon after-ward, a home computer will be
so powerful and fast that it will surpass all of the present (1993) computers of NASA and the Pentagon combined.
A single computer will be so fast and powerful that it can actually watch the whole Earth and give constant weather data for every square inch of the planet. It will do things that now seem absolutely impossible. And we’re beginning to speed up our ability to enter the data: Now huge amounts of information are entered directly from other computers and scanners and direct voice. So with this incredible amount of knowledge entering into human consciousness, it becomes obvious that a major change for humankind is being birthed.
For thousands of years spiritual information was kept secret. Priests and priestesses of various religions or cults
would give their lives to keep the rest of the world from knowing about one of their secret documents or piece of spiritual
knowledge, making sure it remained secret. All the various spiritual groups and religions around the world had their
secret information. Then suddenly, in the mid-sixties, the veil of secrecy was lifted. In unison, almost all the spiritual
groups of the world opened their archives at the same moment in history. You can browse through books in your neighbor-
hood bookstore and see information that has been sealed and guarded for thousands of years. Why? Why now?
Life on this planet is accelerating faster and faster and faster, obviously culminating in something new and different,
perhaps just out of the reach of our normal imagination. We are always changing. What does this mean for the world?
Why is it happening? Better yet, why is it happening now? Why didn’t it happen a thousand years ago? Or why didn’t it
wait to happen 100, 1000 or 10,000 years from now? It’s really important to understand the answer to this question,

because if you don’t know why this
is happening now, then you prob-
ably will not understand what’s hap-
pening to you in your life or be pre-
pared for the coming changes.
Though I don’t want to get into
the real meaning of what this is
about right now, one of the answers
lies in the fact that the computer is
made out of silicon and we’re made
out of carbon. It’s tied into the rela-
tionship of silicon and carbon, but
I’ll leave that for a while and con-
tinue with the unusual nature of
what’s happening here on Earth.
Fig. 2-33. Earth’s location
in the solar system.

Fig. 2-34. Quasar (quasi-
stellar radio source) Earth’s Relation to the Cosmos
believed to be the most
distant and luminous
objects in the universe. Let’s talk about Sirius and the Earth again.
You are here [Fig. 2-33], and this is where we
begin in the big picture. From where we are on
this third planet out from the Sun, Earth’s inti-
mate connection to Sirius cannot be understood
very easily. You have to go out into deep space
to things like this [Fig. 2-34], which you might
not recognize—at least most people don’t.
This is a quasar, and it’s enormous. It defies
all the laws of physics, and we don’t know
what the heck it’s doing. But that’s not really
what I want you to notice.


Spirals in Space
This next photo is a little closer and
more familiar to us [Fig. 2-35]. This is a
galaxy, obviously not us, because it’s
pretty hard to take a picture of yourself
from within yourself. (The cluster at the
bottom right is a nebula, and it is almost
certainly much, much closer than the
galaxy; they are not connected.) Notice
the stars coming out of the galaxy in a
white spiral. At exactly 180 degrees op-
posite one of the spirals is another
emerging spiral. I believe there are eight
known forms of galaxies—though all of
them are functions of each other—and
this is the primary model.
For a long time astronomers pretty
much thought that what you saw out
there was it; if you could see it, it was
there. They were either totally oblivious

Fig. 2-35. Spiral Galaxy

to the invisible side of Reality, or they didn’t feel it was that important. But the invisible side of our Reality is actually much
greater than the visible side, and probably more important. In fact, if the full electromagnetic spectrum were a line about
two yards long, then visible light, with which we see objects, would be a band about 1/32 of an inch wide. In other words,
the visible part of the Reality is far less than one percent of the total—almost nothing. The invisible universe is really our
true home.
There’s much more. There are things even beyond the electromagnetic spectrum that we’re just beginning to understand. For example, they’ve discovered that when an old sun explodes and dies, like the one in the bottom right of the picture, it seems to occur only in the dark area of the spiral (shown by arrow A), indicating that there is a difference between deep space (arrow B) and the inner space between the light spirals. So they’re beginning to realize there’s a distinct difference between the two areas of space as well as between the dark and the light areas of the galaxy. There’s something different about the dark areas of the spiral that seems to be related to the light areas.


Our Sirius Connection
Observing these characteristics of a galactic spiral led to another discovery. Other scientists noticed that as our solar
system moves through space, it’s not moving in a straight line, but in a helical pattern, a spiral. Well, such a spiral is not
possible unless we are gravitationally connected to an other large body, such as another solar system or something
larger. For example, many people think the Moon rotates around the Earth, right? It does not. It never has. The Earth and
the Moon rotate around each other, and there’s a third component between them approximately one-third of the distance
from the Earth to the Moon, which is the pivotal point, an the Earth and Moon rotate around this point in a helical pattern
as the also move around the Sun. This happens because the Earth is connecte with a very large body, which is the
Moon. Our moon is huge, and it’s caus ing the Earth to move in a particular pattern. And since the entire solar sy tern is
spiraling in the same manner through space, then the whole solar sy tern must be gravitationally connected with some
other very large body.
So astronomers started searching for this body that was pulling on ou solar system. They first narrowed it down to a certain area of the sky tha we were linked with, then they narrowed it down further and further, unti just a few years ago they finally pinned it down to a specific solar system We are linked with the star Sirius—with Sirius A and Sirius B. Our sola system and the Sirius system are intimately connected through gravitation We move through space together, spiraling around a common center. Ou fate and the fate of Sirius are intimately connected. We are one system!
Ever since scientists have known about the dark area inside a spiraling galaxy being different, they have discovered
that stars don’t just move ou along the curved arm of a spiral. If someone spun a water hose over hi head and you
viewed the scene from above, you would see droplets that ap peared to move in spirals. Can you envision that? Each
individual drop though, is not moving in a spiral, but is moving radially away in a straighl line from the center; it only
appears to be moving in spirals. It’s the same way in a galaxy. Each of these stars is actually moving radially away.
At the same time the stars are moving radially away from the center, they are also moving, independent of the system as a whole, from one arm through the dark light into the white light, orbiting the whole galactic system. It probably takes billions of years—I don’t know—for one cycle to complete itself.
Imagine that Figure 2-36 is a galaxy viewed from above and that the dark color represents the black-light spirals and
the light color represents the white-light spirals. From the edge it looks like a flying saucer. The orbit we make around the
center of the galaxy has within it a spiral motion similar to a coiled spring. In addition to our solar system, the same spiral
motion is seen between Sirius A and Sirius B [see Fig. 1-4 in chapter 1]. The spiral of the Earth and the Moon, I believe,
is different. This spiraling motion of the two Sirian stars just happens to be identical to the geometries of the DNA
molecule, according to an Australian scientist. This makes you suspect that perhaps there’s a relationship in the unfold-
ment of things, that events happen according to some kind of larger plan, similar to the unfoldment of a human body
guided by the information within the DNA. Of course, it’s only speculation, but because of the principle “as above, so


Update: This update will not make com-
plete sense until you fully understand the Mer-
Ka-Ba, but this is the most appropriate place
to put it. Astrophysicist William Purcell has just
discovered (reported May 12, 1997, in Time
magazine) that “a colossus of antimatter,” a
tube at 90 degrees to the plane of the galaxy,
“is spewing out from the center of our galaxy
and reaching trillions of kilometers into space.”
This resembles the same geometries of the Mer-
Ka-Ba on a galactic level.
At the same time, Cornell astronomers
have discovered that about 80 percent of the
stars in the galaxy NGC 4138 (mostly older
stars) are rotating in one direction, whereas
about 20 percent of the stars (mostly younger
stars) are rotating in the opposite direction
along with a huge cloud of hydrogen gas. Their
findings were presented on January 18, 1997,
at the American Astronomical Society. This is
a counterrotating field. Not only do galaxies
look like Mer-Ka-ba fields, but they appear to
have the same internal dynamics! (Of course,
I personally believe that galaxies are living be-
ings, and that they are really nothing but a huge
living Mer-Ka-Ba field.) In addition, physicists

Fig. 2-36. Spiral Galaxy, overhead
view (top) and edge (bottom).

below,” this is highly probable.
So we have two related questions
to answer. One is why Sirius is so im-
portant, which has been explained by
our gravitational connection to it, An-
other is, why is this extremely rapid pat-
tern of evolution we are experi-
encing on Earth today taking place
at this moment in history? Let’s keep
looking in the heavens. First, here are
two incidental pieces of information to
A Galaxy’s Spiral Arms, Surround-
ing Sphere and Heat Envelope
Figure 2-37 is out of National Geo-
graphic, showing what they’ve now
discovered . They ’ve found that
spheres of energy surround galaxies.
Notice the tiny galaxy with its spiraling
arms, along with a bunch of loose
stars, all enveloped in the sphere of
energy. Then outside that sphere is
another enormous sphere of energy,
shown here as a hexagonal grid. So
there’s a huge sphere inside a smaller
sphere, with a tiny galaxy inside it. As
we progress, you’re going to see that
you have exactly the same field
around you.
Figure 2-38 is a picture of the heat
envelope of a galaxy, slightly tilted,
Sun, and as the Earth orbits the
Sun, the angle that the light hits the

at the University of Rochester and the Univer-
sity of Kansas have found evidence that changes
the long-held belief that space is the same in
all directions. Researcher John Ralston re-
ported that “there seems to be an absolute axis,
a kind of cosmological North Star that orients
the universe.” This work is published in the
April 21, 1997, issue of Physical Review Let-
They have also discovered that light
travels differently along this axis than any-
where else. There are now two known
different speeds of light! The axis is the
key to the living Mer-Ka-Ba field, and this
finding may eventually prove that the en-
tire universe is really just a giant living
Mer-Ka-Ba field. After you are aware of
your own Mer-Ka-Ba field, reread this sec-
tion and you will understand.

Fig. 2-37. Galactic energy spheres.

Fig. 2-38. Galactic
heat envelope.

surface of the Earth changes, depending on where it is in its orbit. This is why we have four seasons.
Within this yearly rotation there’s another very slow wobble, which most people know as the precession of the
equinoxes, which takes almost 26,000 years to complete. To be more accurate, it’s about 25,920 years—it depends on
who you read, because everybody comes up with a few years’ difference. There are other wobbles, too. For example,
that +23-degree angle to the Sun is not fixed; there’s a wobble of about 40,000 years where it changes about three
degrees—from about 23 to about 26 degrees. Then there’s another wobble inside the little three-degree wobble that
completes a cycle about every fourteen months. And they’ve discovered another one that completes about every four-
teen years. Now they say they’ve discovered yet another one. If you read the ancient Sanskrit writings, all these wobbles
are profoundly important for consciousness on the planet. They’re tied directly to specific events and to the time these
events happen on the planet—just as our DNA is tied to the various phases in the growth of the human body.
For now I just want to look at the main wobble, which is called the precession of the equinoxes [Fig. 2-39]. This
wobble moves in an oval pattern, and the large oval in Figure 2-40 is the wobble itself. The right end, on the long axis of
the oval, is called the apogee, which points toward the center of the galaxy. The bottom half of the oval shows when the
planet is heading toward the center of the galaxy, and the top half shows when the planet has come back around and is
heading away from the center. This movement away from the center of the galaxy is also called going with the galactic
wind. The Sanskrit writings say that the ancient beings—who somehow knew about the precession—say that it’s not at
the far ends of this oval when great change takes place, but slightly after these extreme points are passed—at the points
indicated by the two small ovals at A and C. Great change takes place at those two points. There are two other points

Fig. 2-39. Procession of the equinoxes (the point at
wich the Earth’s celestal equator intersects its ecliptic) is due to the slow rotation of the Earth’s axis around a perpendicular to the ecliptic.

Fig. 2-40. Traveling through the time period marked by the cycles of the precession of the equinoxes.
The large oval is tha path of the Earth’s axis.


sitting halfway between the small ovals, shown at B and D, which are also very important places, though change is not as likely as at A and C. Right now in the 1990s we are positioned at A, the lower small oval, which indicates that this is a time of tremendous change.
According to the ancient writings, when we reach the up-
per small oval at C [Fig. 2-41], moving away from the center
of the galaxy, we begin to fall asleep and keep losing con-
sciousness and falling through the dimensional levels until
we come to the place at the lower small oval, when we start
to wake up and begin to move up through the dimensional Fig. 2-41. The four Hindu yugas, ascending and descending.
levels. We wake up in definite stages until we get to the upper oval again, when we fall asleep again. But this is not
a closed pattern, because we’re moving through space. It’s a helical, open-ended pattern like a spring, not a repeat-
ing cycle as within a circle. Because of that, each time around we fall asleep a little less than the time before and
wake up a little more. A similar cycle occurs on Earth each day. If you look at the Earth from space, it is half dark and
half light at any moment, and the people on the dark side are pretty much asleep and the people on the light side are
pretty much awake. Even though we have day and night, we don’t repeat the same things over and over, but
hopefully we wake up and become more conscious each day. Even though we fall asleep and wake up, we keep
going further each rime. This precession of the equinoxes is just the same, only it’s a much longer cycle.
The Tibetans and the Hindus called these particular time periods yugas, which are simply ages. Each yuga has both
a descending and ascending phase, so if you use the Hindu system, the age around the top oval at C is called the
descending satya yuga. Then comes the descending treta yuga, dwapara yuga, and kali yuga at the other end. In the kali
yuga you have both descending and ascending. Then you enter the ascending dwapara and so on. We’re now in the
ascending dwapara yuga. We’re out of the kali yuga by about 900 years, and right now is the time when amazing things
are predicted to happen. The world is now rediscovering for itself that these are periods of enormous changes on Earth.
This diagram [Fig. 2-42] was made by Sri Yukteswar, Yogananda’s guru. He did this in the late 1800s. Though he did not
know the true time duration of the precession of the equinoxes, he put it at 24,000 years. That was very close, because
most Hindus had no idea of what they were doing when working with the yugas. (I don’t mean to put them down, but they
didn’t.) You see, when we were coming through the kali yuga, we were in the darkest most-asleep times. Most of the
books written in the last 2000 years were written by people who were asleep, relatively speaking, and were trying to
interpret books written by people who were much more awake. They didn’t understand what the older books were

saying. So, as with any book written in the last 2000 years, you’ve got to be a little
bit careful because of the time it was written in. Many Hindu scholars were
putting the precession of the equinoxes at hundreds of thousands of years,
and some said one yuga is around 150,000 years. They were wrong and
just did not understand.
Yukteswar knew better, but he wasn’t quite right either. What he did
in this diagram was to put the different yugas around the outer edge,
and on the inside he put the twelve signs of the zodiac, thus showing
which yugas corresponded with what sign. When he made this chart
we were in Virgo, shown in the bottom left quadrant. At the moment
we’re between Virgo and Leo. Depending on what astrologer you talk
to, we’re close to the third eye of the virgin right now and passing into
Leo—that’s physically. That means the planet physically is between Virgo
and Leo. But if you look 180 degrees across the heavens, you see the
sky moving from Pisces into Aquarius. At this moment we’re right on the
line between Pisces and Aquarius, about to head into the Age of Aquarius.
But physically it’s a whole different point of view. You need to understand that,
because when we look at the works in Egypt, some of their writings don’t make
sense without knowing this perspective.

Modern Views on Pole Shifts
In the 1930s, Edgar Cayce was channeling answers for a geologist when, in the middle of a question, Cayce stopped and said something like, “You know, there’s something a little more important going on with the Earth that maybe you should know about,” and started talking about how the poles of the Earth are going to shift soon. He said the year it would happen would be the winter of 1998, but things have changed since then in a psychically unpredictable manner. The poles still may shift, but then again, they may do it in a way slightly different from Cayce’s prediction. We do have free will, and we can change the fate of the world simply through our being.
Edgar Cayce was an extraordinary human. He was a man people listened to when he spoke. The statement by
Cayce that the poles were going to shift in the near future was almost unbelievable by most of the world. But because it
was Edgar Cayce predicting this outrageous event, scientists and other interested persons began to study the possibility.

Geologists would not believe his statement because they thought it would probably be millions or hundreds of millions of
years between pole shifts, that this kind of change took a very long time. But because of Cayce’s prediction, certain
scientists began to search anyway. A string of major pieces of evidence came forth that lent tremendous weight to what
Cayce was saying, and they have now changed the world’s view on this subject. The scientists suspected that if there
were a change in the physical poles, then there would also be a change in the magnetic poles. One of the ways they
decided to study this possibility was to examine the ancient lava beds of the world. This started taking place, I believe, in
the 1950s or early ’60s. They wanted to study lava beds because (1) they figured there would be tremendous volcanic
action if such a shift took place, and (2) lava has a characteristic that could verify and date previous magnetic pole shifts.
Iron Pilings and Core Samples
Iron pilings are found in most lava, and these pilings have a different melting point than the lava itself. The pilings harden while the lava is still flowing and, being iron, line up with the magnetic poles. Through this observation, geologists can see exactly where the magnetic poles were at the time the lava hardened. They needed to get samples from only three locations to be able to triangulate and know exactly where the magnetic north pole was at the time the pilings hardened. Then, of course, they could radiocarbon-date it, which was the best they could do back in those days. There were other approaches to this problem, which we will look at in a moment.
So they discovered an earlier magnetic north pole that was not where it is now but a long way away, centered in Hawaii. That last shift took place right at the upper oval—a little less than 13,000 years ago. They then did ; another test and found that the poles had shifted before that at the lower oval. This opened up a whole new area of investigation into the Earth’s magnetics.
The Geological Society of America published a summary of findings gathered from ocean-floor core samples (Geology 11:9, September 1983). The samples were six inches in diameter and eleven feet long, and the researchers analyzed the sediment. They discovered that sometimes the poles simply reverse themselves. The north becomes the south and the south becomes the north. This was another thing Edgar Cayce talked about that people had a hard time believing. But when they analyzed these core samples, they found it was true. Going back hundreds of millions of years, they discovered a cycle where the magnetic north pole would remain in place for a long time—then in a single day, less than 24 hours, magnetic north switched to the south. It stayed that way for a long time, then switched again. But toward the ends of these long cycles were shorter periods where the magnetic poles would reverse themselves again. This flip happened every once in a while. And as we come closer into present times, the flips are starting to happen closer together—from north to south, south to north, and at the same time moving to new locations. This has happened hundreds of times over the last several hundred million years. A whole new viewpoint of the Earth’s magnetics, called geomagnetics, is beginning to be understood. From space, would this not appear as a pulse?


Pole-Shift Triggers
By now there have been many people trying to figure out what could cause a pole shift. What are the dynamics?
What’s the trigger that makes it happen? There’s a book by John White—who’s also an Edgar Cayce advocate—who
has compiled almost all the information in the world on this subject, though he does not mention, I believe, the particular
information on the last magnetic shift being in Hawaii. His book is called Pole Shift, of course. It’s a very scientific and
interesting book. If you read it, you’ll get an excellent understanding of this subject, which is vast and amazing.
There are two main theories right now about what the trigger could be that would cause the poles to move. One of them is obvious and the other more subtle. The obvious one is called the Brown theory, named after Hugh Auchincloss Brown, who conceived this idea. His theory is that for some reason the south pole begins to form off-center (which is exactly what’s happening now), then it builds up quite rapidly toward the end of the cycle (which is also exactly what’s happening now), until one day it breaks free from the centrifugal force of the Earth’s rotation. It’s just like any spinning object: When something is off-center, it throws the whole object off-center and forces it to find a new equilibrium. If the weight of the ice keeps building and building, eventually something’s going to happen. The Earth can’t keep spinning in the same rotational position. It will find a new pole that is centered. Yet there are some scientists who believe that the mass of ice at the South Pole is not enough to trigger a pole shift.
As a matter of fact, the ice at the South Pole in some places is over three miles deep and building, especially rapidly
over the last 20 years, faster than ever expected, probably because of the greenhouse effect. And today there are three
enormous volcanoes underneath the icecap that can be seen from our satellites. It’s melting the underside of the icecap,
and huge rivers are flowing out from beneath it at this very moment. Perhaps this fact was not entered into the equation
by the doubting scientists. If that icecap, which is twice the size of the United States, were to break free, it’s been
calculated that it would move toward the equator at 1700 miles an hour to find balance, according to John White. That
would obviously cause some problems here and there. Brown’s theory appears to be happening, but it is not a certainty.
However, someone has offered another theory, one which even Albert Einstein considered seriously, that holds a
possible answer to the equations that unbelieving scientists have used. His name is Charles Hapgood. He, and other
scientists who worked with him, discovered at least two layers of unusual rock underneath the Earth’s crust which liquefy
under certain conditions. Other scientists have demonstrated this in laboratories where they’ve put the same kind of rock
into a miniature Earth and duplicated the conditions of the inner earth. From this experiment, they found that the surface
or crust of the Earth can slip over the main mass of the Earth, which continues its rotation as if nothing had happened. It’s
a fact. It can happen, but of course we do not know if it will actually happen in real time. They don’t know the specifics of
how this would work—such as what trigger could cause this slippage. Charles Hapgood wrote two books, Earth’s Shifting
Crust and The Path of the Pole, that will probably eventually change our view of our world dramatically.


Albert Einstein wrote the foreword to Charles Hapgood’s first book, Earth’s Shifting Crust. I feel it is important enough to reprint here directly:
I frequently receive communications from people who wish to consult me concerning their unpublished ideas. It goes without saying that these ideas are very seldom possessed of scientific validity. The very first communication, however, that I received from Mr. Hapgood electrified me. His idea is original, of great simplicity, and ¦ if it continues to prove itself ¦ of great importance to everything that is related to the history of the earth’s surface.
The author has not confined himself to a simple presentation of this idea. He has also set forth, cautiously and comprehensively, the extraordinarily rich material that supports his displacement theory. I think that this rather astonishing, even fascinating, idea deserves the serious attention of anyone who concerns himself with the theory of the earth’s development.
It is a given that Albert Einstein was one of the most brilliant humans who has ever lived, yet few geologists even yet believe such an outrageous theory. Only in more recent times has proof begun to accumulate that such things could be true. The same scientific world didn’t believe Mr. Einstein either when he said how much energy was contained within a very small amount of matter.
It is my belief that the trigger to the pole shift is connected with the geo-magnetism of the Earth. This would take a long time to explain, which I am not prepared to do here at this time. What is known is that for the last 500 years the Earth’s magnetic field has been continually weakening, and in the last few years it has been doing absolutely bizarre things. According to Gregg Braden in Awakening to Zero Point: The Collective Initiation, the Earth’s magnetic field actually began to weaken about 2000 years ago. Then around 500 years ago, the weakening really began to accelerate. (Could it be 520 years? This would match the Mayan Calendar, which predicted a huge change at that time.) In recent times the magnetic field is making unheard of changes.
Magnetic Flow Changes
The idealized lines of magnetic flow [Fig. 2-43] you see coming out in a torus
around the Earth are not what geologists have found. The reality is that the mag-
netic lines look rather like straight weaving patterns [Fig. 2-44]. They’re fixed, but
they’re not precise in that idealized kind of way. And there are certain areas where
they’re stronger and other areas where they’re weaker. These lines normally do not
move, but because the field is getting so weak, they are beginning to move and
change. The birds, animals and fish, and the dolphins and whales and other crea-
tures use these magnetic lines for their migration patterns. So if the magnetic lines
change, their migration patterns go off, which is what we’re seeing all over the world
right now. Birds are flying to places they’re not supposed to be, and whales are

Fig. 2-43. Magnetic flow around the Earth

beaching themselves on land, where it’s supposed to be water as far as they’re

concerned. They’re simply following the mag-
netic line they’ve followed for centuries, and
they’re running into land that wasn’t on that line
When these magnetic fields pass through
zero point and completely change—which they
may do very soon—we’ll have another subject
to talk about, about what happens then. You see,
we believe your very memory is tied to those
fields. You can’t remember anything without
these magnetic fields. In addition, your emo-
tional body is tied powerfully to the magnetic
fields, and if they change, your emotional body
is radically affected. It’s easy to understand that
the Moon affects the tides of the world through
the pull of gravity. We also know that the mag-
netic fields of the Earth are slightly affected by
the phases of the Moon. When the Moon is full

and passes overhead, we get a slight bulge and
change in the magnetic field of the Earth. Just

Fig. 2-44. Sample of complex model of Earth’s main magnetic field, generated by the USGS for the year 1995.

look at what happens in big cities during a full moon. The day before, the day of, and the day after the full moon, we have more
rapes and murders and killings and weirdness of this nature than we do for the rest of the entire month. The police blotter of any
major city will verify that. Why? Because these fields especially affect people who are right on the edge of emotional instability,
who are barely able to cope during normal times. They’re right on the edge, then the Moon comes along and moves the
magnetic field just a little bit, and the person experiences an emotional dip and does things he or she normally wouldn’t do.
So imagine what would happen if the geomagnetic field of the Earth starts destabilizing. I heard in October 1993 from
someone who’s involved in aviation that in the last two weeks of September, major landing strips had to recalibrate their
guidance systems because the magnetic fields made a unilateral shift all over the planet. It seemed to be temporary,
lasting about two weeks. At that time you might have remembered an incredible emotional outburst within yourself and
people around you. In my world I’m on the phone with people from all over the world. People were freaking out every-
where. That’s why I suspected that maybe what I heard might really be true. If it 15 true, then we are beginning to proceed
almost certainly into the next phase of this work. These breakdowns in the magnetic field of the Earth will begin to come
closer and closer together until there is a total collapse of the field and a shifting of the poles. This is one of the signs of

the very end times.
There’s no reason to get into fear about any of this. Even though what’s happening is unusual, we’ve all been through these kinds of things many, many times before. This is not unusual for you, though most of you have very little memory of it. When you actually start going through the dimensional shift and get into the feel of it, you’ll say, “Oh, yeah, I remember this now. Here we are, going through this birthing again.” So it’s not a big deal, yet it is.
You came from somewhere else when you were born as a baby, right? You came from some other dimension and you passed through a void and came out through the womb to Earth. You traveled this path before, and we’re about to do a similar kind of thing, only it’s a really unusual one this time. There’s no reason to fear it when you know all of it and remember who you are. In fact, what’s occurring is extremely positive. It’s very, very beautiful.
Harmonic and Disharmonic Levels of Consciousness
The Sanskrit literature talks about how when we approach the lower oval at A [in Fig. 2-40] in the precession, we become aware of electrical energies. We can fly in the sky. We can do many unusual things. The world becomes extremely unstable, and in a single day we get rid of the old way of viewing the world and make a huge transformation in consciousness. But as we approach this transformation, given the particular level of consciousness we have, we tend to destroy everything we touch. It’s a natural part of who we are. We’re not doing anything wrong; it’s just the way we are. We’re doing it exactly right. We destroy everything, we cause everything to go into disharmony. I’ll be talking about this later, but I think it would be appropriate to tell you this much now:
On Earth, according to Thoth, there are ftve totally different steps or levels of life that each human is going to pass
through. When we reach the fifth level, we will make a transformation that transcends known life itself. That’s the normal
pattern. Each one of these levels of consciousness has many aspects that are different from the other levels. First, they
have different chromosome levels. The first level of human consciousness has 42 + 2 chromosomes; the second level
has 44+2 chromosomes; the third one has 46 + 2; the fourth, 48 + 2; and finally 50 + 2. Each level of human conscious-
ness has a different body height associated with it. (This might sound kind of funny if you’ve never heard it before.)
The first level of 42 + 2 has a range of height somewhere between four and maybe six feet. The people who fall into that category specifically are the Aborigines in Australia, and I believe that certain tribes in Africa and South America also do.
The second level of consciousness has 44+2 chromosomes, and that’s us. Our band of height is about five to seven
feet. We’re a little taller than the first group. The third level’s height goes up considerably. The 46+2 chromosome level
interrupts the Reality through what you could term unity or Christ consciousness. That range of height is from about ten
to sixteen feet tall.
Then there’s another range for the fourth level of consciousness—the 48 + 2s—who have a height of about 30 to 35 feet.


The final band, the perfected human, is between 50 and 60 feet tall. They have 52 chromosomes. I suspect that the reason there are 52 cards in a deck is related to those 52 chromosomes of the potential of man. For those of you who are Hebrew, you might remember that Metatron, the perfect man—that which we will become—was blue and 55 feet tall. (We’ll talk about this again when we get into the subject of Egypt)
There are states between the consciousness levels, like Down syndrome, for example. Down syndrome happens
when a person transitions from this second level of consciousness, which we are on, into the third level, but didn’t quite
make it. The person didn’t get all the instructions right, and where he almost always fails is in the left-brain instructional
aspect of the chromosomes. A Down syndrome person has 45+2 chromosomes—he got one of them, but not the other.
He or she got the emotional one—the heart one—all right. If you know any Down syndrome children, they are pure love,
but they don’t understand how to make the transition into the third level of human consciousness. They are still learning.
The second and fourth levels of consciousness are disharmonic, and the first, third and fifth levels are harmonic.
You’ll understand this when we see it in the geometries. When you look at human consciousness from a geometrical
point of view, you can see the harmonic levels, and you can see that the disharmonic levels are simply out of balance.
That’s where we are right now—out of balance. These disharmonic levels are absolutely necessary. You can’t get from
level one to level three without passing through level two. But two is a totally disharmonic consciousness. Does not chaos
bring change?
Whenever a consciousness gets into the second or fourth level, it knows it can be there for only a short time. These
levels are used as stepping stones—like a stone in the middle of a river, one you jump on and get off of as soon as you
can to get to the other side. You don’t hang out there, because if you do, you fall in. If we were to hang out here on Earth
even just a little bit longer, we would destroy our planet. We would destroy it by just being who we are. Yet we are a sacred
and necessary step in evolution. We are a bridge to another world. And we are living this bridge by just being alive in this
incredible time.


The Darker Side of Our Present and Past

We are about to enter negative subjects for a bit. You could say, “There he
goes getting into that fear stuff just after he said not to get into fear,” but I want
us to observe all the facets, both positive and negative, of life here on planet
Earth. I don’t want to look at only the positive ones; I want you to see the whole
picture. And when you look at the whole picture, both the good and the bad,
you’ll see that the chaos is just part of the truth and part of the birth. A phenom-
enal change inhuman consciousness is occurring at this moment, though if you
take any tiny segment of what’s happening or look out in the world and see all
the wars, famines and human emotional garbage that’s filling our newspapers,
the future does not look good. But when you get the whole image of life, you’ll
see that beyond all the negative, there’s something much greater and vast and
sacred and holy occurring at this moment in history. It becomes clear: Life is

whole, complete and perfect now!

Our Endangered Earth
However, the most conservative scientists in the world that I can find don’t give our planet more than 50 years—50! The most conservative scientists on the planet say there will be no life or almost none on this planet within 50 years if we continue the way we’re going. Many scientists give us only three or more years; some of them give us ten. Most don’t give us more than fifteen years. It depends on who you read. Even if it were a hundred or a thousand years, would that be acceptable?
You would not be hearing any of this information today if it were not for
some changes in our government that have taken place in the last eight years
that have allowed this information to be presented. Although they’re not allow-
ing you to know everything, there has been a change in the powers that be

In 1992 the world nations met at an
“Earth Summit” in Rio de Janeiro to discuss
Earth’s environmental problems. The largest
gathering of heads of state in the history of
the world was called because of the danger of
losing our planet. Most of the world came, but
the United States, the largest polluter in the
world [fig. 3], didn’t even want to participate.
It was obvious that the political administra-
tion felt that money, jobs and the economy
were more important than whether the Earth
Five months later, on November 18, 1992,
a document titled “World Scientists’ Warning
to Humanity” was released. More than 1600
senior scientists from 71 countries,including
over half of all living Nobel Prize winners,
signed this document. It was the most alarm-
ing warning the world has ever received from
such a powerful body of researchers. You
would think that this document would hold

where they’re beginning to cooperate with life. They simply can’t let you know
the full extent of the situation, because they believe that most of the world would
just quit their jobs and say, the heck with everything, leading to complete chaos.
Instead of quitting, is not this the time to focus? Human consciousness is pow-
erful. We will know what to do. We are more than the ordinary world knows. Do
you remember?
Okay, now let’s talk about the dark side. This is a January 2, 1989, issue of
Time magazine [Fig. 3-1]. In 1988 the secret government of the world decided
to allow us to know some of what was going on around environmental prob-
lems. This was the first major publication on the subject in the world. Time maga-
zine declared the Earth to be the “planet of the year.” Instead of featuring a man
or woman of the year, they broke away from their tradition. The entire magazine
was devoted to our endangered Earth and its problems. If you were to read the

problems as they were presented in 1989 and then read the problems as they’re
being presented in articles today, you’ll realize that what they gave us in 1989
was a ultra-watered-down version of the truth. It wasn’t
even close. But at least it was a beginning for
our world to see the truth about what we
have done to Mother Earth.
We’re going to discuss
only four or five differ-
ent problems

Fig. 3 U.S . is by far the bigest polluter on the planet.

Fig. 3-1. Allowing the truth to be known
great credibility and that the world would care-
fully listen. It began:
“Human beings and the natural world are
on a collision course. Human activities inflict
harsh and often irreversible damage on the
environment and on critical resources. If not
checked, many of our current practices put at
serious risk the future that we wish for human
society and the plant and animal kingdoms,
and may so alter the living world that it will
be unable to sustain life in the manner that
we know. Fundamental changes are ur’ gent
if we are to avoid the collision our present
course will bring about.”
The warning document then began to list
the crises: polluted water, oceans, soil, atmo-
sphere, diminishing plant and animal species
and human overpopulation. (More than half
of the life on this planet is now extinct and
continuing to die.) The words became stem:
“No more than one or a few decades re-
main before the chance to avert the threats
we now confront will be lost and the prospects

the Earth has, though there are multiple different scenarios going on. If any one of these scenarios were to break down, all life on the planet would eventually die. And at the moment they’re all about to break down—it’s just a matter of which one breaks down first. And whenever one system goes, then all the rest of them will go eventually, and that’s it, there won’t be any more human life. It will be over with, and we’ll end up just like Mars or the dinosaurs.

A few years ago, around the turn of this century, there were 30 million spe-
cies of life forms on Earth—30 million different species of life. In 1993 there
were about 15 million. It took billions of years to create these life forms, and in
less than a blink of an eye, a mere hundred years, half of the life on this dear
Earth is dead. Around thirty species a minute are now becoming extinct some-
where. If you were to watch this planet from space, it would appear to be dying
very, very rapidly. Yet we’re going on as though nothing’s happening and
everything’s great. We’re sticking money in the bank and driving our cars and
just wiggling right on. Yet from an honest point of view, we have a real life-and-
death problem going on here on Earth, and few people seem to be really seri-
ous about it.
When they tried to get the entire world to come together in Rio in the early ’90s to discuss the worldwide environmental problem, our president didn’t even want to go. Why not? Because the problems are so serious that if we were to fix them, another problem would happen that would be an even more serious prob-
lem, from the president’s point of view: We would be plunged into a worldwide financial breakdown, after which a large portion of the Earth’s population would die from starvation and other problems. In essence, we cannot afford to repair the environment. On the other side of the coin, can we afford not to?

Dying Oceans
It was in the August 1, 1988, issue [Fig. 3-2] that Time magazine focused its
attention on the oceans and what was happening there. Jacques Cousteau
wrote a book about this around 1978. He was a very respected person, but
when he wrote this book, he lost credibility in scientific circles because he made
a statement that nobody could believe. He founded his statements on pure
science, but people simply could not or would not accept the truth. Specifically,

Fig. 3-2. Divulging
the status of our

for humanity im-
measurably di -
minished. We the
undersigned, se-
nior members of
the world’s scien-
tific community,
hereby warn all
humanity of what
lies agead . A
great change in
our stewardship of the Earth and life on it is required if vast human misery is to be avoided and our global home on this planet is not to be irretrievably mutilated.”
Yet most of the world rejected this state-
ment even though it was created by one of the
most respected scientific bodies ever as-
sembled on Earth. You would think we would
pause and say, “If this is true, what can we do?
Let’s drop everything and do whatever is nec-
essary.” But the governments know that if we
are to avert this crisis, we must change the way
we live, and that would not be politically com-
fortable. No politician wants to be the one to
introduce this unpopular change. To the
governments, the economy would suffer and

he said that the Mediterranean Sea would be a dead body of water by the end of 1990 and that the Atlantic Ocean would also be dead by the turn of the century. People thought, “This guy’s nuts. It’s never going to happen.”
Well, it is happening. The Mediterranean Sea is now somewhere around 95 percent dead. It’s not 100 percent, so he was not exactly right. Nevertheless, it’s still going to be a dead sea if people continue to live the way they do. And the Atlantic Ocean is rapidly doing the same. Maybe it won’t happen in the year 2000, but it will happen very soon after that. Unless something changes dramatically, it will die—no fish, no dolphins, no life in the Atlantic.
We can’t live without the oceans. The bottom of the food chain, the plank-
ton, will be gone, and if they go, we go. When we don’t take this seriously, it’s
like saying, “Well, I don’t really need my heart.” This is a major component in the
ecosystem on Earth, and it’s going fast. This is not debatable, this is scientific

fact. The only part that is debatable is when. It is really happening. Nobody
believed it would happen because they just couldn’t accept this truth.
New York City, for instance, has pipes that go twenty miles out and dump all
their human feces into the oceans. They figured, Well, the oceans will take care
of it. But for the last 60 years or so it’s been building up into a huge mountain.
Now, there’s a mountain range of shit out in the ocean that is moving toward
New York City. It’s now up against and actually coming into the harbor, and they
don’t know what to do about it. It would take more money than New York has to
fix it. This is the kind of foresight that we as humans have demonstrated.
The human manure approaching New York is an Atlantic Ocean problem.
However, the problem is not limited to the Atlantic or the Mediterranean. The
Pacific Ocean is Earth’s largest body of water, and it will probably take longer,
but it is also having tremendous problems, especially in certain areas.
The red tide [Fig. 3-3] is the first deadly sign of the pollution. It’s an algae
that destroys everything that lives underneath it—it kills everything. And these
red tides are beginning to sweep all over, especially around Japan where there’s
so much pollution. We’ve made lots of mistakes all over the Earth because we
don’t have the consciousness to know how to live in harmony with our own
body, Mother Earth. This is like a symptom of cancer or some other dreaded

Fig. 3-3. Red tide.
perhaps even collapse if we were to stop pollut-
ing. So it has become a war of money against life—terrible but true.
The New York Times and the Washington Post , two of our most respected leaders in re-
porting the news, rejected this document as not newsworthy. This gives you a good idea of the importance we place on the planet itself. (You can read about all this and much more in The Sacred Balance, Rediscovering Our Place in Nature by David Suzuki.
Think for a moment: This warning docu-
ment gives us “one or a few more decades” to
avert this crisis—and it was written seven years
ago. This Earth is billions of years old. It has
taken millions of years for mankind to reach
this level of awareness, yet in a mere 10 to 30
years, a geological blink of an eye, if we do not
act in a positive manner, we may become “ir-
retrievably mutilated.” The word “extinct” was
avoided, but we all know it is a possibility.
Update: Since June 1996 a new possibil-
ity has been given to us. Perhaps we have found

Fig. 3-4. Ozone hole above the South Pole.

Here ’s another problem . Figure 3 - 4
shows the ozone hole above the South Pole.
Ozone forms a thin layer about six feet thick.
It’s a really thin, fragile layer, a living layer that’s
constantly being rebuilt. We know very little
about it, though we know more than we would
if it weren’t for the UVC light (ultraviolet light,
band C) that’s coming through the holes right
now. When they began to detect huge
amounts of UVC, especially as shown here
coming into the South Pole, they couldn’t un-
derstand how there got to be so much, be-
cause their computers didn’t show it. Then
they found out that their software program-
ming was set up in such a way as to override
this sort of thing. After they reprogrammed
their software, they found out the hole was
really there. This was some years ago.

a way to heal the Earth of her environmental prob-
lems. This is the work of the new workshop we call the Earth-Sky. As much as I would love to tell you where the work of the Flower of Life has taken us, this is not the time. A new book will have to be written because this new information is too vast to discuss in a simple update. All I can say is that I am very optimistic for the 3D sur-
vival of Mother Earth at this time.

Update: Since June 1996 a new possi-
bility has been given to us. Perhaps we have
found a way to heal the Earth of her envi-
ronmental problems. This is the work of the
new workshop we call the Earth-Sky. As much
as I would love to tell you where the work of
the Flower of Life has taken us, this is not
the time. A new book will have to be written
because this new information is too vast to
discuss in a simple update. All I can say is
that I am very optimistic for the 3D survival
of Mother Earth at this time.
Update: Remember that Professor Einstein

What they actually were looking for was chlorine monoxide, the molecule
shown in the far right of Figure 3-5. They figured that the ozone hole is caused
by various chemicals, one of which are CFCs. CFCs react with the ozone in
such a way that when the chlorine connects with the ozone, the ozone mole-
cule breaks apart, thus forming oxygen and chlorine monoxide. Scientists fig-
Fig. 3-5. Ozone reaction in molecules.


did not know for sure that when the first atomic
bomb was ignited, the nuclear chain reaction
would stop when the original fuel sample was
expended. Our government knew that when
this first bomb exploded, it might be the end
of the world—all life over in a matter of min-
utes. But we did it anyway! This is spiritual
We are faced with another moment in history where our government has decided to take another chance with our lives. When HAARP was turned on in the spring of 1997, they did not know for sure if the atmosphere was going to be destroyed. They still do not know for sure what the long-range effects will be, just as they did not know during World War II with the Manhattan Project.

ured, given the speed they thought the CFCs were moving toward the ozone,
that the chlorine monoxide up there would be about 30 times over normal, and they were very worried about it. So the world governments tried to get the com-
panies that were producing the CFCs—Freon and various other chemicals that cause this problem—to stop producing those products and find other answers. In reply, the companies all said in unison, “We’re not doing it. That’s a natural phenomenon. We have nothing to do with it.”
So the world governments had to prove in court that the companies were at fault, which they did. To get the proof they needed, for the first time in the history of the Earth every single country on the planet cooperated in a single venture. This had never happened before. They flew high-altitude planes over the South Pole for about two years collecting data, and they finally came up with some-
thing that really scared them. The destructive ingredient, chlorine monoxide, wasn’t 30 times over normal—it was 500 times over normal and moving much faster than they had believed.
This article came out in 1992,1 believe [Fig. 3-6]. It first says that the EPA
predicts 200,000 more skin cancer deaths from the ozone hole. But up in the

Fig. 3-6. Upping the

What is HAARP? You need to know.
HAARP stands for High-Frequency Active Au-
roral Research Project. It is a weapon massively
more powerful than the atomic bomb. They
intend to beam more than 1.7 gigawatts (bil-
lion watts) of radiated power into the iono-
sphere and actually boil the upper atmosphere
in order to create a mirror and/ or an artificial
antenna to transmit huge amounts of power
to any specific area onthe Earth. This energy
would be used to manipulate global weather,
hurt or destroy ecosystems, knock out elec-
tronic communication, and change our moods
and mental states. Not to mention that it could
be used to try to destroy or manipulate the
new Christ grid around the world. Read An-
gels Don’t Play This HAARP by Jeane Manning
and Dr. Nick Begich. You will learn more.
Update: In 1995 and 1996, the secret
government exploded six atomic bombs in an
area near Moorea Island, part of the French
Tahitian Islands. France, along with several
other countries, placed these bombs into a
sacred physical place of Mother Earth’s body.
If they had done this to your mom, you would
have called it violent rape. They were neutron
bombs, which do not destroy structures, but
“merely” destroy all life in the region.
If the Earth were a woman, the area where
they deliberately placed the bomb would be
her perineum. Going straight through the Earth
from there would be Earth’s crown chak-ra,
which just happens to be the Great Pyramid
region in Egypt. This became the focus of at-
tention, for the secret government shut down
the entireGreat Pyramid, not allowing anyone
to come near for three days so they could test
the results in the consciousness of the planet.
They were trying to destroy a specific field of
energy that has grown to enclose the Earth.

right column they have a tiny section reporting that the EPA says that the fatality
estimates they had originally given were incorrect, and are 21 times worse than they had estimated. Twenty-one times—now, that’s a lot. It’s not like saying, “Well, it’s a little bit more.”
This is what the government has been doing; they give out little bits of
information in little articles that don’t tell you much. They don’t make it a big
deal. By law they have to announce it, so they announce it in little articles and
then let it go. Then they up the ante in another insignificant article—as in this
article here, for example, where they said the danger was 21 times higher than
their first estimate; then two weeks later the same paper comes back and says,
“Oh, by the way, we were off two weeks ago, it’s actually double that.” Well,
double doesn’t sound like much—except that means it went from 21 times to
42 times worse than their first report, which is an incredible amount. If the truth
had’ been told in the first place, it would have sounded terrible and created fear.
This is what’s been going on all over the world for a long time. The only way
the world governments know how to deal with the situation is by letting it out
little by little, admitting to more and more and more. They know they have to tell
you the truth (for reasons you’ll learn later), but they’re afraid to say we’re in real
trouble. They just say, “Well, it’s not so bad, but it’s getting worse,” and state-
ments like this.
Well, not only is there an ozone hole at the South Pole, but there’s one at
the North Pole now, and the rest of the ozone is swiss cheese. In 1991 or 1992
there was a major television production on the ozone hole. It brought together
all the major people who were involved in studying this, and they discussed all
the pros and cons. They interviewed a particular husband-and-wife team—I
don’t have their names, but they also wrote a book on this very subject several
years ago, predicting that the ozone hole was going to happen. Before we even
knew about it, they had studied it all, according to this program. And the ozone
is now undergoing changes exactly like they said it would and at exactly the rate
they predicted.
This couple was brought on TV as the experts, and the interviewer asked,
“Well, what do you think?” This interviewer was kind of puppylike, asking, “What
are we going to do? You guys know everything about it, so what are we going to

You could call it one of Earth’s memory banks.
You and I call it Christ consciousness. They,
the secret government (which is still you and
me), were fearful of this new consciousness,
but I believe now it has been mostly resolved.
The polarities of the Earth are slowly merg-
ing. At the time of this transcript in 1993 we
were living in a period of planetary insight.
Now, in 1997, we are on the edge of planetary
unity based on understanding. The great test is
still ahead, especially if the secret government
decides to use HAARP to try to destroy the
Christ grid.

Update: On the positive side, doctors at
UCLA began about five years ago examining a
young boy who had been born with AIDS. He
had been checked at birth, at six months and
again at one year. He still had AIDS. He wasn’t
checked again until he was about five. When
they checked him this time, all traces of the
AIDS virus were gone. It was as though he had
never contracted AIDS. They didn’t know how
his system became immune; all they knew was
that it did. They checked everything they could
think of, including his DNA. It was here where
they found a change. This young boy did not
have human DNA!
We have 64 codons in our DNA, but in
normal humans only 20 of these codons are
turned on. The rest are inert or not working,
except for three, which are the stop and start
programs. This young boy had 24 codons
turned on—he had found a way to mutate that
made him immune to AIDS. In fact, when they
were testing him, they found that he was im-
mune to everything. They found that his im-
mune system was 3000 times stronger than a
normal human’s.

do about the ozone?” The husband said, “There’s nothing we can do.” I don’t be-
lieve they like to hear statements like that on major channels. The interviewer asked, “What do you mean, there’s nothing we can do?” The authors said, “Well, suppose we get the entire world to cooperate?”—which is the first thing that would have to happen, and we can’t even do that now, some fifteen years later! “Suppose we do get the entire planet to say, ‘Okay, we’ll stop it all today. No more of these chemicals that are destroying the ozone will ever be used again.’”
The author said, “Okay, suppose we did it. Suppose we got the whole world to stop. That still doesn’t solve the problem.” And the interviewer said, “What do you mean? Wouldn’t it just heal itself?” The author answered, “No, because the spray can that you sprayed yesterday sits on the surface of the ground and the CFCs take 15 to 20 years to rise to the ozone layer. This layer that’s slowly rising and eating the ozone will continue for 15 to 20 years even if we stop everything today. And it will continue to eat it faster and faster, because we’ve used more and more of these chemicals in recent years.” He said, “There won’t even be an ozone layer”—I think he said in ten years. “I see no solution at all.”
If we lose our ozone, we’re in big trouble. All the animals of the world will go
blind. You won’t be able to go out during daytime without a space-suit on, meaning every square inch of your body will have to be covered-special UVC goggles and everything. In a short time the UVC light would eventually kill you. And we’re rapidly approaching that. If you don’t think so, read what the Wall Street Journal reported in January 1993.
The Journal was reporting what’s happening in southern Chile, which is
close to the ozone hole at the South Pole. The animals are starting to go blind.
The people who live there have thick, dark skin, and they’ve spent all their lives
outside, but now they’re getting burned in the course of everyday living. And it’s
spreading north from Chile and starting to happen everywhere. Because of the
Swiss cheese aspect of the entire ozone layer, places all over the Earth are
becoming unsafe. You never know where these spots are going to be because
they move over the face of the Earth from year to year. This ozone problem is
happening now, not tomorrow or later or maybe someday. It’s occurring at this
very minute. Given another few years, we’re going to be in really serious trouble.

Then they found another child with the
same situation, coming out of AIDS and turn-
ing on the same 24 codons, becoming immune
to AIDS and other diseases. They found 100,
then 10,000. UCLA now believes that 1% of
the world has made this change. They now
believe that 55 million children and adults are
no longer human, by DNA definition. There
are so many people doing this now that sci-
ence believes that a new human race is being
born at this time and that it seems to have come
out of AIDS. It is almost impossible for these
people to become sick.
It is also interesting that in November 1998, it was announced that in 1997, AIDS dropped off by 47%, which is the biggest drop in history for any major disease. Could this be one of the reasons?
Further, in Cracking the Bible Code by
Jeffrey Satinover, when they ran the word
“AIDS” into the code, they found all the usual
associated words. They saw the words in the
blood, death, annihilation, in the form of a vi-
rus, the immunity, the HIV, destroyed, and
many more. However, there were certain other
words that did not make sense to those
researchers but that only now can be under-
stood in the light of the previous information.
They found the words, “the end to all diseases.”
This is perhaps the single most important event in the world today.


They knew about the ozone problem at least as far back as when Reagan was president. When the environmental agencies asked him, “What will we do about this ozone problem?”, Reagan was really flippant about it. He said something like, “Aw, we’ll just issue raincoats and dark sunglasses to solve the problem.” Just like that, what the heck? We’re talking about our very lives here, our very existence, and the governments are continuing as though it doesn’t even matter.
The Greenhouse Ice Age
In the first seven days in office, President Bush was approached by 700
environmental groups—700 of them in unity and agreement. They said to Bush,

“We have an even bigger problem than the ozone and the
oceans; the biggest problem that we know of is the greenhouse effect. If the greenhouse effect is not checked very soon, it’s going to destroy the planet.” This is what they had agreed on and what they believed was the truth. For a while Gorbachev and the world’s governments were talking about how they were going to put space stations up there to monitor the environ-
ment and move with responsible action, Gorbachev was gung ho on the whole thing. Then I guess they gave up on it, just quit, though they’re still watching these things very carefully. It’s a pretty hopeless situation.
Figure 3-7 is a satellite photograph of the oceans taken from above Australia. That dark blotch above Australia and New Guinea reached the hottest ocean I temperature in recorded history in 1992. It was 86 degrees Fahrenheit in that spot. That’s 86-degree ocean water. If that continues to spread across the equator, it’s going to do exactly what John Hamaker has pre-
dicted. If you’re familiar with Hamaker and his theories, he has powerful evidence that as this water heats up, something very different from a hot planet will happen: it’s going to be a cold one—very, very cold. Dr. Hamaker predicts an ice age descend-
ing upon us within a few short years.


Fig. 3-7. Hottest ocean in history.

I won’t go fully into the dynamics of the so-called greenhouse effect, but an intimate part of it is tied to rocks, minerals and trees. One average acre of trees holds within it 50,000 tons of carbon dioxide. When trees are cut down, burned or just die, all that carbon dioxide gets released into the atmosphere, and when the atmosphere contains a certain level of carbon dioxide, it activates the beginning of an ice age. Hamaker found proof that this is what triggered the last few ice ages on this planet. He found his evidence primarily from studying core samples taken from ancient lake beds. The core samples show, by simply looking at the pollen count, that the Earth for millions of years had a cycle of 90,000 years of ice followed by a temperate period of 10,000 years, followed by 90,000 years of ice, followed by 10,000 temperate years. That particular cycle has been going on for a long, long time.
In addition, Hamaker has discovered—and other people have verified it —that the length of time it takes to go from a warm age into an ice age is a mere 20 years! People who have been studying this for a long time believe that we’re possibly now around 16 or 17 years into that 20-year cycle, but of course no one really knows. And they say that when the end of the 20 years or so is reached, [snaps fingers] in a single day, less than 24 hours, it’ll all be over. The clouds will back up over the Earth, the average temperature will drop to about 50 below zero, and most areas of the world won’t see the Sun again for 90,000 years. If those guys are right, we’ve got only a few more years of sunshine. It’ll keep getting warmer and warmer and hotter and hotter until that day hits, then snap! it’ll be all over. I’m not going to give all the details ofHamaker’s work, but I suggest you do the research yourself if you want to know about it. He has powerful evidence. Study what he has to say. His book is called The Survival of Civilization.
Ice Age to Warmth, a Quick Switch
Scientists have just discovered another surprise, which has some of them shocked and barely able to believe it. They thought that when an ice age recedes, it would take thousands of years to warm back up again. But they now have evidence that it takes only three days, says an article written in Time magazine. It takes 20 years to go from warm to cold and three days to go from cold to warm. So the greenhouse effect is a major and serious problem. No one knows the answer, but what’s scary is that they’re trying to instigate supposed answers that are totally untested. They’re all fighting about whose answer is the best and who wants to do what—but nobody knows. It’s like the ozone—they’ve got maybe 15 different ideas about what to do to fix the ozone, and any one of them might make it better—or worse. No one knows what these things are going to do, because we have never done them before. We seem to be willing to experiment on ourselves to find out if we’re going to make it or not.

Underground Atomic Bombs and CFCs
On top of that, all kinds of other problems are occurring. Some things are so scary that governments are afraid to tell
you anything at all. They won’t tell you about one thing that I simply have to talk about, because it’s so important that

somebody has to say something! I know they don’t want me to talk about this, but I don’t think they’ll stop me.


We’re finding CFCs in the upper atmosphere. Now, “authorities” in the government have been saying that CFC products like Freon will float up there because they’re lighter than air. But guess what—and you scientist types can check this out: CFCs are not lighter than air, they’re four times heavier than air. They sink, they don’t rise! So how did they get up there? It might have been the 212 aboveground atomic bombs that our governments have blown off in the world. Many people suspect that’s how all those CFCs got up there in the first place, and that it really wasn’t us who caused most of the problem with our air conditioners. It was the atomic governments o/the world.
At one point they all went underground with their bombs, and we thought, That’s okay, they’re bombing underground; nothing will happen now. It’s not okay, folks. It’s probably the most dangerous thing that’s going on in the world today, even more than HAARP, and they’re still doing it. I cannot prove what I am about to say, so do not believe it until you can prove it.
Adam Trombly, a famous scientist who has accomplished important work in science, has been monitoring the underground atomic bombing around the world. He probably knows more about this than any other person in the world—even the governments recognize this. Trombly explains what happens when these atomic bombs are exploded underground. The energy doesn’t just sit there; it has to go somewhere, so it goes shooting through the Earth, bouncing off its insides, ripping apart the plates and doing incredible damage as it goes bouncing around like a ping-pong ball. This bouncing effect inside the Earth continues for about 30 days after the l explosion.
Trombly, much like Jacques Cousteau and others, now has a theory that predicts all kinds of things that will hap-
pen—and they’re all happening Mm! Things like the Indian Ocean dropping 23 feet over a very short period of time was
predicted by Trombly at least ten years ago—just as Jacques Cousteau had predicted the death of the Mediterranean
Sea in ten years. Many brilliant people are speaking out their truth, but few people are listening. If Trombly is correct,
we’re only a few more atomic bombs away from the whole planet literally splitting apart in little pieces. The governments
around the world have been on red alert since about 1991 over the changes happening to the Earth that were predicted
by Trombly. They’re scared to death. Yet I believe China just blew up another one—and the U.S. is talking about blowing
one up just because China did!
Anyway, life goes on. It’s a good thing there are other levels to our spirit than just the physical. If it weren’t for the
ascended masters and our higher aspect, we would be in a hopeless situation. But because of the work of other great
souls, you and humanity are just beginning to live. You will soon be birthed into another new, clean and beautiful world,
thank God, and there’s no one else to thank but God. We’re going to be okay through all of this. And yet I will continue .

The Strecker Memorandum on AIDS
Here’s one last drama. Actually, there are many other perilous situations (I could go on for hours), but I’ll just give you
this last one about AIDS. I suggest you try to find the Strecker Memorandum material if you haven’t read it or watched the

video. The governments are really trying to suppress it. Dr. Strecker made a video memorandum of what he believed happened around AIDS. He is a brilliant person. He has worked with retroviruses and is an expert on this subject. He showed the video on television, and the governments threatened him. They allegedly killed his brother and the senator who was sponsoring it. But they didn’t get Strecker—that would have been too obvious, I guess. Dr. Strecker has distributed many of his videos. He got them out to the world, though you don’t hear about it anymore.
Dr. Strecker shows on his film how the United Nations was trying to solve an environmental problem. They knew that the biggest environmental problem in the entire world was the human population, and at the rate it was going, the world would double its population by 2010 or 2012. But because of what the Chinese did, allowing only one child per couple, and other strenuous work around the world, they slowed it down. But they believe that it’s still going to happen. It is now estimated that somewhere around 2014 the world population will have doubled. If that happens, computer models have shown that all life on Earth will die or wish they were dead, according to the United Nations, because we can barely keep it together with almost six billion people. Can you imagine what it would be like with II to 12 billion people in the world7 There’s just no way, at least under the present system.
So, if you were in the United Nations and knew this potential disaster was going to take place and had to make a decision, what would you do? I’m not judging the people who did this—just put yourself in their position of great power. You see that the Earth is coming to a solid wall, that it’s going to be totally destroyed if something is not changed. So they made a decision—and Dr. Strecker showed the memorandum right on television. The United Nations decided that, rather than hit that wall of 11 billion people, right then and there they were going to create a virus or a disease that would kill specifically three-quarters of the people on Earth. In other words, instead of increasing to 11 billion, they wanted to reduce the current population by three-quarters. He showed the ac-population by three-quarters. He showed the actual U.N. document that planned to eliminate three-quarters of the world’s population.
Dr. Strecker showed scientifically exactly how the U.N. did it. They took a virus from a sheep and a virus from a cow and blended them together in a certain way to make the AIDS virus. But before they ever distributed it, they also made a cure for it. The governments have the cure right now, according to Dr. Strecker. The people who were doing this—and history will verify this—were obviously prejudiced, because they singled out two groups: the Blacks and the homosexuals.
In Haiti there was an epidemic of hepatitis B moving through the homosexual community, and they all needed to be
injected with the hepatitis B vaccine. So U.N. agents took the AIDS virus, put it in the hepatitis B vaccine and injected it
into everyone. That’s how the virus started, according to Dr. Strecker. The other evidence that this is true is that through-
out the rest of the world, the virus was not given exclusively to homosexuals. In Africa, where at least 75 million people
have AIDS, the ratio of male to female infection is almost exactly 50-50, from the beginning until now. Only in Haiti, and
eventually in the United States, did it spread almost exclusively through the homosexual population. If you look at the
figures for this country, females are now getting AIDS faster than anyone else. Soon nature will balance it out, and you’ll
see exactly the same thing you see everywhere else around the world, which is that equal numbers of males and females

have AIDS. It isn’t a gay disease at all—it has nothing to do with it. It has to do with the prejudice of the people who created it.
According to Dr. Strecker, the World Health Organization, which has been instrumental in creating this disease, has also been concerned about other diseases—and so have doctors pretty much everywhere. For instance, let’s take cancer: Doctors have been concerned that someday cancer will become contagious, not by pollution or foods or things like this, but that it will become airborne or waterborne, like a cold. You’d just walk by somebody with cancer and you’d get it. But the number of different kinds of cancer viruses is so small that the likelihood of that ever happening is pretty slim. It still could happen, but it’s not likely. But for AIDS, there are 9000 to the 4th power or 6,561,000,000,000,000 totally different kinds of AIDS viruses—that’s a huge number. And every time someone gets AIDS, a brand-new virus is created, one that has never been seen before, ever. This means that it’s inevitable, mathematically speaking—it’s just a matter of time— that AIDS will spread rapidly, just like a cold, throughout the world.
There is a story going around that the World Health Organization believes that this rapidly spreading form of AIDS may have already begun. Around 1990 or 1991 the WHO checked an African tribe of 1400 members, including everyone from little babies to old people, who obviously had all different kinds of sexual practices (you know, little babies aren’t into sexual things), and they found that every single member, without exception, had AIDS. That’s when the WHO announced secretly that the virus was probably now airborne or waterborne, and that it might eventually spread like wildfire, like a common cold. There would be a few years’ lag as with any other new disease. If this were to happen, would you know that you are safe? You need to know the truth—you are more than you know!
A Perspective on Earthly Problems
If we were not multidimensional beings, if we were only physical bodies connected to the Earth and had nowhere to go, we would be in a very serious situation. But because of who we are, what is about to happen on Earth could become a vehicle for enormous growth. Remember, life is a school. Maya is maya!
But still, if we realize the incredibly dangerous situation we’re in, we might awaken to who we are. The only reason I’m even saying these words and not keeping it secret is because we’re like a group of people in a sinking boat. It’s got a big hole in it and the water’s pouring in. It’s not time to sit there and play games and do business as usual and think along the normal ways oj thinking. If you didn’t know the truth about our environment, you might just go along with your life and not act.
I’m not suggesting to act environmentally, though that is not wrong, What I’m much more concerned with is an
internal form of acting, a meditation, a meditation that consciously reconnects you to all life everywhere, It is what the
Taoists say: The way to do is to be. There’s nothing wrong with acting externally, but there’s another kind of acting that’s
required here, I believe. It requires a state of mind where we realize the situation, we begin to take it seriously and work
in a way where we can make some real changes in our consciousness. This inner thing we need to focus on and
understand will slowly unfold as we continue. Whoever understands the other side of this coin of life will realize that these

environmental issues are not a real problem when higher consciousness enters into the 3D world, though from a 3D point of view, it does look like the end of life.

The History of the World
We’re going to open a new subject: the history of the world and how it relates to the present. Each one of these pieces of the puzzle widens the view. The situation in which we find ourselves in this world didn’t develop at random. Events occurred that we need to remember. Many of us were here in past lives, and we have these memories within us. But that’s beside the point. We need to know exactly what occurred in order to understand how it developed into this situation today. This history, of course, will not be found in history books, because history books of human “civilization” go back only 6000 years, and we need to go back about 450,000 years to begin.
This information was first given to me by Thoth around 1985. Thena after Thoth left in 1991,1 became aware of Zecharia Sitchin, read his works, and found out that Sitchin’s and Thoth’s information were almost perfect fits—so perfect it just couldn’t be a coincidence. It was amazing how close they were. Many things that Thoth had mentioned—such as giants in Atlantis, which he didn’t explain further—were explained in Sitchin’s books. And many things that Sitchin appears to have overlooked were deeply explained by Thoth. So the combination of these two sources gives a very interesting viewpoint. You don’t have to accept this viewpoint; you can just listen to it like a legend, think about it and see if it’s workable for you. If something doesn’t feel true to you, then of course don’t accept it. But I believe this is as close as I can get to the truth, and I offer it to you. Remember, I had to translate the geometrical and hieroglyphic images of Thoth into English. Something is bound to get lost, but I do feel it is close enough to trigger your memories.
First you must realize something about written history. Somebody has to hold the pen and write it down, so written
history is always the viewpoint of the person or people who wrote it. Written history began only in the last 6000 years, but
would that history be the same if it had been written by different people? Consider that in most cases it was the winners
of the wars who wrote the history books. Whoever won a war said, “This is what happened.” The losers didn’t get to put
in their two cents. Look at any of the major wars, especially World War II, which was a very emotional war. If Hitler had
won World War II, our history books would be completely different. We’d be examining a totally different set of “facts.” We
would be the bad guys, and they would have shown good reason for doing in the Jews etc. But we won, so we wrote it
from our perspective.
Well, everything’s like that all the way through history. Nobody ever talks about this subject, yet it’s obvious. Even
Thoth was very aware of this; he said, “I’m giving you my viewpoint. I have watched the centuries go by, but I’m only one
person. This is what I believe is true, but you must realize that other people may hold different viewpoints on history.” So

even he was not saying, “This is it—take it or leave it.” So with that observation, we’ll proceed.
Sitchin and Sumeria
I’m going to begin first with Zecharia Sitchin’s work. If you haven’t read his books yet, you have a great treat in store if you want to read about this firsthand. His primary book is called The 12th Planet, though I recommend two others, The Lost Realms and Genesis Revisited (in that order). He writes about many cities that were described in the Christian Bible, such as Babylon, Akkad and Erech, which for a long time people thought were myths because nobody could prove their existence. There wasn’t even the slightest sign that they existed. Then they finally found one city, which led to another, which led to another, which led to another. They eventually found all of the cities mentioned in the Bible.
Realize that all these ancient cities have been discovered in the last 120 years or so, most of them more or less
recently. As they’ve dug down into the layers of these ancient cities, they’ve pulled out thousands of cylindrical clay tablets
upon which the history of Sumer and the history of the Earth is recorded in great detail, going back hundreds of thou-
sands of years. Their written language is called cuneiform. What I’ll be telling you is not just Sitchin’s interpretation. Many other scholars now know how to read cuneiform, and as they translate these works, it’s changing our whole viewpoint of the world, of what we think is true—just as John Anthony West’s work with the Sphinx is also influencing modern thinking about human history.
We’ll come back around full circle later to explain how the Sumerians received their infor-
mation. The Sumerian records are the oldest written records on the planet, 5800 years old,
but they describe things that happened billions of years ago, and in great detail things that
happened after 450,000 years ago. Whether you’re using scientific knowledge or Thoth’s, our
race is about 200,000 years old. Sitchin says that we’re older than that, maybe 300,000 years
or so, but the records and Thoth do not say that—and neither do the Melchizedeks. We’ve
been here slightly more than 200,000 years, but there were civilizations on the Earth—long
before this cycle and long before the Nefilim—that were far more advanced than the Nefilim
or anything we’ve seen since. They left without a trace. By the end of this book you’ll under-
stand why there was nothing left when they departed. This is the planet’s past. It’s part of who
we are, in a way. We have access to all that information. There’s a component within each
one of us that has all this information recorded. It’s easily accessible, but most of us are just
not aware of it.
Normally we give greatest credence to the oldest source of an historical event because it
is closer in time than a scribe further removed from the event. These are the oldest writings
we have, with the possible exception of the geometrical language that predates Egyptian

hieroglyphics. The ancient Sumerians were telling us a story of history that’s very difficult to accept because of our certainty that what we now know about the past is correct. The story is so outrageous on so many levels that scientists are having a very difficult time accepting it even though they know it must be true. It is the oldest source! If it weren’t so outrageous, we would have accepted it at face value long ago because it came from such an ancient source.
On the other hand, if they were crazy, making up stories without any real knowledge, how do we explain that they
knew so many facts about nature that, from our point of view of history, would have been impossible for them to know?
For example, not only did the Dogons know about all the outer planets, but so did the Sumerians—from the very begin-
ning of their culture! The oldest known culture in the world, the Sumerians, extending back to around 3800 B.C., knew
exactly what it looked like to approach our solar system from outer space. They knew about all the outer planets, and
counted them from outer to inner, as though coming in from outside the solar system. Just as the Dogons showed on the
cave wall, the Sumerians described the relative sizes of different planets and described them in detail, as if they were
actually passing them in space—what they looked like, the water on them, the color of the clouds. The whole experience
was described in detail 3800 years B.C.! This is fact. How is this possible? Or is the truth of our beginning unknown to us?
Before NASA sent our space probe into outer space past the outer planets, Sitchin sent them a Sumerian description
of all the planets viewed from space. And when the satellite reached them one by one, sure enough, the Sumerian
descriptions were exactly right. Another example: They knew of the precession of the equinoxes from the very beginning
of their existence as a culture. They knew that the Earth was tilted on its axis at 23 degrees to its orbital plane around the
Sun and that it rotated in a circle that took approximately 25,920 years to complete. Now, that’s a tough one for a straight
historian to understand, especially a scientific type who knows that it takes 2160 years of continuous observation of the
night skies to even know that the Earth wobbles. The minimum length of time is 2160 years, yet the Sumerians knew
about it on day one of their civilization.
How did they know it? There is so much extraordinary evidence coming out of these clay tablets that it’s not being
absorbed into the general thinking very quickly. As I was taught in school and understood it, Moses wrote Genesis
around 1250 B.C., which is about 3250 years ago. That’s what I’ve always read. Yet Sumerian tablets exist that were
written at least 2000 years before Moses lived, and they have the same account as the first chapter of the Bible almost
word for word. These tablets even have Adam and Eve and the names of all their sons and daughters, the whole
spectrum of events described in Genesis. It was all written down before Moses ever received it. This proves that Moses
was not the author of Genesis. Obviously, this truth will be hard to accept by the Christian community, but it is true. I can
understand why this knowledge is taking so long to sink into our modern culture, because it’s a huge deviation from the
accepted history of the Earth, and this minor/major truth about Moses is only a tiny part of the whole truth.

Tiamat and Nibiru
Even deeper than any of these exceptional and impossible bits of information they knew (and there is much more) is
the actual story the Sumerians wrote about the beginnings of the human race before Adam and Eve. They’re talki ng

about a time that goes way, way, way back. The story begins several billion years ago when Earth was very young. It was then a large planet called Tiamat, and it rotated around the Sun between Mars and Jupiter. Ancient Earth had a large moon, which their records say was destined to become a planet itself someday in the future.
According to the records, there was one more planet in our solar system that we are only vaguely aware of in these
modem times. The Babylonians called this planet Marduk, and this name has sort of stuck, but the Sumerian name for it
was Nibiru. It was a huge planet that spun retrograde compared to the other planets. The other planets are in a more or
less flat plane moving in one direction, but Nibiru moves in the other direction, and when it comes close to the other
planets, it passes through the orbit of Mars and Jupiter [Fig. 3-8].
They said that it passes through our solar system every 3600
years, and when it came, it was usually a big event in our solar
system. Then it would go way out past the outer planets and dis-
appear from our sight. NASA, by the way, has probably found this
planet. At least it is the most probable possibility. They used two
satellites and located it at an enormous distance from the Sun. It’s
definitely there, but the Sumerians knew about it thousands of
years ago! Then, according to the records, as fate would have it,
on one orbital pass Nibiru came in so close that one of its moons
struck Tiamat (our Earth) and tore about half of it off—just ripped
this planet right in half. According to the Sumerian records, this
big chunk of Tiamat, along with her major moon, got knocked off
course, went into orbit between Venus and Mars, and became
Earth as we now know it. The other chunk broke into a million
pieces and became what the Sumerian records call “the ham-
mered bracelet,” which we call the asteroid belt between Mars
and Jupiter. This is another point astronomers have marveled at.
How did they know about the asteroid belt, because you can’t see
it with the naked eye?
This is how far back the Sumerian records go. The records
continue to talk about earlier events, until at one point they tell
more about Nibiru. It was inhabited by conscious beings called
the Nefilim. The Nefilim are very tall: the females are about 10 to
12 feet and the males are about 14 to 16 feet. They’re not immor-

Fig. 3-8. Solar system including Marduk/Nibiru and the remains of Tiamat
(asteroid belt and Earth)

tal, but their lifetime is about 360,000 Earth years, according to the Sumerian records. Then they die.

Nibiru’s Atmosphere Problem
According to the Sumerian records, approximately 430,000—perhaps as much as 450,000—years ago the Nefilim
started having a problem with their planet. It was an atmospheric problem very much like the ozone problem we’re
having right now. And their scientists decided on a solution similar to what our scientists have considered. Our scientists
have considered putting dust particles into the ozone layer to filter out the Sun’s damaging rays. Nibiru’s orbit takes it so
far away from the Sun that they needed to hold in the heat, so they decided to put gold particles into their higher
atmosphere, which would reflect the light and temperature back like a mirror. They planned to get large quantities of gold,
pulverize it and suspend it in space above their planet. Yes, it is true that they talked about subjects that seem contempo-
rary—ancient humans talking about ETs and sophisticated science. This is not Star Trek or science fiction; it is real. What
they said is pretty amazing, and that’s why it’s been so slow coming out into the general public’s knowledge.
The Nefilim had the capability of space travel, though they weren’t at that time much further advanced than we are right now, it appears. The Sumerian records show them in their
spaceships with flames coming out the back—rocket ships. This
is beginning space travel, not sophisticated. In fact, they were
so primitive that they had to wait until Nibiru got near enough to
Earth before they could even make the trip between the two
planets. They couldn’t just take off any old time, but had to wait
until they were close. I believe that since the Nefilim weren’t
able to leave the solar system, they searched through all the
planets that were here and found that Earth had large quanti-
ties of gold. So they sent a team here over 400,000 years ago
for one purpose only—to mine gold. The Nefilim who came to
Earth were headed by twelve members who were like bosses,
about 600 workers who were to actually dig the gold, and about
300 who stayed in orbit in their mothership. They first went into
the area of present-day Iraq and began to establish themselves
and build their cities, but that’s not where they mined the gold
[Fig. 3-9]. For the gold, they went to a specific valley in south-
east Africa. One of the twelve, whose name was Enlil, was the
leader of the miners. They went deep into the Earth and dug
large quantities of gold. Then every 3600 years, when Nibiru/
Marduk came around, they would shuttle the gold to their home Fig. 3-9. Original Nefilim
settlements and gold mines.

planet. Then they’d continue their digging while Nibiru traveled its orbit again. According to the Sumerian records, they dug for a very long time, about 100,000 to 150,000 years, and then the Nefilim rebellion took place.
I don’t quite agree with Sitchin’s dating on when this happened. He got it, not directly through the Sumerian records,
but by calculating how long he thought it should be. He came up with the time of about 300,000 years ago when the rebellion took place. I believe it was closer to 200,000 years ago.
The Nefilim Rebellion and the Origin of Our Race
Somewhere between 300,000 and 200,000 years ago the Nefilim workers rebelled. The Sumerian records wrote about this rebellion in great detail. The workers rebelled against their bosses; they did not want to keep digging in the mines. You can imagine the workers saying, “We’ve been digging this gold for 150,000 years, and we’re tired of it. We’re not going to do this anymore.” I would probably have lasted about one month.
The rebellion presented a problem for the bosses, so the twelve leaders came together to decide what to do. They
decided to take a certain life form that already existed on this planet, which was, as I understand it, one of the primates.
Then they would take the blood of the primates, mix it with clay, then take the sperm of one of the young male Nefilim and
mix these elements together. The tablet actually shows them with what looks like chemical flasks, pouring something
from one flask to another to create this new life form. Their plan was to use the DNA of the primates and their own DNA
to create a more advanced race than Earth had at that time so that the Nefilim could control this new race for the sole
purpose of mining gold.
According to the original Sumerian records, we were created to be miners, as slaves to mine gold. That was our only purpose. And when they mined all the gold they needed to save their own planet, their intention was to destroy our race and leave. They weren’t even going to allow us to live. Now, most people hearing that would think, That can’t be us; we’re too noble for something like that. But that is what the oldest written records on Earth state to be the truth. Remember, Sumerian is the oldest known language in the world, older by far than works such as the Holy Bible and the Koran. It now appears that the Holy Bible was birthed out of the ashes of Sumer.
What science has discovered is almost as interesting. In the exact place where the Sumerian records say we mined gold, archaeologists have found gold mines. These ancient gold mines are dated back as far as 100,000 years. What is really incredible is that Homo sapiens (that’s us) were mining gold in these mines. Our bones were found there. Those gold mines had been worked at least 100,000 years ago, and they have dated humans in these mines as early as 20,000 years ago. Now, what the heck were we doing mining gold 100,000 years ago? Why did we need gold? It’s a soft metal, not something you could use like certain other metals. It wasn’t found very often in ancient artifacts. So why were we doing this, and where was it going?


Did Eve Come from the Gold Mines?
Then there’s the so-called Eve theory that people have been trying to put down for a long time.
Scientists took a certain component in the DNA molecule and overlapped it to show which one came first, and they
figured out that the first person of humanity lived somewhere between 150- and 250,000 years ago. And that first person,
whom they called Eve, happened to come from the exact valley the Sumerians claim that we were mining gold [Fig. 3-
10]! Since then one scientist has discarded this theory because there are many other ways to look at the DNA origins.
But I still find it remarkable that this theory just happened to point at the same valley where the Sumerian records say it
all started.
Thoth’s Version of the Origin of Our Race
Now, let’s see how similar Thoth’s version is. He agrees with the Melchizedek tradition that our particular race didn’t start 350,000 years ago as Sitchin says, but exactly 200,207 years ago (from 1993), or 198,214 years B.C. He said that
the original people of our race were placed on an island located off the coast of southern
Africa, called Gondwanaland.
I don’t know if this is the right shape for Gondwanaland [Fig. 3-11]; it’s not impor-
tant, but it was in that area. They were placed here primarily so that they could be
contained and not leave. When they evolved enough to be useful to the Nefilim,
they were transported to the mining area in Africa and to various other places where they were used to mine gold and perform other services. So this original race, our ancestors, developed and evolved there on the island of Gondwanaland for about 50- to 70,000 years.
You can see on this map how the various landmasses could have fit together
at one time, and this is what scientists now suspect is true. They call this one land-
mass, before it divided, Gondwanaland. They got the name from the creation sto-
ries of the tribes in western Africa. If you read the various creation stories of these
tribes, they all have different ideas about how creation took place, but one thread
Fig. 3-11. Gondwanaland runs through all of them exactly the same. They all say they came from the west, from
an island off the western shore of Africa, and that it was called Gondwana. They all agree on
that one piece of information, with the one known exception of the Zulus, who claim to have come from space.
The Sumerian records actually picture humans as about one-third the height of the Nefilim. The Nefilim were defi-
nitely giants compared to us. They were 10 to 16 feet tall, if you believe the records. I don’t see any reason for them to lie.
Thoth said that there were giants on the Earth, but he didn’t say who they were or anything more about them. The Bible

says the same thing. Here it is in chapter six of Genesis:
“And it came to pass, when men began to multiply on the face of the earth, and daughters were born unto them”—
that’s an important statement, “when men began to multiply” (I’ll talk about that in a moment)— “that the sons of God”
(think about that one for a moment; it’s saying the “sons of God” plural) “saw the daughters of men, that they were fair;
and they” (the 5om of God) “took them wives of all which they chose. And the Lord said, ‘My spirit shall not always strive
with man, for that he also is flesh’ “ (this indicates that “the Lord” is also flesh), “yet his days shall be an hundred and
twenty years. There were giants in the earth in those days and also after that; when the sons of God came in to the
daughters of men and they bare children to them, the same became mighty men which were of old, men of renown.”
That part of the Bible has been interpreted in a lot of ways. But when you see it in the light of what the Sumerian records are saying, it takes on a completely different aspect, especially when you read the older Bibles that tell what the giants were called. They were called the “Nephilim” in the Christian Bible, exactly the same-sounding word as the Sumerian records give. There are over 900 versions of the Bible in the world, and almost all of them talk about giants, a large percentage of them specifically calling them the Nefilim.
Conceiving the Human Race: The Sirian Role
Thoth says there were giants here on Earth. That’s all he said. He didn’t say how they got here or where they came from. He said that when our race was created, these giants became our mother. He said that seven of them came together, dropped their bodies by consciously dying, and formed a pattern of seven interlocking spheres of consciousness, exactly like the Genesis pattern (which you’ll learn about in chapter 5). This merging created a white-blue flame, which the ancients called the Flower of Life, and they placed this flame into the womb of the Earth.
The Egyptians call this womb the Halls of Amenti, which is a fourth-dimensional space that’s located third-dimension-
ally about a thousand miles under the surface of the Earth and is connected to the Great Pyramid through a fourthdimensional passageway. One of the primary uses of the Halls of Amenti is for the creation of new races or species. Inside it is a room, based on Fibonacci proportions, made from what appears to be stone, In the middle of the room sits a cube, and on top of the cube is the flame the Nefilim created. This flame, which is four or five feet tall and about three feet in diameter, has a whitish blue light. This light is pure prana, pure consciousness, which is the planetary “ovum” created for us to begin this new evolutionary path that we call human.
Thoth says that if there’s a mother, there’s got to be a father somewhere. And the nature of the father—the father’s sperm—must come from outside the system or body. So when the Nefilim were setting up their flasks and preparing for this new race to develop, another race of beings from a far-distant star—from the third planet out from Sirius B—were preparing to travel to Earth. There were 32 members of this race, 16 males and 16 females who were married into a single family. They were also giants of the same height as the Nefilim. Though the Nefilim were primarily third-dimen-
sional beings, the Sirians were primarily fourth-dimensional.

Thirty-two people marrying each other probably sounds strange, too. On Earth, one male and one female marry because we’re reflecting the light of our sun. Our sun is a hydrogen sun, which has one proton and one electron. We duplicate that process of hydrogen, and that’s why we marry the way we do, one on one. If you were to visit planets that have helium suns, which have two protons, two electrons and two neutrons, then you would find two males and two females joining together to make children. When you go to an old sun like Sirius B, which is a white dwarf and highly evolved, it has a system of 32 (germanium).
So the Sirians came here and knew exactly what to do. They entered directly into the womb of the Halls of Amenti, right into the pyramid and before the flame. These beings had the understanding that all things are light. They understood the connection between thought and feeling. So they simply created 32 rose-quartz slabs that were about 30 inches high, 3 or 4 feet wide and roughly 18 to 20 feet long. They created them out of nothing—absolutely nothing at all—around the flame. Then they lay down on these slabs, alternating male and female, facing upward with their heads toward the center around this flame. The Sirians conceived, or merged with the flame or ovum of the Nefilim. On the third-dimen-
sional level, the Nefilim scientists placed the laboratory-created human eggs in the wombs of seven Nefilim women, from which the first human being was eventually born. Conception in human terms happens in less than 24 hours—the basic process through the first eight cells. But conception on a planetary level is very different. According to Thoth, they lay there without moving for approximately 2000 years, conceiving with the Earth this new race. Finally, after 2000 years, the first human beings were born in Gondwanaland, off the western shores of southern Africa.
Enlil’s Arrival
Now, the part of the story where the Sirians are the father doesn’t seem to completely correlate with what the
Sumerian records say, at least according to the story given by Zecharia Sitchin, until you look at a sequence of events
that Sitchin didn’t seem to understand. Enlil, who was the first one to come to Earth and was the boss in southern Africa—
did not land on
land when he arrived on Earth. He landed in the waters. Why did he go into the waters? Because that’s where the dolphins and the whales were. The dolphins and whales were the highest level of consciousness on this planet, and still are. In simple galactic terms, Enlil had to go into the ocean to get permission to live and mine gold on Earth. Why? Because this planet belonged to the dolphins and whales, and it is galactic law that permission must be granted before an off-planet race can enter into a different consciousness system. According to the Sumerian records, Enlil stayed with them a very long time, and when he finally decided to come onto land, he was half human and half fish! At one point Enlil became all human. This was described in the Sumerian records.
You see, the third planet out from Sirius B that some call Oceana happens to be the home planet of the dolphins and
whales. Peter Shenstone, leader of the dolphin movement in Australia, has channeled an unusual book, The Legend of
the Golden Dolphin, which came from the dolphins and describes exactly how they came from another galaxy, how they

came to be on the little star around Sirius B, and how they traveled to Earth. The entire planet there is almost completely water; there’s an island about the size of Australia and another about the size of California, and that’s all. On those two landmasses there are human-type beings, but not very many. The rest of the planet, which is all water, is cetacean. There’s a direct connection between the human-type beings and the cetaceans, so when Enlil (a Nefilim) came here, he first connected with the dolphins (Sirians) to receive their blessing. Then he went onto the land and began the process that led to the creation of our race.
Nefilim Mothers
To recapitulate and clarify: After the rebellion, when it was decided to create a new race here on Earth, it was the
Nefilim who became the mother aspect. The Sumerian record says seven females stepped forward. Then the Nefilim
took clay from the earth, blood from the primate and sperm from the young Nefilim male, mixed this together and put it
into the wombs of the young female Nefilim who were chosen for this. They gave birth to human babies. So seven of us
were birthed at once, not just one Adam and Eve, according to the original stories—and we were sterile. We could not
reproduce. The Nefilim continued procreating little humans, making an army of little beings—us—putting them on the
island of Gondwanaland. If you want to believe this story, which is part Sumerian record and part Thoth, our race’s
mother is Nefilim and our father is Sirian. Now, if it were not for the Sumerian records concerning the Nefilim, this would
all seem absolutely outrageous—and it still does. But there’s a tremendous amount of scientific evidence that this is true
if you read the archaeological records—not about the Sirian father, but definitely about the Nefilim mother.
Science doesn’t understand how we got here. You are aware that there’s a “missing link” between the last primate
and us. We seem to come out of nowhere. They do know that we’re somewhere between 150- and 250,000 years old,
but they have no idea where we came from or how we developed. We just stepped through some mystical doorway and

Adam and Eve
Another interesting part of the Sumerian records was that after they mined gold for a while in Africa, the cities in the
north, near modern-day Iraq, became quite elaborate and extremely beautiful. They were in rain forests and had huge
gardens around them. It was finally decided, according to the Sumerian records, to bring some of the slaves from the
southern mines to the cities to have them work the gardens. Evidently we made great slaves. One day Enlil’s younger
brother, Enki (whose name means snake), went to Eve—and the records used that name, Eve—and told her that the
reason his brother didn’t want the humans to eat of that tree in the center of the garden was because it would make them
like the Nefilim. Enki was trying to get even with his brother for a dispute they were having. (The whole story is much more
involved than this, but you can read it in the records.) So Enki convinced Eve to eat of the apple tree, the tree of the

knowledge of good and evil, which, according to the records, included more than just a dualistic point of view. It gave her the power to procreate, to give birth.
So Eve found Adam and they ate of this tree and had children, each of which was listed by name on the Sumerian tablets. Now, think about the Adam and Eve story from here on—both stories: the one in Sumerian records and the one in the Bible. God walks through the garden—he’s walking, he’s in a body, in flesh, which was suggested in Genesis. He’s walking through the garden calling for Adam and Eve. He doesn’t know where they are. He’s God, but he doesn’t know where Adam and Eve are. He calls for them and they come. He doesn’t know that they ate of the tree until he sees them trying to hide themselves because they’re ashamed. Then he realizes what they’ve done.
Here’s another thing: The word for God, elohim, in the original Bible— intact, in all the bibles—was not singular but
plural. Was the God who created humanity a race of beings? When Enlil found out that Adam and Eve had done this, he was furious. He especially didn’t want them to eat of the other tree, the tree of life, because then not only would they be
able to procreate, but they would become immortal. (We don’t know if these are really trees or not. It might have been
symbolic for something bound to consciousness.) Therefore, at that point Enlil removed Adam and Eve from his garden.
He put them somewhere else and monitored them. He had to have monitored them because he wrote down the names
of all the sons and daughters; he knew everything that was going on in the whole family. It was all written down over 2000
years before the Bible was ever written.
From the time of Adam and Eve, our race developed in two strains: one that could procreate and were free (though
monitored), and the other that could not have children and were slaves. According to modern scientists, this latter strain
continued to mine gold until at least 20,000 years ago. The bones of this second strain that were found in the mines were
identical to ours; the only difference is that they couldn’t have children. This strain was completely destroyed at the time
of the Great Flood, roughly 12,500 years ago. (There is much more to this subject, which we will give to you at the right
We will be talking about four Earth pole shifts in this work—when Gondwanaland sank, when Lemuria sank, when Atlantis sank (which is the Great Flood) and the one that is now about to happen. This side note is important to understand: According to Thoth, the degree of tilt of the Earth’s axis and the degree of the pole shift—which happens on a pretty regular basis, according to science—have a direct relationship to the change in consciousness on the planet. For example, the last time the pole shifted at the time of the Great Flood, the North Pole was in Hawaii (I realize this is debatable)—at least that’s where the magnetic pole was—and now it’s practically 90 degrees from there. That’s a big change. It was not a positive change, but a negative one—we went down in consciousness, not up.
The Rising of Lemuria
According to Thoth, after Adam and Eve there was a major shift of the axis, which submerged Gondwanaland. Thoth
says that when Gondwanaland went down, another landmass came up in the Pacific Ocean, which we call Lemuria, and

the descendants of Adam and Eve were taken from their homeland and brought to Lemuria.
Figure 3-12 is not exactly what Lemuria looked like, but it’s close in a certain way. It
extended from the Hawaiian Islands all the way down to Easter Island. It was not a solid
mass, but a series of thousands of islands that were closely linked. Some of them were big,
some of them little, and there were a whole lot more than this picture shows. It was like a
continent that was barely above water—a water continent.
Adam’s race was brought there and allowed to develop on its own without the Nefilim
interfering, as far as I know. We remained on Lemuria for 65- to 70,000 years. While we
were on Lemuria, we were very happy. We had few problems. We were accelerating through
our evolutionary path and moving very well. We did lots of experiments on ourselves and

Fig. 3-12. Lemuria.

implemented many physical changes to our bodies. We were changing our skeletal struc-
ture, working on the base of our spine a great deal, working on our skull size and shape.

We were mostly right-brained, feminine in nature. An evolutionary cycle has to choose whether it’s going to be male or female, just like you did when you came to Earth. You’ve got to make that decision. So our race was becoming female. By the time Lemuria sank, as a race we were equivalent to about a 12-year-old girl.

Explorations of Lemuria in 1910
The fact that Lemuria probably existed was established in our society as far back as 1910. We don’t remember much about this knowledge, because in 1912 something happened to change our course of evolution. In 1912 experiments took place that were similar to the Philadelphia Experiment of 1942 and ’43, which we’ll talk about later. They actually did the experiment in 1913, but it turned out to be a huge catastrophe, and I personally believe that this experiment is what caused World War I in 1914. After that we were never the same.
Before World War I the spiritual growth pattern of the United States was similar to what’s happening right now. People were extremely interested in spiritual and psychic work, in meditation, in understanding the ancient past and in everything else of that nature. People like Colonel James Churchward and Augustus Le Plongeon from France were studying Atlantis and Lemuria, and there were many similar thought patterns compared to the present. Then when World War I came along, we fell asleep and didn’t start waking up again until the 1960s. But the proof they had in 1910 about the existence of Lemuria was pretty remarkable, and it had to do with coral. Coral can grow underneath the surface of water only to a depth of 150 feet. In 1910 I suspect the Pacific floor was higher than it is now, because they were able to see coral rings on the surface of the ocean floor heading away from Easter Island for a great distance.
By the way, the ocean floor does rise and fall. You might not know it, but the Atlantic Ocean floor rose over two miles
in December 1969; you can look this up in the January 1970 issue of Life magazine. In the Bermuda area many islands
suddenly began to break the surface. Some are still there, but most of them sank again. The ocean floor had been over

two miles deep prior to that time.
At the time that Plato described Atlantis and the Atlantic Ocean, the Greeks were having a difficult time navigating their ships into the Atlantic Ocean outside the Straits of Gibraltar because the water in that area was only 10 or 15 feet deep, sometimes even less. Now the water is deep again.
The coral rings they discovered in the Pacific were estimated at 1800 feet deep. This meant that the rings originally
had islands inside, because the coral had to be close to the surface in order to grow. If the rings were 1800 feet deep, it
meant that since coral cannot grow below 150 feet, the rings sank very, very slowly. In 1910 people could see these rings
going off into the distance, so they knew there had to be a lot of islands there at one time. Probably more important, if you
follow the fauna and flora from the Hawaiian Islands, you find the same features on a whole series of islands moving
along an arc from Hawaii all the way to Easter Island. These islands are separated by long distances, but if you look on
a map, you’ll see a long string. That string used to run along the western shores of Lemuria. All those islands, including
Tahiti and Borea, were part of Lemuria. All the islands in this string have exactly the same fauna and flora—not on any of
the other islands, just this one string—the same trees, same birds, same bees, same bugs, same bacteria, same every-
thing. Science can explain this phenomenon only if there were at one time much closer land bridges between these
Ay and Tiya and the Beginning ofTantra
This new civilization in Lemuria was developing quite well; everything was going along just great. But most of Lemuria eventually sank. About a thousand years before it sank, two people were there whose names were Ay and Tiya. This couple did something that no one else had ever done before, at least in our evolutionary cycle. They discovered that if you make love in a certain way and breathe in a certain way, you get different results when you have a child. Through the conception of that different kind of birth, all three of them—the mother, the father and the child—would become immortal. In other words, by having a baby in a certain way, the experience changes you forever.
Ay and Tiya suspected that they had become immortal, I’m sure, because of their experience. As time went on and
everybody else started dying but they remained alive, people began to realize that they really did have something. So
they finally set up a school. As far as I know, it was the first mystery school on the Earth in this cycle. It was called the
Naacal, or Naakal (rhymes with McCall), Mystery School, where they simply tried to teach how to do this thing we call
resurrection or ascension through tantra. Tantra is a Hindu word for yoga or union with God though sexual practices. (We
have a lot to go over before we can understand exactly what they were doing.) Anyway, they did this and then they began
to teach other people.
Before Lemuria sank, they had instructed approximately a thousand people, which means that about 333 families of
three each were able to understand what they were doing and demonstrate it. They were able to make love in this
unusual way. They didn’t touch each other, actually. In fact, they didn’t even need to be in the same room. It was

interdimensional love-making. They taught others how to do it, and it was getting to a place where in another few thousand years they would probably have translated the whole race into a new consciousness.
But God evidently said no, it was not the right time. They had just gotten
started when Lemuria sank. Lemuria, like I said, was female, and the Lemurians
were very psychic. They knew that Lemuria was going to sink a long time be-
forehand. They knew with absolute certainty; it wasn’t even a matter of discus-
sion. So they prepared a long time in advance. They took all their artifacts to
Lake Titicaca, Mount Shasta and other places. Even the great golden disk of
Lemuria was removed. They got everything of value out of the country and
prepared for the end. When Lemuria finally sank, they were totally off the is-

lands. They had resettled from Lake Titicaca through Central America and Mexico
to as far north as Mount Shasta.

Lemuria Sinks and Atlantis Rises
According to what Thoth says, the sinking of Lemuria and the rising of Atlantis occurred at the same time, during another shift of the axis. Lemuria went down, and what would be called Atlantis rose.
Atlantis was a pretty large continent, as shown here [Fig. 3-13]. The south-
eastern part of the United States wasn’t there; Florida, Louisiana, Alabama,
Georgia, South Carolina, North Carolina and parts of Texas were under water. I
don’t know if Atlantis was quite this big or not, but it was pretty big. It actually
consisted of this continent plus nine islands: one to the north, one to the east,
one to the south and six to the west, which extended to where the Florida Keys
are now.


Fig. 3-13. Atlantis.

Update: On May 23, 1998, Aaron Du Val,
president of the Egyptology Society in Miami,
Florida, announced that ancient Atlantis has
been found near Bimini, and that it can be sci-
entifically proven beyond any doubt. They have
found a huge underwater pyramid and have
open hermetically sealed chambers to expose
records that confirm what Plato said about
Atlantis during the time of ancient Greece. Mr.
Du Val said they will present their evidence to
the world before the end of 1998 or soon af-

The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness
and the Creation of the Christ Grid

How the Lemurians Evolved Human Consciousness

ne immortal beings of Lemuria “flew ” from their homeland to a little |

island north of

the newly risen continent ofAtlantis .

They waited for a

long time on the island they named Udal, then they began to recreate their spiritual science. If you had watched

them, you wouldn’t have known what the heck they were doing; you’d have thought they were nuts. In order to describe what they were doing, I have to describe something else first

The Structure of the Human Brain
This circle [Fig. 4-1] represents a human head, looking down from above. There’s the nose (N). The human brain is divided into two components, the left side and the right side.
In Figure 4-2, the left side is male and the right side is female, and they are linked by the corpus callosum. According
to Thoth, this is the nature of these two hemispheres: The left, male component sees everything absolutely logically—as
it is, you might say. The right, female component is much more concerned with experiencing something than understand-
ing it. The female and male perceptions are mirror images of each other—as if you had a mirror between them. If you had
the word LOVE written into the male component, he would see it as shown. But the female sees its mirror image, also as
shown. When the male looks at her way of perceiving, he says, “There’s no logic here.” She looks at him and says,
“Where is the feeling?”
The brain is further divided into four lobes by another thin division. The male side of the brain has a component
behind it that reflects, or mirrors the front, as shown in Figure 4-3. There’s another mirror image behind the female side
that reflects what’s in front of it. The male logical component has a totally experiential component behind it and the female
experiential component has totally logical component behind it. It’s as if there are four mirrors reflecting each other in
these four possible ways. When we look at the geometries later, you’ll see that the forward part in the male brain, the
logical component, is based on the triangle and the square (in two dimensions) or the tetrahedron and the cube (in three

dimensions). The forward part in the female brain, the experiential component, is based on the triangle and the pentagon (in two dimensions) or the tetrahedron, the icosahedron and the dodecahedron (in three dimensions). There are also diagonal pathways connecting the left-front logical to the back-right logical, and the right-front experiential to the back-left experiential. Thus the mirror quality reflects side to side, front to back, and diagonal to diagonal. This is the way we’re made up, according to Thoth.
The Attempt to Birth a New Consciousness on Atlantis
When the time was right, the Naacals from Lemuria created a spiritual rep-
resentation of a human brain on the surface of their Atlantean island. Their
purpose was to birth a new consciousness based on what they had learned
during Lemuria. They believed the brain had to come first before the body of
the new consciousness ofAtlantis was to emerge. With Thoth’s image of the
human brain in mind, you can begin to make sense of their actions. First they
made a wall down the middle of the island about 40 feet high and 20 feet wide,
which sealed off one side of the island from the other. Literally, you had to go
into the water to get to the other side. Then they ran a minor wall across at 90
degrees to the first wall, which divided the island into four parts.
Then half of these thousand people, who were of the Naacal Mystery School,
went on one side and half stayed on the other, depending on their nature. That
could mean that all the women stayed on one side and all the men went to the
other side, but as I understand it, where a person went did not depend on the
physical body, but his or her dependency on one side of the brain or the other.

In this way, approximately half became the male component of the brain and
the other half became the female component.
They spent thousands of years in this physical state until they believed they
were ready for the next step. Three people were selected to represent the cor-
pus callosum, the part of the brain that links the left and right hemispheres
together. Thoth’s father, Thome, was one of these. He and two other people
were the only ones allowed to go everywhere on the island. Otherwise, the two
sides had to remain completely separate from each other. Then the three be-
gan to align their energies and thoughts and feelings and all aspects

Fig. 4-1. The two hemispheres of the human brain.

Fig. 4-2. Dynamics of the two hemispheres, reflecting side to side.

ofhumanness into an integrated human brain, not with human cells, but rather with human bodies.
The next step was to project onto the surface ofAtlantis the form of the Tree of
Life. They used the form here [Fig. 4-4] with 12 circles on it instead of 10, but the 11th
and 12th circles were off the mainland; one of the points was on Udal and one was in
the water to the south. So there were ten components on the mainland, which is the
configuration we’re familiar with. Even though it extended over hundreds of miles on
the surface of this land, they projected it to the accuracy of a single atom, according to
Thoth. There is an indication that even the spheres of the Tree of Life were used to designate the size and shape of the cities ofAtlantis. Plato says in his book Critia5 that the main city of Atlantis was made of three rings of land separated by water, as shown in this drawing [Fig. 4-5]. He also says the city was constructed of red, black and white stones. This last statement will make sense as soon as we talk about the Great Pyramid.
The Children of Lemuria Are Called Forth
Suddenly, in a single day, the brain of Atlantis, the Naacal Mystery School, breathed life into the Tree of Life on the
surface of Atlantis. This created vortexes of energy rotating out of each of the circles on the Tree of Life. Once the
vortexes were established, then the brain ofAtlantis psychically called forth the children of Lemuria. Millions and millions
of Lemurians, who by then had settled along the west coast of North and South America and in other places, began to be
pulled to Atlantis. A great migration began, and the ordinary people of the sunken Lemuria started moving toward Atlantis.
Remember, they were feminine right-brained beings and inner communication was easy. However, the Lemurian body of
consciousness had reached only the age of twelve as a planetary consciousness. It was still a child, and some of its
centers weren’t functioning yet; they had worked with those energies and had mastered only eight of the ten. So each
migrating Lemurian was attracted to one of these eight centers on Atlantis, depending on the nature of the individual.
There they settled and began to build cities.
That left two vortexes with nobody using them, not a single person. These two vortexes were pulling life toward them, and in life you just can’t have an empty place. Life will find a way to fill it. For instance, if you’re driving along the freeway following another car and you drop too far behind it, somebody will fill in the gap, right? If you leave a place empty, life will step in and fill it. That’s exactly what happened on Atlantis.
Though Lemurians settled into only eight of the vortex areas, Mayan records state clearly that there were ten cities in Atlantis when it fell. In fact, you can see those records in the Troano document, which is now located in the British Museum. This document is estimated to be at least 3500 years old, and it describes in detail the sinking ofAtlantis. It’s Mayan, and it contains an authentic account of the cataclysm, according to Le Plongeon, the French historian who translated it. Here is what it says:

In the year 6 Kan on the 11th Muluc in the month Zak, there occurred terrible earthquakes which continued without interruption until the 13th Chin. The country of the hills of Mud, the land of Mu, was sacrificed, being twice upheaved. It suddenly disappeared during one night, the basin being continually shaken by volcanic forces. Being confined, these caused the land to sink and to rise several times and in various places. At last the surface gave way, and ten countries were torn asunder and scattered, unable to stand the forces of the convulsions. They sank with their 64 million inhabitants.
The ten countries mentioned were referring to the ten points on the Tree of
Life. When you see this document, it shows an extremely sophisticated city with
volcanoes going off inside and all around it, pyramids and everything else being
destroyed and people getting in boats and trying to escape. It describes the

incident in the Mayan language, which uses pictures.

The Aborted Evolution

Two Empty Vortexes Drew Extraterrestrial Races
To fill those two empty vortexes, according to Thoth, two extraterrestrial
races stepped in—not one, but two completely different races. The first race
was the Hebrews, coming from our future. Thoth says they came from off the
planet, but I don’t know specifically where. The Hebrews were kind of like a kid
who went through the fifth grade and didn’t make it and had to do that grade
over again. They hadn’t graduated to the next level of evolution, so they had to
repeat that grade. In other words, they were like a child who had already been
through the math stuff. They knew a lot of things that we didn’t know yet. They
had legal permission from the Galactic Command to step into our evolutionary
path at that time. They brought with them, according to Thoth, many concepts
and ideas that we had no idea about yet because we hadn’t entered into those
levels of awareness. This interaction actually benefited our evolution, I believe. There
was no problem with their coming to Earth and settling. There probably would have

Fig. 4-4. Tree of Life on Atlantis.

Fig. 4-5. Atlantean city of Poseidon.

been no problem at all if just this one race had come here.
The other race that stepped in at that time caused big problems. These beings came from the nearby planet of Mars. (I know this may sound strange, but it sounded even stranger when I was saying this back in 1985 before people like
Richard Hoagland began to speak up.) It has become evident, because of the
situation that has developed in the world, that this same race is still causing
major problems. The secret government and the trillionaires of the world are of
Mars extraction or have mostly Martian genes and little or no emotional/feeling
Mars after the Lucifer Rebellion
According to Thoth, Mars looked much like Earth a little less than a million years ago. It was beautiful. It had oceans and water and trees and was just fantastic. But then something happened to them, and it had to do with a past “Lucifer rebellion.”
From the very beginning of this experiment we are in—and all of God’s cre-
ation is an experiment—experiments similar to the Lucifer rebellion (if you want to call them rebellions) have been attempted four times. In other words, three other beings besides Lucifer attempted to do the same thing, and each time it resulted in utter chaos throughout the universe.
More than a million years ago, the Martians had joined the third rebellion, the third time that life decided to try this experiment. And the experiment failed dramatically. Planets everywhere were destroyed, and Mars was one of them. Life attempted to create a separate reality from God, which is the same thing that’s going on now. In other words, a portion of life attempted to separate itself from all other life and create its own separate reality. Since everyone is God anyway, this is okay—you can do that. The only thing is, it never has worked so far. Nevertheless, they tried it again.
When someone tries to separate from God, they sever their love connection with Reality. So when the Martians (and many others) created a separate reality, they cut the love bond—they disconnected the emotional body—and in so doing they became pure male, with little or no female within them. They were purely logical beings with no emotions. Like Mr. Spock in Star Trek, they were pure logic. What happened in Mars, and in thousands and thousands of other places, was that they ended up fighting all the time because there was no compassion, no love. Mars became a bat-tieground that just kept going on and on and on, until finally it became clear that Mars was not going to survive. Eventually they blew their atmosphere away and destroyed the surface of their planet.
Before Mars was destroyed, they built huge tetrahedral pyramids, which you’re going to see in photographs in the
second volume. Then they built three-sided, four-sided, and five-sided pyramids, eventually building a complex that was
able to create a synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba. You see, you can have a space-time vehicle that looks like a spaceship, or you can

have certain other structures that do the same thing. They built a structure from which they were able to look ahead and behind in time and space to tremendous distances and time periods.
A small group of Martians tried to get away from Mars before it was destroyed, so they translated themselves into the future and found a perfect place to resettle before Mars was destroyed. That place was Earth, but it was about 65,000 years in our past. They saw that little vortex sitting there on Atlantis with nobody in it. They didn’t ask permission. Being part of the rebellion, they didn’t go through the normal procedure. They just said, “All right, let’s do it.” They stepped right into that vortex, and in so doing, they joined our evolutionary path.
Martians Rape the Human Child Consciousness and Take Over
There were only a few thousand of these Martians who actually used the time-space-dimension consciousness machine, or building. The very first thing they did when they arrived here on Earth was try to take control of Atlantis. They wanted to declare war and take over. However, they were vulnerable because of their small numbers and perhaps other reasons, so they couldn’t do it. They were finally subdued by the Atlanteans/ Lemurians. We were able to stop them from conquering us, but we could not send them back. By the time this took place in our evolutionary path, we were about the age of a 14-year-old girl. So what you had here was similar to a 14-year-old girl being taken over by a much older man, a 60- or 70-year-old man who simply forced himself on her. In other words, it was rape. We were raped, we had no choice. The Martians just stepped in and said, “Like it or not, we’re here.” They didn’t care what we thought or felt about it. It was really no different from what we in America did to the Native Americans.
Once the initial conflict was over, it was agreed that the Martians would try to understand this female thing they
lacked, this emotional feeling, of which they had none at all. Things more or less settled down for a long time. But the
Martians slowly began to implement their left-brain technology, which the Lemurians didn’t know anything about. All the
Lemurians knew was right-brain technology, which today we know very little about. Psychotronic machines, dowsing
rods and those kinds of things are right-brain technologies. Many right-brain feminine technologies would astound you if
you saw them in action. You can do absolutely anything that you can imagine with right-brain technology, just as you can
with left-brain technology, if they are brought to their full potential. But then we really do not need either one—this is the
great secret that we have forgotten!
The Martians kept putting out these left-brain inventions, one after another after another, until finally they changed
the polarity of our evolutionary path because we began to “see” through the left brain, and we changed from female to
male. We changed the nature of who we were. The Martians gained control bit by bit, until eventually they controlled
everything without a battle. They had all the money and all the power. The animosity between the Martians and the
Lemurians—and I’m putting the Hebrews in with the Lemurians—never subsided, not even to the very end of Atlantis.
They hated each other. The Lemurians, the feminine aspect, were basically shoved down and treated like inferiors. It was
not a very loving situation. It was a marriage that the female component did not like, but I don’t think the Martian males

really cared if she liked it or not. It remained this way for a very long time, until approximately 26,000 years ago, when the next phase slowly began.

Minor Pole Shift and the Subsequent Debate
It was about 26,000 years ago when we had another minor pole shift and a small change in consciousness. This pole shift took place at the same point on the polar wobble called the precession of the equinoxes that we have now returned to (see the lower small oval at A in Fig. 4-6). It wasn’t much, though it has been recorded by science. The two small ovals on the cycle are where these changes always take place, and right now we’re back at point A again.
At the time of this pole shift, a piece of Atlantis, probably about half the size of Rhode Island, sank into the ocean. That caused a tremendous amount of fear in Atlantis, because they thought they were going to lose the whole continent, like what happened to Lemuria. By this time they had lost most of their ability to see into the future. They were shaking in their boots for a long time simply because they didn’t know for sure what was going to happen. They were still afraid a hundred years later, then slowly this fear began to subside. It took over 200 years for them to feel safe again.
Atlantis was a little beyond the lower oval at A when they finally relaxed their fear about Earth changes. But the memory was still there. They were going along nicely for a while, then out of the blue approximately 13,000 to 16,000 years ago, a comet approached Earth. When this comet was still in deep space, the Atlanteans knew about it because they were more technologically advanced than we are now. They witnessed its approach.
A great conflict began to occur in Atlantis. The Martians, who were in the minority even though they were in control, wanted to blow it out of the sky with their laser technology. But there was a huge movement amongst the Lemurian population against using the Martian left-brained technology. The feminine aspect said, “This comet is in divine order, and we should allow this to take place naturally. Let it hit the Earth. That is what’s supposed to take place.”
Of course, the Martians replied, “No! Let’s blow it out of the sky. We have very little time, or we all will be killed.” After lots of arguing, the Martians finally and reluctantly agreed to allow the comet to hit the Earth. When it arrived, it came screaming into the atmosphere, plunging into the Atlantic Ocean just off the western shore of Atlantis near where Charleston, South Carolina, is now, only it was on the bottom of the ocean then. The remnants of that comet are now scattered over four states. Science has definitely determined that it did hit there somewhere between 13,000 and 16,000 years ago. They’re still finding pieces. Although most of the fragments were centered near Charleston, one of the two largest pieces actually struck the main body of Atlantis in its southwestern area. These left two huge holes in the floor of the Atlantic Ocean and could have been the true cause of the sinking of Atlantis. The actual sinking did not happen at that time, but took place at least several hundred years later.


The Martians’ Fateful Decision
The pieces of the comet that crashed into the southwest-
ern area of Atlantis happened to be right where the Martians
were living, killing a huge portion of their population. The Mar-
tians got hurt the worst by consenting to allow the comet to come
in. Well, that was too humiliating and painful for them. This was
the beginning of a great loss of consciousness for Earth. What
was about to take place was the seed for a bitter tree, the same
tree we live by today. The Martians said, “It’s all over. We are
divorcing you. We’re going to do whatever we want from now
on. You can do whatever you want, but we’re going to lead our
own lives and try to control our own fate. And we’re not going to
listen to you ever again.” You know this whole number. We’ve seen it in divorced families throughout the world. And the children? Look at our world! We are the children!
The Martians decided to take over the Earth, of course. Control, the Martian’s primary interface with the Reality, rose
to meet their anger. They began to create a building complex like the one they had constructed on Mars a long time
earlier, in order to create a synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba once again. The only thing is, around 50,000 Earth years had passed
since they had created one, and they didn’t remember exactly how to do it—but they thought they did. So they built the
buildings and began the experiment. That experiment is directly tied to a chain of Mer-Ka-Bas that began with the Mars
experiments a little less than a million years before. Later, one was done here on Earth in 1913, another one in 1943
(called the Philadelphia Experiment), another one in 1983 (called the Montauk Experiment), and another one that, I
believe, they’re attempting to do this year (1993) near Bimini Island. These dates are windows of time that open up and
are tied to the harmonics of the situation. The experiments must be timed to these windows in order to succeed.
If the Martians had succeeded in setting up a synthetic harmonic Mer-Ka-Ba, they would have had absolute control of the planet, if that was their intention. They would have been able to make anybody on the planet do anything they wanted, though eventually it would have meant their own demise. No higher-order being would place this kind of control on another if they truly understood the Reality.

Failure of the Martian Mer-Ka-Ba Attempt
The Martians built the buildings in Atlantis, set up the whole experiment, then threw their switch to begin the energy
flow. Almost immediately they lost control of the experiment, like falling through space and time. The degree of destruc-
tion was more horrible and sinful than I care to describe. In this Reality, you can hardly make a greater error than to create
an out-of-control synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba. What the experiment did was begin to rip open the lower-dimensional levels of the

Earth—not the higher ones, but the lower ones. To give an analogy, the human body has membranes between different parts, such as in the heart, the stomach, the liver, the eyes and so on. If you took a knife and slit open your stomach, that’s would be like ripping open the dimensional levels of the Earth. Various aspects are separated from other aspects of spirit by these dimensional membranes, and they’re not meant to mix. You’re not supposed to have blood in your stomach, but in your arteries. The purpose of a blood cell is different from that of a stomach cell.
These Martians did something that almost killed the Earth. The environmental disaster we are experiencing today is nothing in comparison, though the problems we are having are a direct result of what we did long ago. With the right understanding and enough love, the environment could be repaired in a single day. But had this Martian experiment continued, it would have destroyed the Earth forever. We would never have been able to use the Earth as a seed base again.
The Martians made a very, very serious mistake. This out-of-control Mer-Ka-Ba field, first of all, released a huge number of lower-dimensional spirits into the Earth’s higher-dimensional planes. These spirits were forced into a world they did not understand or know, and were in total fear. They had to live—they had to have bodies—so they went right into people, hundreds of them into each person in Atlantis. The Atlanteans could not stop them from entering their bodies. Finally, almost every person in the world was totally possessed by these beings from another dimension. These spirits were really Earthlings like us, but very different, not coming from this dimensional level. It was a total catastrophe— the biggest catastrophe the Earth has probably ever seen.
A Disruptive Heritage: The Bermuda Triangle
The Martians’ attempt to control the world took place near one of the Atlantean islands in the area we now call the
Bermuda Triangle. There’s an actual building sitting on the ocean floor down there that contains three rotating star-
tetrahedral electromagnetic fields superimposed on each other, creating a huge synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba that stretches out
over the ocean and into deep space. This Mer-Ka-Ba is completely out of control. It’s called the Bermuda Triangle
because the apex of one of the tetrahedrons—the stationary one—is sticking up out of the water there. The other two
fields, are counterrotating—and the faster-rotating field sometimes moves clockwise, which is a very dangerous situa-
tion. (When we say clockwise, we mean the source of the field, not the field itself. The field itself would appear to be
rotating counterclockwise.) You’ll understand this when you learn more about the Mer-Ka-Ba. When the faster field
rotates counterdocfewise (from its source), everything’s okay; but when the faster one moves clockwise (from its source),
that’s when time and space distortions happen. Many of the airplanes and ships that have disappeared in the Bermuda
Triangle have literally gone into other dimensional levels because of the out-of-control field there.
A primary cause of much of the distortion in the world—the distortion between humans such as wars, marital prob-
lems, emotional disturbances etc.—is that imbalanced field. That field is not only causing distortions on Earth, it’s causing
distortions way, way, way out in remote areas of space because of the way Reality is constructed. That’s one of the
reasons why this race of beings called the Grays, and other ET beings we’ll talk about at the appropriate time, are trying
to correct what happened here long ago. This is a big problem that extends way beyond Earth. What they did bac k0in

Atlantis was against all galactic law. It was illegal, but they did it anyway. It will be solved, but not until the year 2012. There’s not much the ETs can do in the meantime, but they’ll probably keep trying. Eventually they’ll succeed.

The Solution: A Christ Consciousness Grid

Ascended Masters Assist the Earth
At the time of the synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba failure, there were about 1600 ascended masters on Earth, and they did everything they could to try to heal the situation. They tried to seal the dimensional levels and get as many of these spirits as they could out of people and back into their own worlds. They did everything on every level they could. They eventually got most of the spirits out and healed about 90 to 95 percent or more of the situation, but people still found many of these unusual beings living in their bodies.
The situation at that time began to deteriorate extremely rapidly. All the systems on Atlantis—financial, social and all the concepts of how life ought to be—degenerated and collapsed. The continent of Atlantis and all its people became sick. They started getting weird diseases. The entire continent went into a state of survival just trying to live through each day. The situation grew continually worse. For a long period of time it was hell on Earth, horrible. If it had not been slowed down by the ascended masters, it would truly have been the end of this world.
The ascended masters (the highest levels of our consciousness at that time) didn’t know what to do to help bring us back into a state of grace. I mean they really didn’t know what to do. They were children compared to the events that had been forced upon them, and they had no idea how to handle it. So they prayed. They called in higher levels of consciousness. They called in everybody who could hear their plea, including the great Galactic Command. They prayed and prayed. So the problem was reviewed on many high levels of life.
Similar kinds of events have happened before on other planets; this wasn’t the first time. So before it actually happened, our ascended masters and galactic friends knew that we were going to fall out of grace, out of the high level of awareness we were experiencing at the time. They knew that we were going to fall way down the spectrum of life. Their concern was to figure out some way to get us back up on track after the fall, and they knew it had to be done quickly. They were looking for a solution that would heal the whole Earth, both the dark and the light. They weren’t concerned with a solution where only the Martians would be healed, or only the Lemurians or only part of the Earth. They were looking for a situation that would heal the whole Earth and all of its inhabitants.
Higher levels of consciousness don’t go along with this “us and them” point of view. There’s only one consciousness
moving through all life, and they were trying to get everybody to come back into a state of love and respect for each other.

They knew that the only way they could do it was to get us back into Christ

consciousness, a level ofbeingness where we can see the unity, and they knew
we would proceed from there with love and compassion. They knew that if we
were going to get back on track, we would have to be in Christ consciousness
as a planet by the end of the 13,000-year cycle—which is now. If we were not in
Christ consciousness by then, we wouldn’t make it at all. We would destroy
ourselves. Although spirit is eternal, life interruptions can be temporally lost.
The only problem was that we couldn’t get back to Christ consciousness by
ourselves, at least in a short time. Once we had fallen to this level it would be a
very, very long time before we would be able to come back up naturally. So the
problem was really one of time. We were part of a greater consciousness that

Note: For those of you who believe that
we will be out of this dimension before 2012,
you are probably right. The correction to
this Atlantean field, even though the Earth
will probably be in at least the fourth di-
mension by then, will be completed in that
third-dimensional year, according to Thoth.

loved us, and out of love it wished to assist us back into conscious immortality as soon as possible. It would be much like
having a child who hit his head real hard, resulting in a concussion. You would want him to return to consciousness
It was finally decided to try a kind of standard operating procedure that usually works in these situations, though not always. In other words, it was an experiment. Earth’s people were about to be subjects of a galactic experimental project in the hope of helping us. We would experiment on ourselves. It wasn’t done by extraterrestrials or anything like that; they simply showed us how to do it. We were given instructions on how to proceed with this experiment, and we actually carried it out. . . successfully.
What about the Sirians? Our helpers honestly believed that we would make it, though they knew it would be close. In fact, they wouldn’t have gotten permission from the Galactic Command to do the experiment if they hadn’t honestly believed we would make it. You can’t lie to the Galactic Command.
A Planetary Grid
At this point, so that you’ll understand the procedure they decided on, I need to talk about grids. A planetary grid is an etheric crystalline structure that envelops the planet and holds the consciousness of any one species of life. Yes, it does have an electromagnetic component associated with the third dimension, but it also has an appropriate higher-dimen-
sional component for each dimension. Science will eventually discover that there’s a grid for every single species in the world. There were originally 30 million grids around the Earth, but now there are about 13 to 15 million, and they’re decreasing rapidly. If there are just two bugs on the planet, and they’re just sitting somewhere in Iowa, they have a grid that stretches around the entire planet, or they couldn’t exist. It’s just the nature of the game.


Each of these grids has its own geometry and is unique; there’s not another one like it. Just as a species’ body is unique, its point of view of interpreting the Reality is also unique. The Christ consciousness grid holds the Christ consciousness for the planet, and if that grid isn’t there, we can’t reach Christ consciousness. This grid was there during Atlantean times, though we were very young, and it was beginning to function at certain times during the precession of the equinoxes. They knew it would be placed into a passive state by the Martians’ actions, so they decided to synthetically activate the Christ consciousness grid around the Earth. It would be a living grid, but it would be synthetically made—like creating a synthetic crystal from a living cell of a live crystal. Then at the right time, hopefully before we killed ourselves off, the new grid would be complete, and we could ascend to our previous level once again. One example of the effect of a grid is shown in the hundredth monkey theory.
The Hundredth-Monkey Concept
You have probably read the book, The Hundredth Monkey by Ken Keyes, Jr., or perhaps the earlier book ofLyall
Watson, Lifetide: The Biology of the Unconscious, who describe a 30-year scientific research project on the Japanese
monkey, Macaco fuscata. The island ofKoshima, Japan, has a wild colony and the scientists were providing them with
sweet potatoes dropped in the sand. The monkeys liked the sweet potatoes, but not the sand and dirt. An eighteen-
month-old female they named Imo found she could solve the problem by washing the potatoes. She taught this trick to
her mother. Her playmates also learned this new way, and they taught their mothers, too. Soon all the young monkeys
washed their sweet potatoes, but only the adults who imitated their children learned
this behavior. The scientists recorded these events between the years 1952 and
Then suddenly, in the autumn of 1958, the few monkeys doing this on the
island ofKoshima reached a critical mass, which Dr. Watson arbitrarily placed at
100, and bingo!—almost every monkey on the island started washing its pota-
toes without any further influence. If it had happened on only that one island, they
probably would have figured there was some form of communication and looked
for it. But simultaneously the monkeys on the surrounding islands also started
washing their potatoes. Even on the mainland of Japan in Takasakiyama the
monkeys were washing their potatoes. There was no possible way these mon-
keys could have communicated by any way we know. It was the first time that
scientists had ever observed anything like this. They postulated that there must
have been some kind of morphogenetic structure or field that stretched across
these islands through which the monkeys were able to communicate.


The Hundredth Human
Many people thought a lot about the hundredth monkey phenomenon. Then a few years later a scientific team from Australia and Britain wondered if human beings possessed a grid similar to the monkeys. They did an experiment. They made a photograph that had hundreds of human faces in it, little ones and big ones, faces in the eyes. Everything was made up of these faces, but when you first looked at it, you could see only about six or seven. It took training to see the other ones. Usually someone had to first point out where they were.
These people took their picture to Australia and conducted a study there. They selected a certain number of people from a spectrum of the population, then showed each of them the picture, giving them a certain length of time to look at it. They held the photograph up to someone and said, “How many faces do you see in this photo?” During the time the subjects were given, they would generally come up with six, seven, eight, nine or maybe ten faces. Few people saw more. When they had gotten a few hundred people as their basic sampling and recorded accurately what had been observed, some of the researchers went to England—on the other side of the planet—and showed the picture on a closed-cable BBC television station that broadcasts only to England. They carefully showed where all the faces were, every single face. Then a few minutes later other researchers repeated the original experiment with new subjects in Australia. Suddenly people could easily see most of the faces.
From that moment, they knew for certain that there was something about humans that had not been known. Now, the Aborigines in Australia had known about this “unknown” part of us for a long time. They knew that there was an energy field connecting people. Even in our society, we’ve observed that somebody on one side of the planet would invent something very complex at the same moment that someone on the other side of the Earth invented the same thing, with the same principles and ideas. Each inventor would say, “You stole it from me. It was mine. I did it first.” This has happened many, many times, stretching back for a long time. So after this Australian experiment, they began to realize that something very definitely connects us all.

The Government’s Discovery of the Grid and the Race for Control
As far back as the early 1960s, the American and Russian governments had discovered these electromagnetic fields, or grids, that stretched around the world. Human grids—yes, there are more than one—are high above the Earth, about 60 miles or more.
Remember, I told you about the five levels of consciousness on Earth that correspond to different numbers of genes
and different heights? Well, there are only three levels of consciousness that Earth is actually experiencing right now.
Two others are way beyond us at this time. The first level is primal, the second level is our present consciousness, and
the third level is the Christ or unity consciousness, the one we’re about to enter. After the Fall, about 13,000 years ago,
there were only two active human grids around the Earth, the first and the second levels. The Aborigines in Australia were

on the first level, for example, and we, the mutants, were on the second level. (That’s what they call us—mutants—
because we mutated to where we are now.) Science has done very little research on the Australian Aborigines, so our
countries haven’t become aware of their grid. But the governments did a lot of research on us, and they discovered
exactly what our grid looks like: It’s based on triangles and squares. It’s a very male grid that stretches around the whole
planet. Now, we have a third grid up there, which we will call the unity-consciousness grid, or simply “the next step.” It’s
been there, completed, since February 4, 1989. Without that grid, it would be all over for us, folks. But it is there. The
governments became originally aware of our second-level grid maybe as far back as the 1940s. I realize that this state-
ment is in contradiction to what was said above. But nevertheless I believe that the grid was discovered even before the
hundredth monkey theory came out. Because of World War II, the governments were beginning to place military bases
all over the world in little out-of-the-way places, on obscure islands like Guam. Why did they select these particular places
for their bases? It probably wasn’t for the reasons they said. When you lay out the grid and the military bases all over the
world, especially those of Russia and the United States, well, son-of-a-gun, the bases are almost always located right on
the nodal points of the grid—exactly over the top or on little spirals that come off of the nodal points. It could not possibly
have been a coincidence that they just happened to spread out their empire of military bases in these precise places.
They were trying to take control of this grid, because if they could control it, they knew they could control what we think
and feel. A subtle war was going on between these two governments. However, the war changed its nature considerably
in 1970, though I’ll have to explain that later. Of course, behind both the United States and Russia was the secret
government, which controlled the outer appearance and timing of this conflict.

How the Grid Was Constructed, and Where
Now that we have the necessary background, we can continue with the drama in Atlantis. The project to rebuild the grid was begun by three men: Thoth, a being named Ra and a being named Araragat. These men flew to a place in what is now Egypt, to the area now called the Giza plateau. At that time it was not a desert, but a tropical rain forest, and it was called the Land of Khem, which means the land of the hairy barbarians. The three men went to that particular place because the axis of the old unity-consciousness grid extended out of the Earth from that point. They were going to rebuild a new grid on the old axis, according to instructions given by higher consciousness.
They had to wait until the right moment—until the precession of the equinoxes passed the low ebb in consciousness—before they could act, and this low ebb was still far into their future. After that they would have a little less than half a cycle, about 12,900 years or so, to complete everything by the end of the twentieth century. We couldn’t go any longer than this or we would destroy ourselves and our planet.
First they had to complete the grid on the higher dimensions, then they had to physically build the temples in this dimension before the new unity grid would manifest. Once manifested and balanced, they were to help us begin to consciously move into the higher worlds of being and begin anew our path home to God.

So Thoth and friends went to the very spot where the unity-consciousness vortex exited the Earth. This point was about a mile away from where the Great Pyramid sits in the desert today, but then it was out in the middle of nowhere, in the middle of a rain forest. Centered right over the axis of this vortex on the Earth, they created a hole extending approximately one mile into the Earth, lining it with bricks. It took only a few minutes or so, because they were sixthdimensional beings, and whatever they thought always happened. It was that simple.
Once the hole aligned with the unity axis was created, they mapped the ten Golden Mean spirals that emerged from the hole and located where they moved above the Earth. They used the hole as the axis, starting far down, and mapped the spirals of energy as they moved up out of the hole and extended into space. One of the spirals exited the Earth not far from the present Great Pyramid. Once they found it, they built a little stone building in front of the hole; that building is the key to the entire Giza complex. Then they built the Great Pyramid.
According to Thoth, the Great Pyramid was built by himself, not Cheops. Thoth says that it was completed about 200 years prior to the shifting of the axis. The apex of the Great Pyramid, if the capstone were in place, sat exactly on the curve of the spiral. They lined up the center of the hole with the south face of the stone building and the north face of the Great Pyramid. It has amazed surveyors who have looked at this. Though these structures are a mile away from each other, the south face of the stone building and the north face of the Great Pyramid are in perfect alignment. They do not believe that we could do it any better today even with our modern technology.
Later the other two pyramids were also built directly on that spiral. In fact, that’s how the hole was discovered,
through aerial photography. They noticed that the three pyramids were laid out on a logarithmic spiral. Then they traced
the spiral back to its source and went to that spot, and there was the hole and the stone building. That discovery was
made, I believe, in the early 1980s. It was recorded in the McCollum survey that was completed in 1984 by Rocky
I’ve seen the axis hole and the building with my own eyes. I consider it to be the most important place in all of Egypt and so does the Edgar Cayce A.R.E. There’s also another hole about a city block away from the first spiral, and this spiral starts out a little differently, but then slowly, asymptotically, superimposes itself over the first spiral. To be able to build around this hole in this spiral pattern, the planners had to have a very sophisticated understanding of life. (I’ll explain this understanding later also.) So these two completed spirals defined the axis of what would eventually become the unityconsciousness grid around the Earth.
Sacred Sites
After starting the new grid over the existing collapsed grid and putting one pyramid on the line of the spiral, Thoth, Ra
and Araragat mapped where these two energy lines curved and crossed each other in over 83,000 places on the surface
of the Earth. Fourth-dimensionally, one dimension higher than this one, they constructed an entire network of buildings
and structures over the whole planet, placing them on the nodes of this energy matrix. All of these structures were laid out

with the proportions of either the Golden Mean or Fibonacci spirals, and all were mathematically referred back to that single point in Egypt now called the Solar Cross.
The location of the sacred sites of the world are no accident. It was a single consciousness that created every single
one of them—from Machu Picchu to Stonehenge to Zaghouan—you name it, to anywhere. Almost all of them (with a few
exceptions) were created by a single awareness. We’re becoming more aware of this now. Richard Hoagland’s work
brings this forth, though he wasn’t the first one. They show how one sacred site is extrapolated from another one, then
another and still another. These sites go beyond time, in that they were all built at different times, and they go beyond any
particular culture or geographical location. They were obviously done by one consciousness who coordinated the whole
enterprise. Eventually researchers will see that this spot in Egypt is the point from which all the other sacred sites were
This Egyptian area is the north pole of the unity-consciousness grid. On the other side of the planet, out in the South
Pacific in the Tahitian Islands, is a little island called Moorea, where the south pole of the grid is located. For those of you
who have been on top of Wayna Picchu for a birds-eye view, Machu Picchu, at about 9000 feet in the Peruvian moun-
tains, seems to be surrounded in a perfect circle by mountains. It’s like a female circle surrounding a phallus rising in the
middle. Well, the island of Moorea is similar to this, only it’s shaped like a heart. Each house on Moorea has a heart with
the house number on it. The phallic Moorean mountain in the center of the heart is much bigger than Wayna Picchu in
Peru, but you will still see the same ring of mountains surrounding this earthen pole. This is the precise south pole of the
entire unity-consciousness grid. If you go straight through the Earth at Moorea, you come out in Egypt. It’s off only an
ever so tiny bit—there’s a very slight curve, which is natural. The Moorean pole is negative, or female, and the Egyptian
pole is positive, or male. All the sacred sites are connected to the Egyptian pole, and they’re all interlinked through the
central axis leading to Moorea. It’s a torus, of course.
The Pyramid’s Landing Platform and the Ship beneath the Sphinx
This is the Great Pyramid [Fig. 4-7]. It has a so-called “missing capstone,” and there have been all kinds of speculations about it. According to Thoth, the actual missing capstone is 51/2 inches high and solid gold; it is a holographic image of the entire pyramid. In other words, it has all the little rooms in it and everything in proportion, and it’s sitting in the Hall of Records. The other two pyramids go up to a sharp point; only the Great Pyramid has a flat surface on top. That missing piece is not little—it’s about 24 feet square at the base. If you get on top, it’s a huge platform. This flat area is actually a landing platform for a very special airship that exists on Earth.
The Sphinx is not far away from the Great Pyramid. According to The Emerald Tablets and Thoth, the Sphinx is
much, much older than the 10- to 15,000 years estimated by John Anthony West. One factor that many present researchers
have neglected to consider is that the Sphinx has been under sand during most of its recent existence. In fact, when Napoleon
went to see the Sphinx, he didn’t even know it was there because all he saw was its head. It was completely buried, and it has

been buried for most of the last few hundred years at least. Taking that factor into consideration, which could be a major one, the wear caused by rain and wind would have taken a lot longer than they’re presently figuring.
According to Thoth, the Sphinx goes back at least five and a half million years.
I guess eventually that will be brought forth, because he hasn’t been wrong about
anything yet. Even John Anthony West secretly suspects that it is a great deal older
than 10- to 15,000 years. He wasn’t concerned with making speculations into the
millions of years; he just wanted to get it well past the 6000-year mark, because that
will crack our previously accepted Earth history. He and his team have now done
that, and later, I believe, they’ll try to push the date back further as they introduce
more evidence.
According to Thoth, approximately one mile under the Sphinx there is a round
room with a flat floor and a flat ceiling. Inside this room is the oldest synthetic object
in the world—older than any other consciously assembled matter on Earth. Accord-
ing to Thoth, though even he can’t prove it, this object goes back 500 million years
when “that which led to human life” began. The object is about two city blocks in
size; it’s round like a disk and has a flat bottom and top. It’s unusual in that its skin is
only three to five atoms thick. Its top and bottom surfaces have a certain pattern
that’s shown in Figure 4-8.
The pattern itself is five atoms thick; everywhere else it’s only three at-
oms thick. And it’s transparent—you can see right through it—almost like it’s
not there. This is a ship, but it has no motors or visible form of power. Even
though Doreal’s interpretation of The Emerald Tablets states that this ship
had atomic motors in it, according to Thoth it does not. Doreal translated
The Emerald Tablets in the Yucatan in 1925 and could not understand the
description of how the ship was powered. The idea of atomic motors was the
farthest-out idea he could think of for a power source. But it is actually pro-
pelled by thoughts and feelings, and is designed to connect with and extend
your own living Mer-Ka-Ba. This ship is connected directly to the spirit of the
Earth, and in The Emerald Tablets it’s called a warship. It was the protector
for the Earth.


The Vulnerability of
This Period and the
Appearance of the
Every single time we
reach that vulnerable
point in the precession
of the equinoxes when
our poles make these
little shifts, extraterrestri-
als have tried to take
over the planet, accord-
ing to The Emerald Tab-
lets. This has been go-
Fig. 4-7. The Great Pyramid. ing on for millions and
millions of years, and it’s
still going on . When I
read that in the Tablets, I didn’t yet know about the Grays or any of these beings, and I thought, “Someone coming from somewhere else to take over the Earth? Naw, this is silly!” But even today, this same thing’s going on. It never stops, it just keeps on. It’s called, simply, the battle of the dark and the light.
Every single time a takeover seems imminent, there has always been one very pure person who figures out how to get into the next level of consciousness, then finds the ship and raises it into the air. The Earth and the Sun connect within that person and give him or her great power, then whatever that person thinks and feels will happen. That’s how this airship is a warship: Whatever races are trying to take over Earth, this person just thinks them away—thinks up a situation that forces them to leave. This keeps our evolutionary process going without any kind of outside interference or influence. At least that’s what is supposed to happen.
By now we have definitely been tampered with. That pure person has appeared,
and that event has already happened here on Earth. This is why the Grays are leaving.
The problems they’re having is because of one single woman—one 23-year-old fe-
Fig. 4-8. The pattern on the disk beneath the Sphinx.

process up to the new grid and connected with it, connected with the Earth, found the ship and raised it into the air. First she made some basic connections that had to be done with crystals on the Earth, then performed the programming that had to be recalculated. The very next thing she did was to think that the Grays and others related to this attempted takeover of Earth were going to become sick if they remained here, and there would be no cure.
Within one month, all the Grays started getting sick, and the whole process she envisioned began to happen. The
Grays have been forced to leave the Earth now. Their bases have been abandoned, and they have been forced to alter
their plans. The presence of this entire army of beings from space has now been reduced to almost nothing, all because
of one small but holy woman. It’s amazing [chuckles]. We guys know what that’s like—I’ve been reduced to nothing lots
of times by my wife.
Awaiting the Atlantean Catastrophe
Thoth and his partners finished the complex in Egypt to help rebuild the grid. Then they abandoned it in the middle of the rain forest and went back to Atlantis to prepare. It sat alone for 200 years, because they knew that at that critical point in the precession of the equinoxes, the poles would shift. They knew that Atlantis would sink, so they waited.
One day it finally happened. The catastrophe actually took only one night. Science has proven that when poles shift,
it takes about 20 hours. It happens just like that [snaps fingers]. You wake up one normal day, and that evening it’s a
totally different world. The whole process is about three and a half days long, but the pole shift happens in about 20
hours. We’re all going to experience this enormous change when we see big chunks of the United States start to drop off
into the water—then you’ll know it’s for sure. There are other early signs that will tip you off that the change is about to
happen. When enough information has been given, I’ll remind you of what you already hold in your memories.
When they saw the very first signs of the shift coming on, Thoth, Ra and Araragat returned to the Sphinx and raised the warship into the sky. All they did was raise the vibration of the molecules only one overtone higher than the Earth exists on. This allowed them and the ship to pass right through the Earth into the sky. Then they moved to Atlantis, lowered the ship to the surface, and picked up the people of the Naacal Mystery School, which included the original immortals from Lemuria as well as those who became enlightened during the time of Atlantis (by that time about another 600 people had ascended). So the original thousand from Lemuria and the 600 from Atlantis had increased the number of ascended masters to about 1600, the only occupants of the ancient airship.
Now, the people on this ship were not only passengers, they were creating a living group Mer-Ka-Ba that surrounded the
ship with a very large field in the shape of a flying saucer—the same shape that’s around the galaxy and around your body
when your Mer-Ka-Ba is spinning. They had a very powerful protective field around themselves as they headed for Khem, soon
to be the new Egypt. Thoth said that they had risen about a quarter mile off the planet with the members of the mystery school
on board when they watched the island of Udal sink. This was the last piece of Atlantis to disappear into the water, with the
exception of a few small islands. Then they flew the ship to Egypt and landed it on top of the Great Pyramid. From the side it

looked like the middle drawing in Figure 4-9.
If you were to extend the Great Pyramid up to where the
capstone would naturally terminate, you would find that the
ship and the pyramid were built for each other. If you were
to look at this from the top, it would look like the right-hand
view in the figure. The circle is the ship and the square is the
Great Pyramid. The perimeter of the Great Pyramid and the

circumference of the ship are the same. It’s debatable if that’s
possible or not, but they can get very, very close. Whenever
that mathematical relationship happens, life appears. It’s the

Fig. 4-9. Warship atop the Great Pyramid.

basic relationship of life throughout the universe. (We’ll describe this geometrically soon.) If the ascended masters had not had spinning Mer-Ka-Ba fields around them, they wouldn’t be here today (and probably neither would we), because their Mer-Ka-
Bas protected them from all that happened next.
After they landed on the pyramid, the poles began to shift and the human consciousness of the Earth began to
plummet. Simultaneously, the electromagnetic and magnetic fields of the Earth collapsed, and all life on this planet went
into the Great Void, the three and a half days of absolute blackness described by many cultures around the world.

The Three and a Half Days of the Void
The Emerald Tablets say that every single time we go around the precession of the equinoxes and our poles go through these changes, we go through a void space for about three and a half days. The Mayas described the Void in the Troano document. At one point in the story, three and a half stones are painted black. This refers to the time when we go into what we now call the electromagnetic null zone. As the poles shift, a phenomenon
takes place (we’ll go into great detail about this later) where for about three and a half days we’re in darkness (it could actually be anywhere from two or two and a half days to a little over four days). The last time, it was evidently three and a half days. It’s more than just blackness; it’s nothing, it’s void. And, by the way, when you are in the Void, you will realize that you and God are one, that there is no difference at all. We’ll talk about the Void again at the right moment.
Memory, Magnetic Fields and Mer-Ka-Bas
If the people on the warship hadn’t been protected by the Mer-Ka-Ba during that change, they would have com-
pletely lost their memories. You see, our memory is held together primarily by a magnetic field that exists around the
brain—inside the skull and around the head. That field is further connected to every cell in the brain by individualized
magnetic fields within each cell. Science first found the internal magnetic particles within each cell and then found the
larger outer field. This was the first new find in human physiology in the last 300 years. Memory is dependent on a steady,

living magnetic field, very much like a computer. Its connection to the Earth’s magnetic field is not understood by science at this time. If you don’t have a means of protecting your memory, it will be erased, gone. It’ll be like unplugging a computer in the middle of a file. It’s just gone. That’s exactly what happened to the Atlanteans and others who survived the catastrophe but who didn’t have spinning Mer-Ka-Bas. Those very sophisticated people, who were more advanced than you and I, suddenly found themselves in a situation where they didn’t know anything. They had high-tech bodies and high-tech minds, but it was like having a great PC sitting on the table with no software, nothing there.
So the population that survived, and there were a few, had to start all over again. They had to begin at square one to figure out how to stay warm, how to make fire and so on. This loss of memory was the result of their forgetting how to breathe, forgetting their Mer-Ka-Bas, forgetting everything—falling down through the dimensions, going into a totally unprotected state and ending up in this very dense world—having to eat food again, doing all kinds of things that hadn’t been part of our experience for a very long time. They were slammed into a very dense aspect of the planet and had to learn to survive all over again. This was all a result of the synthetic Mer-Ka-Ba experiment that had taken place on Atlantis.
Without that small group of ascended masters, we would not have survived at all—we definitely would all have left
human experience. The whole Earth experiment would have been over forever. But they kept the field alive, just barely,
while everything else crashed around them. Besides the ascended masters, there were also two other groups on Earth
who had Mer-Ka-Ba fields intact at the time. The Nefilim and the Sirians, our mother and father, kept their fields alive. I
don’t know where the Nefilim retreated to within this planet’s dimensional worlds, but the Sirians remained in the Halls of
Amend, inside the inner earth. Both of these groups are still here on the planet, hidden within the dimensional worlds.
What the Thoth Group Did after Light Returned
After the three and a half days of darkness, the Earth reappeared, light reappeared, the fields stabilized themselves, and we were down in this third-dimensional world where we are now. Everything was new and different—everything. It had totally changed experientially. When we consider the landmass of Atlantis, the Atlanteans had really been on a much higher level of interpreting that landmass. They didn’t experience it like we do. It was experienced in a totally different way that’s pretty hard to explain from our third-dimensional point of view.
After they landed on top of the Great Pyramid, Ra and about a third of the people from the ship went down through a tunnel that goes into a room at the two-thirds level, which will someday be discovered. (They’ve discovered four new rooms in the Great Pyramid in only the last few years.) When this room is discovered, they’ll find that it’s made with red, black and white stones, which were the primary architectural colors of Atlantis. This is what Thoth told me to say. From this room is a channel they used to descend to a city or a temple far below the pyramid, which Thoth and friends built when they built the pyramid. It was designed to hold approximately 10,000 people because they knew a large number would ascend over the next 13,000 years, until the Day of Purification.
After the fields stabilized and a third of the people followed Ra into the room made of red, black and white stones,
from there they entered the underground city and began the root of our present civilization. Another part of the root was
being formed at the same time in Sumer (another story). At the same moment in time, the remaining 1067 or so as-
cended masters lifted the warship off the Great Pyramid and flew to the place now called Lake Titicaca, where they

landed on the Island of the Sun (in Bolivia). Thoth got off there, along with about a third of the people. Then they took off
again and flew to the Himalayan mountains, where Araragat got off with the remaining third of the people. Seven people,
however, remained with the ship, flew it back to the Sphinx and lowered it into that room, where it has remained for the
last 13,000 years—until recently when the young woman from Peru raised it again into the open blue skies of Mother
Earth’s atmosphere.

Sacred Sites on the Grid
Egypt became the male component of the grid. That is where the male structures were laid out. There’s hardly any femaleness there compared to female areas of the world. Of course, the polarity to maleness does exist— Isis is that counterpart—but the overall energy flow is male. South America, especially Peru, Central America and also parts of Mexico became the female component of the grid. However, ultimately the entire female aspect of the grid became centered at the complex in Uxmal, in the Yucatan, where many survivors from Atlantis had found refuge.
Starting at Uxmal, seven temples are laid out in a spiral, probably a Fibonacci spiral, and they are the seven primary temples of the female component of the grid. These are chakra centers, just like the chakra centers that are laid out down the length of the Nile. These feminine centers begin with Uxmal, then go to Labna, then to Kabah, then over to Chichen Itza, then over to Tulum near the ocean, then way down near Belize to Kohunlich, curving back inland to Palenque. Those seven places created the primary spiral of the feminine aspect of the grid being created for our new Christ consciousness, which we are only now able to access.
From Palenque the feminine aspect of the grid splits north and south. Here we see another polarization of the energy. The feminine component of the female spiral of the grid heads south and jumps over to Tikal in Guatemala, and that begins a new octave. When we relate it to music, the seventh site bridges to the eighth note, or the beginning of the next octave of the next spiral. And the spiral keeps going south through the feminine component of the grid. Eventually it moves through places like Machu Picchu and Sacsayhuaman near Cuzco, Peru. One of the main spirals ends in a place called Chavin, in Peru, which was the primary religious center of the Incan empire. From there it goes to Lake Titicaca to a place about a half a mile off the Island of the Sun in Bolivia. Then it makes a 90-degree turn and heads out toward Easter Island and finally to Moorea, where it anchors into the Earth.
Heading north from Palenque is the male component of the female aspect of the grid. It goes through the Aztec ruins
and up through the American Indian pyramids. (The American Indians made physical pyramids, some remains of which
can be seen in and around Albuquerque, New Mexico.) Then the spiral continues to Blue Lake near Taos, New Mexico,
which is the counterpart of Lake Titicaca. This is one of the most important areas in the United States, protected for a long time
by the Taos Indians. Again, there’s a 90-degree turn at Blue Lake. From there the spiral heads out across the mountains, going
through Ute Mountain (on the New Mexico side of the Colorado border) and through many mountains and structures that have
been built.

In conjunction with the sacred sites, the creators also used mountains because of their vortex energy. Finally, before the spiral leaves the coast of California, it passes through Lake Tahoe, Donner Lake and Pyramid Lake. From there it goes through underwater mountain complexes until it reaches the Hawaiian Islands, where Haleakala Crater is one of the primary components, then heads south again. It goes through the Hawaiian Island chain that connects for thousands of miles all the way back to Moorea.
So it’s a huge open circle that comes around the Earth, starting at Uxmal and connecting at the south pole of the Christ grid. The feminine component of the grid is a massive circle of complexes. Understand that in between each of the major sites mentioned above are literally hundreds of smaller sites—churches and temples of many religions, sacred sites of nature such as mountain peaks and ranges, lakes, canyons and so on. If you could see the greater plan, you would see how they form perfect spirals, first moving clockwise, then moving counterclockwise until they reach their destination, Moorea, in the South Pacific.
The pyramids built in the Himalayan mountains were primarily crystalline in
nature, meaning they were constructed by using third-dimensional crystals at the
corners, aimed to form a pyramid. They built physical pyramids there, too—lots of
them. Most of them are not known, though some are. The largest known pyramid in
the world so far is in the western mountains of Tibet. It’s a solid-white pyramid that’s
in almost perfect condition, with a huge, solid-crystal capstone. At least two teams of
scientists have been there, and it has also been photographed from the air. It’s
visible only three weeks out of the year when its crystal capstone peers out of the
deep snow to view a valley long deserted from human endeavor.
I talked with the leader of the team that went into this pyramid. He said it looks
like a brand-new pyramid and that there’s nothing written on the walls. It’s white,
smooth and hard, like marble. When they entered it, they went down a long tunnel,
where they found a large room in the center. There’s no writing anywhere, no de-
signs, no nothing—except that in the middle, high up on a wall, there is one inscrip-
tion—the Flower of Life! That’s it. If you want to say everything, all you have to do is
put that on a wall. That says it all. By the end of this book you’ll understand why.
All the sacred sites on Earth, with a few exceptions, were planned on a
fourth-dimensional level by higher consciousness, and by now most have third-

dimensional counterparts connected to them—in other words, real buildings on


real sites. However, there are still some very important sites that have only fourth-dimensional structures. Those fourthdimensional pyramids primarily represent the neutral or child energy of the Christ grid. Altogether there are three aspects of the Christ grid that surround the Earth—Mother, Father and Child. The Father is in Egypt, the Mother is in PeruYucatan-South Pacific and the Child is in Tibet.
The Five Levels of Human Consciousness and Their Chromosomal Differences
According to Thoth, there are five different levels of human consciousness possible here on Earth. These are people who have different DNA, completely different bodies and different ways of perceiving the Reality. Each level of consciousness grows from the last one, until finally on the fifth level humanity learns how to translate into a whole new manner of expressing life, leaving Earth forever.
The primary visual difference between these types is their height. The first-level people are about 4 to 6 feet tall. The second-level people are about 5 to 7 feet tall, where we are at now. Third-level people are about 10 to 16 feet tall, which we are about to translate to. The fourth-level being is about 30 to 35 feet tall, and the last is about 50 to 60 feet. These last two levels are for the distant future.
This may seem strange at first, but do we not begin as a microscopic egg and get larger and larger until we are born? Then we continue to grow taller and taller until we are adults. According to this theory, the human adult is not the end of our growth pattern. We continue through DNA steps until we are 50 to 60 feet tall. Metatron, the Hebrew archangel who is the perfection of what humanity is supposed to become, is 55 feet tall! Remember the giants who lived here on Earth referred to in chapter 6 of Genesis? According to the Sumerian records, they were about 10 to 16 feet tall. When we look at a three-year-old and a ten-year-old, we know that they have different levels of consciousness, and it is primarily by their height that we make this judgment.
According to Thoth, each level of consciousness has different DNA; however, the primary difference is the number of chromosomes. Using this theory, we are now on the second level and have 44+2 chromosomes. An example of the first level is certain aboriginal tribes in Australia where they have 42+2 chromosomes. On the third level, which we are about to move to, people have 46+2 chromosomes. The next two levels have 48+2 and 50 + 2, respectively.
We will discuss this in depth in the second volume of this book and show the sacred geometry around this understanding, which will make it clear.
The Evidence in Egypt for a New Look at History
We’re now going to focus on Egypt because Egypt happens to be where the main mystery school was located and where evidence of the different-sized humans, and levels of consciousness, still remain, though generally unrecognized. Egypt was the area they chose where they would ultimately restore our consciousness, and the primary area where survivors from Atlantis and the ascended masters were in one place. We could discuss the history of those other areas, and we will a little, but the focus for this work will be on the Father, because it is through the Father that the primary information of the Mer-Ka-Ba must be remembered.

Fig. 4-10. Bust of Tiya.

This is an Egyptian statue of Tiya
[Fig. 4-10]. Tiya and her husband Ay
were the first two to create a baby
Fig. 4-11. Abu Simbel. by interdimensionally connecting
through the sacred tantra, which
led to immortality for all three, the father, the mother and the child. You can get a pretty good idea what Lemurians looked
like from looking at her. She and her husband are still alive, and they’re still on the planet today even after tens of thousands of years. They’re two of the oldest beings in the world and two of the most respected of all the ascended masters because of all they’ve done for human consciousness.

Giants in the Land
This is Abu Simbel [Fig. 4-11] in Egypt, which is located at the base of the spine in the chakra system of the masculine aspect of the Christ grid. Notice how very tall these statues are; this was the actual height of these beings! Compare it to the size of the tourists near the bottom right in the photo. If these stone folks were to stand up, they would be in that 60-foot range, which indicates that they were at the fifth level of consciousness.

These beings [Fig. 4-12], on a different wall
at Abu Simbel, would be about 35 feet tall, rep-
resenting the fourth level of consciousness.
They built rooms for these different heights.
This doorway is made for the Venusians—the
Hathor race—who are on the third level of con-
sciousness. I’ll tell you more about the Hathors
These third-level beings [Fig. 4-13] are
about 16 feet tall, indicating they are male, as
the females of this race are about 10 to 12
feet tall. In their section of the building the
rooms are around 20 feet high, with ceilings
and beams in proportion to 10- to 16-foot-tall
beings. Next to that room, through a little door-

Fig. 4-12. Abu Simbel and Hathor doorway.
way (you can’t see it here) that looks like it’s made for
us, is a little room with a much lower ceiling. The Egyp-
tians didn’t make these statues arbitrarily—they never
did anything arbitrarily. There isn’t a single scratch on
a single stone; there is not even one, I believe, that
was done unconsciously. There was a reason and a
purpose for everything. And usually it was created on
many, many different levels. The Emerald Tablets, for
example, are written on one hundred levels of con-
sciousness. Depending on who you are, you’ll under-
stand something utterly and completely different from
other people. If you should go through a consciousness
change, go back and reread The Emerald Tablets
again. You won’t believe it’s the same book, because
Fig. 4-13. Inside abu Simtel; third-level beings. it’ll talk to you in a different way, depending on your

These are Earth beings [Fig. 4-14] passing through the
various levels of consciousness. In this photo you see a huge
55-foot-tall being with a statue our size standing by his leg.
This is the king and queen. Archaeologists don’t know how to
interpret this, so they just say that the kings were more im-
portant than the queens, and that’s why they made her little. But it didn’t have anything to do with that. The statues are
showing the five levels of consciousness. Every king and
pharaoh who ever lived in Egypt had five names, representing
the five levels of consciousness.
Some of the kings and queens were able to translate be-
tween the different levels in order to guide the population into
the spiritual realms. One special example of this still exists. In
Egypt there’s an ancient round house. I didn’t get to see it, Fig. 4-14. King and queen on different levels of consciousness.
but it was described to me by the famous archaeologist,
Ahmed Fayhed, so I know it’s real. This was Ay and Tiya’s house for a long time (though they’re obviously not using it now). This round house has a wall down the middle. You can’t get from one side of the house to the other without going outside, walking around, and coming in the other side. Does this sound like the island of Udal in Atlantis? On one side of the middle wall is a picture of Ay, who looks very Egyptian with his angled skirt, beard and various Egyptian paraphernalia. He appears of normal height. On the other side of the wall Ay’s image is about 15 feet tall. He looks very different, but you can see that his face is the same. He has a huge skull going way back like the higher-level races do (I’ll show you
some soon). These two pictures of Ay show that he could go back and forth between these two different levels of awareness by changing consciousness.
Stair-Step Evolution
According to Melchizedek knowledge, both the Sumerians and the Egyptians emerged onto the surface of the Earth
at almost the same moment, complete, whole and perfect, with their language totally intact, with all their skills and
understanding and knowledge, with almost no evolution prior to that time (at least none that science knows of). They
simply appeared at one moment in history in their most perfect state. The writing that came out at that moment was
extremely sophisticated and clear, and has never been improved on since. After that initial impulse, these cultures
became less and less clear, until finally these advanced civilizations degenerated away. You would think they would get
better and more sophisticated as time advanced, but that’s not what happened. This is scientific fact. No one in conven-

tional archaeology knows how this happened or can even explain how it could have happened. It’s a great mystery.
Egypt and Sumer are placed into a special category called stair-step evolution by archaeologists. They were given
this classification because of how they seemed to gain information and knowledge. What happened was, one day Egypt
got its language, full and complete, then that knowledge leveled off; then a little while later they would know everything
you could possibly imagine about, perhaps, building a certain kind of moat or water system. A little more time would go by,
and then they would suddenly know everything about hydraulics. It would keep going on and on like that. How did the
Egyptians and the Sumerians get this information? How did they suddenly, in one day, know everything? I’ll give you
Thoth’s answer.
First I need to make this clear on the precession drawing, repeated
below [Fig. 4-15]: Point A is where we are now, and point C is when
the fall of Atlantis happened. Point C is also when the poles shifted;
science has determined that’s when it happened. That’s also when
the Great Flood of Noah happened, and the melting of the icecaps
because of all the changes that were occurring on Earth. Point C
is when the destruction occurred. Remember, I mentioned ear-
lier that there were two other points, B and D, when change could
also take place and be assimilated most easily. For a 6000-year
time span, from point C where the destruction happened to point D
where new teachings could be given, the ascended masters had to Fig. 4-15. The journey of the precession.
sit and wait while the Atlanteans, who were now hairy barbarians in
Egypt, slowly returned to the state where they could accept this new, yet ancient, knowledge. These approximately 1600 ascended masters had been living under the Great Pyramid since the Fall, and they had to wait 6000 years before they could start teaching and building the new culture.
The Tat Brotherhood
Thoth’s son Tat remained in Egypt with Ra after the Fall. Later this group became known as the Tat Brotherhood. Even today there’s an external brotherhood in Egypt called the Tat Brotherhood, physical people who are the protectors and keepers of the sacred temples. Hidden behind the current Tat Brotherhood are the ascended masters.
So the immortal aspect of the Tat Brotherhood sat there waiting and waiting, observing and waiting, until the time
when the Egyptians could receive their teachings. When that day finally came, which was the birth of Sumer and Egypt,
the Tat Brotherhood watched until they found either a person or a group of Egyptians who were ready for the ancient
knowledge. Then one, two or three members of the Brotherhood appeared in bodies looking just like the people they
were about to teach. They would go up to the surface, approach the person or group and give them the information

outright. They flat-out said, “Hey, look at this. Did you know that if you did this and this and this, that this is what will happen?” The Egyptians would say, “Wow, look at that!” They would use the knowledge, thus creating a new “step” in their evolution.
Then the men and women from the Brotherhood would go back under the pyramid, the Egyptians who were given
these teachings would give it to the rest of the culture, and the culture would quickly ascend to the next step. The
Egyptians would assimilate that for a while; then the Brotherhood would look for another group that was ready for the next
subject. They’d go to the surface again and say, “Look, here’s everything you want to know about this.” They simply gave
it to them. The ascended masters gave the people this information over a short period of time and their evolution simply
shot up and up in stair steps.
The Parallel Evolution in Sumer
This same evolutionary pattern was also occurring in Sumer. Though the present historical line says that Egypt began in approximately 3300 B.C. and Sumer began 500 years earlier, in about 3800 B.C., I believe they both started at almost the same moment. I think that if historians would get their dates accurate, they’d discover that both Sumer and Egypt started only a few years apart. However, the evolution in Sumer was led by the Nefilim, the mother aspect, and the one in Egypt was led by the Sirians, the father aspect. That’s the primary difference. I think the mother and the father agreed, “Now is the time for our children to remember.” I believe it was a parental decision, and that when researchers look very carefully, they’ll find that both countries started to blossom at the same moment in time, which was tied to the point in the precessional orbit (point D) when it was most likely to be successful.
This is also how the Sumerians knew about the precession of the equinoxes. It takes 2160 years to recognize that there is a precession of the equinoxes, but the reason the Sumerians knew about it was because the Nefilim said, “Do you know there’s a precession of the equinoxes?” Very simple. It’s not a complicated thing. They just explained it all and the people wrote it down. The Sumerians knew about events that went back 450,000 years because they were given the information. They simply wrote it down and applied it.
But after these ancient cultures got all this brilliant information, they degenerated. Why would they degenerate in-
stead of going higher? Because they were in the sleep cycle, the “falling asleep” portion of the precession. They were
falling more and more asleep with each breath, right into the kali yuga, the most asleep moment of the cycle. In the
middle of the kali yuga—2000 years ago—was the time of Jesus, and humans were sound asleep and snoring. People
in the kali yuga who read books and other studies written in the earlier, more-awake period had a difficult time fully
understanding what was being written about. Why? Because they were relatively unconscious. This is why cultures all
over the world, not just in Egypt and Sumer, degenerated until they ceased. Right now we are about to awaken fully and
know the truth of our beingness.


Well-Kept Secrets in Egypt,
Key to a New View of History
This is Saqqara [Fig. 4-16]. According to the linear ar-
chaeological belief, this is where the Egyptian culture began.
This pyramid was the first to be built in Egypt, by their way of
thinking. When it was first created, it was covered with beau-
tiful white stones. In fact, this whole city stretches for miles
and miles and into the Earth hundreds of feet, including build-
ings and complexes under the ground. This would have been
amazing if you could have seen it when it was brand new—
especially since only a short time in history before it was built,
we were supposedly all hairy barbarians. There was a jump
from hairy barbarians to this supersophisticated culture in only
a second of archaeological time.

This is a pyramid [Fig. 4-17] that I think destroys the belief
that Saqqara is where it all began. This pyramid is at least 500
years older than Saqqara. If this is true, the time when the Egyp-
tians emerged on the Earth is identical to the time the Sumerians
emerged— which I believe is exactly what happened. This pyra-
mid is called Lehirit (a phonetic spelling), and it’s one of the few
unguarded pyramids in this category. There are quite a few of
these stepped pyramids, called mastabas. The Egyptians have
taken almost all these pyramids that approach or exceed 6000
years of age and put military bases and huge electrical fences
around them. In some cases they’ve got soldiers on guard with
machine guns. If you try to approach these pyramids, they would
probably try to kill you. They don’t want anyone to know about
these pyramids, and they especially don’t want you to examine
them. If you try to talk to an Egyptian about them or ask to see
them, they play it down.
I went through this. They would say, “Aw, it’s not impor-
tant. They’re just made out of little adobe bricks by primitive
people. They’re nothing, nothing to them.” And I’d say, “Well,

Fig. 4-16. The pyramid at Saqqara.

Fig. 4-17. The pyramid that destroys the Saqqara theory. One of the two flat
blocks in foreground has a carved star of David inside a circle ( )

can I go see one?” “Nah, it’s just a waste of time. Don’t do it.” I had to keep pushing and pushing because I wanted to see one. I was brought in to various governmental offices, and I kept saying, “Please, can I just go see one?” And they would say, “No, no, no.” Finally I had to give bribes to get into these places. One government official wanted $8,000 to sneak me in there at night without any cameras, just to look at it for fifteen minutes, then get away. This is how closely they protect these structures.
Finally, after a long ordeal, I found out about one of these pyramids that was not on a military base because there was a little village around it about a half an hour from Saqqara. Once I realized that I didn’t have to go through any government red tape, I finally found a person who was connected with that village. I had to pay him a lot of money—it wasn’t thousands, but it was hundreds—to go there. So we drove into the little village; I had to go to the leader to ask permission and pay him money, too. Then I was allowed to go there for thirty minutes but not take any pictures. I managed to get this one photograph, and that was all.
Not only was this pyramid there, but there were pyramids all over the place everywhere, for what I estimated to be ten miles around! At one time this was a major complex. They’re not doing anything to take care of it because they know that this pyramid is probably older than 6000 years. So I found out that these “unimportant” pyramids were not so unimportant after all. The stones that covered this pyramid, like the slanting ones shown in Figure 4-17, probably weigh 60 to 80 tons apiece. They were very sophisticated even though the internal part of the pyramid was made with adobe bricks.
On top of a block beside the base was a circle with a Star of David —the key to the Mer-Ka-Ba experience. A
ramp goes down maybe 200 feet to the river below, and the pyramid is still working, still functioning—it’s pumping water. Pyramids pump water; they’ve demonstrated this in the United States now. If you build a pyramid right, it’ll pump water with no moving parts. So this pyramid fills up with water and has to be pumped dry before anyone can enter.
To top all this off, I just happened to sit next to an American linguistics team when I was flying back home (pure luck,
of course), who happened to have just entered this pyramid! Very few people can go in there, but this was a team of 30.
He told me about the writing inside that was definitely older than Saqqara. There is geometrical writing all over the walls.
I would love to see that. This guy was very excited as he told me that this team of 30 linguistics experts who got to see
the inside now believe that the key to all languages in the world is in that pyramid. I believe he’s probably correct. He
understood sacred geometry, and as you will soon discover, sacred geometry is the root of all language in the universe.


Egypt’s Role in the Evolution of Consciousness

Introduction to Some Basic Concepts

Egyptian Tools and Symbols of Resurrection
The ancients used certain symbols to represent the three aspects of con-
sciousness we use for our sojourn here on Earth. You’ll see representations of
these symbols all over the world. These depictions have one animal that lives
underground, one that walks on the Earth, and one that flies over the Earth.
The animal that lives under the ground represents the microcosm; the one who
flies through the air represents the macrocosm; and the one who walks the
Earth represents the middle
level between the two—like
us. The same symbols are
everywhere. In Egypt you’ll
see a vulture on the left, the
right eye of Horus in the
middle, then a cobra on the
right [Fig. 5-1]. In Peru it’s the
condor, the puma and the
rattlesnake. For the American
Indians it’s the eagle, the
mountain lion and the rattle-
snake. In Tibet it’s a chicken,
a pig and a snake.

Fig. 5-1. Symbols representing the three aspects of consciousness.


This photo [Fig . 5 - 2 ]
shows the tools and symbols

of resurrection the Egyptians used. The object at point A is a
shortened form of a rod that’s usually about four feet long
and has a little tuning fork on one end and a 45-degree angle
on the other end. This was used at the back of the head to
transfer vibration into the body. Along with that they used the
hook and the flail, which we’ll see in just a moment. Arrow B
points to the oval, which is usually a red-orange color, that
you see over the initiates’ heads. This was the symbol for the
metamorphosis that happens when we go through resurrec-
tion or ascension, when we literally change the shape and
chemistry of our body.
Arrow C shows a power generator they sometimes use
to increase the vibration. Unfortunately, Thoth left before I could
fully understand the use of this object. Arrow D indicates the

Fig. 5-2. Tools of ressurection.

ankh, which I understand more, and I’ll give you my under-

standing. It’s the most important tool of understanding they possessed. From an Egyptian point of view, it’s the key to eternal life. Arrow E points to a triangle within a triangle, which is the Egyptian hieroglyphic for the star Sirius, the symbol for Sirius A and Sirius B. Point F is just a name, called a car-
touche. The bird at the top right is a vulture, which is sacred to the Egyptians and associated with the movement from one level of consciousness to another. I’m not going to go into the other things in the picture, but these are some of the tools the early Egyptians used.
The Difference between Dying, Resurrection and
These geometric images [Fig. 5-3] come from the Old
Kingdom. The little Flower of Life patterns are associated
with Lehirit—the pyramid that I believe destroys the Saqqara
Figure 5-4 is a picture of Osiris (on the left). He’s holding
a crook (A); a 45-degree rod with a tuning fork on the end (B);
and a flail (C), which are the three primary instruments used Fig. 5-3. Geometric images from the Old Kingdom.

for resurrection. These tools were connected with resurrection, not ascension.
There’s a difference between the two. What is the difference? First of all, there’s
dying, a process where you go into the void state immediately after death. You’re
unconscious, unaware of the dying process to the degree that you have no control
over the images. This way of dying takes you into the third overtone of the fourth
dimension, which results in your cycling back into this Earth existence again and
again—reincarnation. Because you’re unconscious in this cycle, you’re not using
your Mer-Ka-Ba except unconsciously, so once you get to the other side, you don’t
have any memories of this side. When you reincarnate back to Earth again, you
don’t have any memories of where you just came from, either. So the reincarnat-
ing just keeps going on and on. It’s a lot of energy moving very slowly. You eventually get through it, but it’s a very slow process.
When you go through resurrection, you’re aware and conscious of your Mer-
Ka-Ba, though usually you don’t become fully aware of it until after you die. You
die, you drop the body and then you become aware of your Mer-Ka-Ba. Then you
re-create your body and go through a process that leads you into either the tenth,
eleventh or twelfth overtone of the fourth dimension. From there you don’t go through
reincarnation anymore. Your memory is never blocked again and you continue on
into eternal life.
There’s a big difference between dying and resurrection, but there’s an even
Fig. 5-4. Resurrecting Osiris. greater difference in ascension—which is now possible, since the grid was com-
pleted in 1989. Ascension was highly unlikely until this grid was complete. In as-
cension you don’t die at all; there’s no death process involved as we know it. Of course, it is true that you no longer are on Earth, and from that point of view, you die. What happens is, you simply become aware of your Mer-Ka-Ba one way or another—either remembering it on your own, being taught it or however it happens to you. This means you become aware of your body as light. Then you’re able to pass through the Void totally consciously—from the Earth side through the Void to the higher dimensions, aware the whole time. In this way you simply walk out of this life without going through the death process, which involves reconstructing your human body. When a person ascends, he/she simply disappears from this dimension and reappears in the next, passing through the Void.
Ascension is now completely possible, and this book is one possible set of instructions on exactly how to accomplish
this process. You personally might not pass through ascension; you might actually die or go through resurrection. It
doesn’t make much difference at this point in the game of life on planet Earth, because if you die in the normal manner,
you’ll go into the third overtone and into a holding pattern for a while. Then when the rest of the Earth cycles through this

coming change, all people on that third overtone will also rise to the same dimensional level as those who resurrected or
ascended. Even the Bible refers to this, saying that at this time the dead will rise. There is no such thing as death; there
are just different states of being. It’s a little like water, which can be a liquid, solid (ice) or gas (fog), but it is still water.
Right now very few human reincarnations are occurring on Earth except under certain conditions. This is probably
your last life, folks—this is it! Of course, there are exceptions to almost all rules, so there may be a few on this Earth who
have decided to reincarnate. Time is running out. If we make it to the end of this century, I’ll be amazed. I seriously doubt
if the third dimension will still be available for human life by that time. Only God knows for certain. Where are the people
coming from who are being born on Earth today? Not from here! I’ll explain when I talk about the new children.
When the Sun Rose in the West
As Egypt began to evolve, it developed into two countries, Upper Egypt
and Lower Egypt. Upper Egypt was south and Lower Egypt was north. Egyp-
tians named Upper and Lower Egypt in this sort of reverse way of thinking
because in their earlier life as a country during Atlantis, the Earth was rotat-
ing in the opposite direction and the magnetic poles were reversed. Our
present north was then south and vice versa. Not only did the poles shift
their position after Atlantis, but the Earth actually rotated in the opposite
direction. Thoth said that he’s gone through five pole shifts:
He’s seen the Sun rise in the east and he’s seen it rise in the west, then in the east, the west and again the east—five times!
On the ceiling of the temple at Dendera, which is the heart chakra of the male aspect of the Christ grid, is an astrological zodiac that demonstrates this reversed polarity. The zodiac rotates in the opposite direction, as if the Sun rose in the west instead of the east [Fig. 5-5]. The River Nile flows from south to north, whereas almost all the other rivers in the world flow from north to south. This indicates to me that the Egyptians held onto the older energy flow even in the Earth.

We are the creators of our universe. People involved in Sufism may
remember Sufi Sam, also known as Murshid Sam Lewis. He was buried—
in the early ’70s, I believe—at the Lama Foundation in New Mexico. There’s

Fig. 5-5. The Egyptian zodiac, shown flowing in the opposite
direction even though this depiction was done in the present

a plaque over his grave that reads: “On that day the sun will rise in the west, and all men seeing will believe.” He was referring to the time that’s coming. When the poles shift this next time, there will be a reversal of the Earth’s rotation, thus the way we move in relation to the Sun.

Osiris, the First Immortal
Prior to Egypt, during Atlantis, existed the Naacal Mystery School headed by Ay and Tiya and a thousand members from Lemuria. It was located on the island of Udal, north of the mainland. They were trying to teach the Atlanteans how to become immortal. The only thing is, either they weren’t very good teachers then, or the people just couldn’t get it, because it took 20- to 30,000 years before one person finally achieved the immortal state of being. The first person to make it was Osiris, who was not Egyptian, but Atlantean. The story of Osiris didn’t happen in Egypt, even though it talks about the Nile, but in Atlantis. Though most of you know this story, I’ll tell it anyway, in a condensed form.
There were two brothers and two sisters from the same family. Their names were Isis, Osiris, Nephthys (or Nefus)and Set. Isis married Osiris and Nephthys married Set. At the point where this story begins, Set killed Osiris. He put Osiris’ body in a box and floated it down the Nile, though it was really another river in Atlantis. This killing disturbed Isis, and she and her sister, Set’s wife, went out to look for Osiris. They found his body and brought it back, intending to bring Osiris back to life. When Set found out, he cut Osiris’ body into fourteen pieces and spread them all over the world so that his sisters could not bring him back to life. Isis and Nephthys then went out looking for these pieces to put him back together. They found thirteen of the fourteen and assembled the pieces, but they never found the phallus, the fourteenth piece. It was Thoth (who was in Atlantis as well as Egypt) who, through magic, restored the fourteenth piece. This restored the creative energy flow, brought Osiris back to life and, in addition, gave him immortality.
From the Egyptian point of view, it was through sexual energy that immortality was reached. (Remember, it was through sexual energy, tantra, that immortality took root in Lemuria.) I’m going to leave the last element of this story until another appropriate moment, because a certain understanding needs to come first. But notice that Osiris was first alive, walking around in a body in the first level of consciousness. Then he was killed and his body was cut into pieces. He was separated from himself—this was consciousness level two, our level. Then his pieces were brought back together and he was made whole again, which put him into the third level of consciousness, which is immortality.
He went through three levels of consciousness. The first one was whole, the second one was separated from itself,
and in the third level all the components were brought back together. This made him whole again and also made him
immortal; he would no longer die. When Osiris finally got through all this, he came back as an immortal being, the first
resurrected master of Atlantis. So they used Osiris’s understanding of how he became immortal as the template for how
other people could reach the same state of consciousness. This became the religion of Atlantis and later on the religion
of Egypt.
The Transpersonal Holographic Memory of the First Level of Consciousness
Atlanteans, because of the way their brains functioned, had complete memory. They remembered everything that
had ever happened to them. And their memory was transpersonal, which means that anything one person remembered,

the others in their race could remember. The Aborigines in Australia have this type of memory right now. When anything happens to one Aborigine, any other can reexperience it anytime he or she wants. If an Aborigine were to walk into this room right now, he or she would in effect be giving the experience to all of their race anywhere on the planet.
You see, they’re on the first level of consciousness where they’re not separated from themselves. We’re on the second level and are very separated from ourselves. Like the Atlanteans, Aborigines don’t have memory like our vague kind of recollection; they have full-tilt 3D holographic memory. They could reconstruct this room moment by moment through the entire workshop, and all the rest of them could walk around in here and look at it. They could walk up to your table and look into your eyes. It wouldn’t be real time; it’s what they call Dreamtime, like in a dream, but it’s an absolute replica of the Reality. Their memory is perfect; they don’t have any mistakes or flaws. Obviously, in that kind of culture the Atlanteans had no reason to write anything down. Why try to describe something with words when you’ve got the real thing?
They didn’t need it; however, the Martian aspect did need it, so they had a written language. Even after the Fall, the
Egyptians (and others) had an amazing ability to remember. At that point they had lost their holographic and transpersonal
memory, but they still had photographic memory. When the mystery school students were doing the complicated kind of
training we’ll be doing soon, they could do it all in their head. With our less efficient memory, we cannot do this in the same
way they did; we have to struggle just to remember someone’s name. The complexity will increase as we progress,
making it difficult to remember from photo to photo, but the ancient ones could do this completely in their head. There is
something about doing this in your head that’s important, so later I’m going to show you some illustrations that will assist
you to do this yourself.
This experience holds a primary key for understanding the nature of creation. Re-create the illustrations that follow as if you were actually in the Void moving through the geometrical movements. Experiencing it gives you the understanding that the circles on the page represent actual movements, and that these geometrical movements of spirit in the Void are the beginning and end of creation.
The Introduction of Writing, Which Created the Second Level of Consciousness
The Forty-Two Books of Thoth record that after the Fall, when the Atlanteans got into Egypt and were no longer experiencing full memory, writing was introduced. In fact, it’s written right in the Egyptian records that it was Thoth who introduced writing to the world. This one act completed the “fall” and threw us out of the first level of consciousness and fully into the second, because it changed the way we accessed memory. It sealed our fate.
This act of learning how to write caused us to grow the top half of our skull from our eyebrows up. The simple act of
introducing writing changed many factors in the way we perceive our Reality. To get at our memory now, we have to go
in and pull out the desired information with a code. We go in with a word or a concept to bring back the memory of
whatever it is. In fact, we can’t even remember something without having certain eye movements. Our eyes have to

move in certain ways in order for the memories to flow out. The Egyptian memory system was vastly different from the
way it was before the Fall. Comparing this change of memory to the Osiris saga, the Egyptians had entered the stage
where they were in separate pieces, where they were inside their bodies, thinking they were separate from the rest of
Reality. This feeling of being separate was, of course, destined to change many aspects of how human beings live.
The Roadblock of Polytheism: Chromosomes and Neters
Now the plot thickens. Things were going well with the stair-step evolution plan. After a while Upper and Lower Egypt
combined into one country under King Menes and the First Dynasty began. But as time went on, a serious problem
developed which, if it had not been solved, would have caused major catastrophes for us in the twentieth century—in
fact, we would not have survived as a planet. We wouldn’t have had a chance. It seems like a not-so-important thing, but
it was very important for some who watch over this planet. It had to do with the religious beliefs of the Egyptians.
As I said, the Egyptians no longer had full holographic transpersonal memory anymore, so
they had to write down what their religion was. This writing is called The Forty-Two Books of
Thoth. Donald Beaman, who lives in Boston, is the man who reconstructed this book. There
were 42 books, with two more books set aside from the main body. Forty-two plus two rep-
resents the number of chromosomes of the first level of consciousness. Your chromosomes,
as you are about to see, are geometric images and patterns that describe the entire Reality—
not just your body, but everything in the Reality, from the most distant planet to the smallest
plant and every single atom.
Inside his book you’ll see what are called neters. Neters are gods, with a small g. This is one of the neters—Anubis [Fig. 5-6]. They are mythical human beings with animal heads, and each one represents a different chromosome, a different aspect and characteristic of life. Neters represent the pathway of how to go from the first to the second level of consciousness. The ascended masters used Osiris’ particular genetic coding to help other people learn how to ascend. In other words, Osiris had lived the experience of ascension, and now the pathway was in his DNA, specifically the chromosomes. The genetic keys were then opened to the initiate through the neters, who represented Osiris’ chromosomes.
But a problem developed from this way of representing their religion, especially as Upper
and Lower Egypt again became more separated. Both Lower and Upper Egypt had 42+2
Fig. 5-6. The neter Anubis. gods, or neters, representing these stages. But Upper Egypt had images slightly different from
those of Lower Egypt; the images had changed over time when the two countries were sepa-
rate. When Menes put the two countries together as a single country called Egypt, in order to

be politically correct he adopted all these images. So now they had 84 + 4 gods representing the same religious ideas. That was probably a big mistake, because it got very confusing. For instance, in one area they would take one of the neters like Anubis and say, “This is God,” with a big G. Another area would say, “Isis is God,” and another area would claim Sekhmet to be their God.
So then there were 88 different ideas of God in the country. They would say, “My God is the God, and your gods are wrong.” It became very separated and occult, and after a while no one had any idea that there really was only one God. They didn’t understand what the Tat Brotherhood was trying to tell them. From our American point of view, this would be like a chromosome breakage; it was a mutation, and it was not correct. Even with all the help from the Tat Brotherhood, they just couldn’t get it right, and it got worse and worse.
All the evidence I’ve seen indicates that the Christian religion came directly out of the Egyptian religion. If you study both of them, they’re parallel in every single way except for the Egyptians’ understanding of God. The Christian religion came back later and totally discounted the Egyptian religion, even though Egypt is the probable source of the origins of Christianity. The Christians saw the Egyptians as being occult. And they were, but it was because their religious belief had become corrupted, with the clear exception of 17'/2 years during the Eighteenth Dynasty.

The Rescue of Human Consciousness

Akhenaten’s Life: A Brilliant Flash of Light
For a very short period of 171/2 years, a brilliant flash of light appeared, then disappeared again. And that brilliant flash of white light is what saved our spiritual lives. It began in approximately 1500 B.C., when the worshiping and arguing over so many gods was prevalent. The ascended masters finally decided that something must be done. Finally they chose a plan. Thoth told me the following story.
As the first step, they decided to bring in an actual Christ-conscious being in an actual Christ-conscious body so we could put back into the akashic records the memory of what Christ consciousness was all about. It had been lost in the Fall. This Christ-conscious body would be much taller than those on the planet at the time. This would be an example for the Earth people to see. That was the first part of the plan. It was a very bold step, and they did it.
The ascended masters had decided that the Christ-conscious person should become king of Egypt. In order to do
this, they had to break all the rules, and I mean all of them. What they did was approach the king of that period, Amenhotep
II, and ask him for a favor. Thoth simply walked into the room physically, went right up to him and said, “Look, I’m Thoth,”
which I’m sure was difficult for the king to believe. By that time the Egyptians probably thought that all those neters in their

stories were mythical. Yet here’s a real person standing there who was one of the neters. Thoth said, “We have a serious problem here in Egypt, and I need your help.”
Thoth somehow got Amenhotep II to do something that no Egyptian king would ever do. Amenhotep’s son was about to become king, and Thoth said, “I want your son to not become king; I want to put an outside lineage onto the Egyptian throne.” Amenhotep II agreed to it. It must have been a pretty profound experience, I don’t know what Thoth did—he probably came in glowing or levitating or something like that. But he did something to convince the king that it was necessary. Once they received the king’s permission, they had to actually create the living body, which was not easy.
Creating the Bodies of Akhenaten, then Nefertiti
So how did they do this? They went to Ay and Tiya—who were very, very old, no matter how you look at it—and said, “We would like you to have a baby.” They had to go to someone who was immortal to get the immortal genes, because they have a different chromosome count—46 + 2 instead of 44 + 2. Ay and Tiya agreed, and they had a little baby. The baby was given to Amenhotep II to become the next king.
So the little baby grew up and became king. He became Amenhotep III, who then mated; I am not sure if it was
physically or interdimensionally, and I don’t know who it was, but he would almost have had to mate with someone who
had the higher chromosome levels. Anyway, their baby boy became known as Amenhotep IV, and that baby was the one
they had special plans for. That baby, Amenhotep IV, has a more popular name, which you know as
Meanwhile Ay and Tiya waited a generation and then had another baby. That baby was a little girl whose name was Nefertiti. Nefertiti grew up with Akhenaten, and then they married. They were really brother and sister because they had the same bloodline. The Osiris story is similar— brother and sister marrying and becoming a new possibility in life. So these two people grew up and became the king and queen of Egypt.

The New Rulership and the One God
For a while Amenhotep III and his son Akhenaten ruled the country together—two kings at
the same time, again breaking the rules. Meanwhile they built a brand new city called Tel el Amarna
in the exact center of Egypt. We still don’t know how they got it in the exact center. Akhenaten put a
stone there that says, “This is the center of the country.” Today we could not have done it better from a
satellite. It makes you wonder who these people were who could locate right down to the square inch the center of a
country hundreds of miles long. It’s pretty amazing. They built an entire city out of white stones. It was beautiful—it was

Akhenaten and his father ruled the country simultaneously from two places for a while—from Thebes and from Tel el Amarna. The father resigned the throne while he was still alive—which again breaks the rules—and gave the country to Akhenaten, who then became the first pharaoh of Egypt. There were no pharaohs before Akhenaten, only kings. Pharaoh means that which you will become. In other words, they
were showing the people what they would literally become in the future. Akhenaten, Nefertiti and their children were not exactly human.
This tall figure [Fig. 5-7] is Akhenaten. I’m going to talk about this picture for a moment. Akhenaten’s main purpose was to break up all the occult religions and bring the country back to a single religion where they believed that there was simply one God. At that time all the people were worshiping statues, so they were used to believing in things. Akhenaten had to give them something to see to believe in, so he gave them the image of the Sun as God, because this image was something they couldn’t stick on their altars again.
There was another reason he gave them the image of the
Sun. He told them that the breath of life, the prana field, came
from the Sun. This is true in terms of third-dimensional thinking,
though prana is really anywhere and everywhere—there are
infinite amounts of it at any point. Since prana also comes from
the Sun, this image shows the Sun’s rays coming down; and on
two of the rays are little ankhs, which the rays are holding up to
the nose, to the breath, showing that eternal life is through the
In this same picture you also see the lotus, the national
flower of Atlantis. It was the Naacals who brought the lotus to
India. The Naacals are written about in Indian Sanskrit writings
and are talked about even in modern times. They came long
before Buddha and were there during Buddhist times. In Egypt
the lotus flower represented Atlantis, and in this picture you see
them out of the vases. Everyone knew that Atlantis was dead,
but they were still paying homage to it by having the lotuses out Fig. 5-7. Akhenaten teaching about God, a copy of the carving in Fig. 5-8.

Fig. 5-9.
Truth in ducks.

of the vase. Figure 5-8 is the original wall carving.
Notice that Akhenaten, the main figure, has a long, skinny neck, skinny hands, a high waist, wide thighs and skinny legs. The usual Egyptian explanation is that he had a disease and was deformed—of course, so was Nefertiti and all their daughters. (Evidently they all had the same disease.) I believe something very different.
The Reign of Truth, Which Depicts a Different Genetics
Besides making the religions monotheistic again, Akhenaten also said, “In this
new religion we’re not going to have any more lying, no more untruthfulness. And
we’re going to change our art so that it reflects the total truth.” So during the Eigh-
teenth Dynasty— never before nor after—there was a totally unique art form. The
Fig. 5-8. Akhenaten teaching about God, original carving. artists were instructed to sculpt or paint things just as their eyes saw it, like a photo-
graph. So began an art that looked realistic instead of stylized, as it had been
before. You see ducks that look like ducks [Fig. 5-9], just like we see in modern art. This is important to remember when you’re looking at art of the Eighteenth Dynasty, because that means that whatever you see is exactly what the artist saw. They were not allowed to lie.

This is a statue of Akhenaten in the Cairo Museum [Fig. 5-11]. Akhenaten was 141/2 feet tall, not counting his headdress. When I stood next to this, the top of my head came up
to the widest part of his hips.
Nefertiti was ten feet-something.
She was actually small for her
race. The daughters were also
very tall. This is according to Thoth.
Hard evidence of this has recently
come into official hands, and they
don’t know what to think about it.
They found two caskets in Tel el
Amarna, Akhenaten’s city.
This issue about truth was
taken to such an extreme that
they were not even allowed to
wear clothes, because wearing

Fig. 5-10. Maat, the neter of truthfulness.

clothes was hiding, and that was
a form of lying. No one was al-

lowed to wear clothes during the Eighteenth Dynasty except for ceremonial and other special purposes.
This neter’s name is Maat [Fig. 5-10]. That’s a feather on top other head. She
became one of the most important neters in this new religion because of her name,
which translates as truth or truthfulness. She was the important issue in everything.
Everything was to be absolutely truthful, and there were to be no distortions, no lies,
so that everything could get back into focus. This was an important part of Akhenaten’s
One of the caskets had the Flower of Life etched directly over the head of
the mummy inside, and the second casket held the bones of a seven-year-old
boy—but he was eight feet tall! That casket is sitting in the basement of the Cairo
Museum at this moment—at least it probably is. It’s the only real proof so far of
what these bodies looked like. From Thoth’s teachings, this statue of Akhenaten

is exactly what he looked like, just as if you took a photograph of him.

Fig. 5-11. Statue of Akhenaten in the Egyptian
Museum, Cairo.

This is a bust of
Nefertiti [Fig. 5-12]
that was found in Tel
el Amarna. There is
almost nothing left of
that city. At one point
the city was disman-
tled brick by brick
and spread all over
the world. The Egyp-
tians did not want
you to know that
Akhenaten and
Nefertiti had ever
lived. The only rea-
son we do know is
because they had
buried some things
in rooms deep un-
derneath the ground
that earlier people Fig. 5-13. Nefertiti in the nude.
didn’t find. This bust
was found there. Many people think of Nefertiti as a very beautiful woman, but they don’t realize that she was extremely tall and that her body was very unusual in certain ways.
Figure 5-13 is a little-known statue of Nefertiti found
in the same room as the bust. She’s not wearing clothes
because they didn’t believe in that at the time. She had a
huge head, large ears, a long, skinny neck and a high
waist. She also has a kind of bulging tummy. And if you
could see the rest other, she has skinny legs and wide
Fig. 5-12. Bust of Nefertiti, State Museum, Berlin. thighs.

Fig. 5-14. Two of Nefertiti’s and Akhenaten’s daughters.

These are two of their daughters [Fig. 5-14]. Their skulls are anormous
and they have high waists, skinny calves and huge ears. This is another
one of the daughters. [Fig. 5-15] I feel certain that it is exactly what she
looked like. If you could see that head from the back, you would see its size.
It was big. It’s hard to see the size of these ears until you actually get right
next to it.
Figure 5-16 is another daughter, younger than the last one — little neck, huge skull extending back.

Fig. 5-15. Another daughter.

Fig. 5-16. A younger daughter.

Fig. 5-18. Another young daughter.
Fig. 5-17. Teenager of one of the

This is an image of one of the
daughters as a teenager. [Fig. 5-17]
This is another [Fig. 5-18]. You can
see how big the head is relative to the
This is a baby [Fig. 5-19]. Again,
the skull goes way up and around. The
ears are about half the size of the


Physiologically these bodies are vastly different from human bodies. There are all
kinds of differences—brain differences and other unusual things. For example, they have
two hearts. The only reason we have one heart is because we have one sun. But these
are Sirian beings—actually, they were members of the 32 beings who were sitting around
the original flame—and their bodies are from the star Sirius. The Sirian star system has two
stars, Sirius A and Sirius B. It’s a binary system, as are a vast majority of the star systems.
And in those systems life forms have two hearts. If there’s only one sun, life forms have
one heart. (If there are more stars than two in the system, there will still be two hearts.)
King Tut—and Other Elongated
This is King Tut [Fig. 5-20], who took
over directly after Akhenaten was disposed
of. King Tut was only eighteen years old
when he became king. Nobody knows for
certain where he came from. The slide says
he was a son -in -law of Nefertiti and

Fig. 5-20. Bust of King Tut.

Akhenaten, married to their daughter. He
was obviously part of this lineage, though
his skull doesn’t appear as big. But he does
have the big ears. According to Thoth, King
Tut was allowed to take over for only one
year. He ruled during the transition between
Akhenaten and the next phase. King Tut
was in telepathic communication with
Nefertiti while she ran the country through
him for that one year. She was in hiding.
This is the museum at Lima, Peru [Fig.
5-21 ]. I just want to note that they also have
some pretty amazing skulls there. Peru is
another of the places Thoth went to. They
found these skulls [Fig. 5-22] in Peru, just
like those in Egypt. These large skulls are

Fig. 5-19. A baby in Akhenaten’s family.


Fig. 5-22. Skulls
found in Peru.


found in three areas of the world: in and around Egypt, Peru and Tibet—nowhere else, at least that I know of. Remember, these are the primary areas where these beings went.
This was one of my teachers [Fig. 5-23], who is now dead. His name was Kalu Rinpoche, a Tibetan lama. I’ve had many teachers, but I feel especially close to this one; I really love him a lot. Notice the shape of his skull.
Memory: The Key to Immortality
You might wonder, If Akhenaten and
others were immortal, then why are they
dead? I’ll give you the definition of immor-
Fig. 5-21. Museum in Lima. tality from a Melchizedek point of view,
which hopefully will help. Somebody else may have a different definition,
but this is what we feel. Immortality has nothing to do with living in the Fig. 5-23. Kalu Rinpoche.
same body forever. You’re going to live forever anyway; you have always been alive and you always will be, but you might not be conscious during all that time. The definition from our point of view has to do with memory. When you become immortal, you reach the point where your memory remains intact from then on. In other words, you’re conscious from then on, with no unconsciousness coming in. It means you stay in the body as long as you want to, and when you want to leave it, you leave. To have to stay in a single body forever would be a jail or a trap, because it means you couldn’t leave. There might be a reason for leaving that body, and you will eventually find that you want to go beyond wherever you are. This is the definition of eternal life: Simply put, you have continuous, unbroken memory.
Back now to what happened after Akhenaten was dethroned. In order to let things get back to the old ways, which they wanted to do, the country went into a transitional state. The people who became king and queen directly after him are almost comical—they let Ay and Tiya take over the country. We have a long time lag here, then they became king and queen. It’s written right in the records. They took over for around thirty years, and then they gave it to Seti I, who became the first king of the Nineteenth Dynasty. He immediately changed everything back to the old way, erased everything and called Akhenaten the same name they called Jesus—”the criminal.” He called him the worst king who ever lived because of his teaching that there was only one God.

What Really Happened to Akhenaten?
Most of Egypt hated Akhenaten, except for a small group. The priesthood hated him most of all because Egyptian religious beliefs were centered on the priests. They controlled the people, their way of life and the economy. They became rich and were more powerful than anybody else. Then Akhenaten came along and said, “You don’t need priests; God is within you. There is only one God, and you can access God from within your own self.” The priests reacted to protect themselves and their vested interests. Also, Egypt had the most powerful military in the world, and when Akhenaten became pharaoh, they were chomping at the bit, ready to go out and take over the world. Akhenaten said no. He was a complete pacifist and said, “Come back onto our soil. Do not attack anyone unless you’re attacked.” He made the military come back and sit by idly, and they didn’t like that.
So he had not only the priesthood, but the military against him. On top of that, the people themselves were into their little religions, and they loved worshiping their little gods. This wouldn’t ultimately do them any good—it wouldn’t get them where they needed to go according to the DNA plan of the universe—which was back home to God, to the one God—but nevertheless they were really into what they were doing.
When the people were forcefully told that they could no longer do certain religious acts, this caused great animosity
toward Akhenaten. It would be like our president saying, “Okay, there are no more religions in the United States; there’s
just the president’s religion.” And if the president brought all the military back onto American soil with an isolationist point
of view, he wouldn’t be very popular. Neither was Akhenaten. But he knew that he had to do it no matter what, even if it
meant his own death. He had to do it to correct the pathway that our collective DNA had encoded into the Reality. In
addition, he needed to put into the akashic records the memory of the sacred purpose that Christ consciousness held.
So what happened then? According to the accepted history, the priesthood and the military got together and gave
Akhenaten a poison that killed him. According to Thoth, that is not exactly what happened, because they couldn’t kill him.
He could drink the poison, but it wouldn’t hurt him. They did something much more exotic. Thoth says that the priesthood
hired three black Nubian sorcerers, who made a concoction similar to what is used in Haiti today to make someone look
dead. It was given to Akhenaten at a public meeting called by the priesthood and the military. After Akhenaten drank the
liquid, all life signs appeared to stop. As soon as the royal doctor pronounced him dead, they rushed him off to a special
room where they had a sarcophagus waiting. They placed him in the sarcophagus, put on the lid with a magical seal and
buried it in a hidden place. Thoth said that Akhenaten had to wait inside the sarcophagus for almost 2000 years before a
piece of the seal broke away and the magic was broken. He then returned to the Halls of Amenti. This was not a problem
for Akhenaten. Thoth said that to an immortal being like Akhenaten, it was more like a nap. My question is, did he really
allow this to happen to him?


Akhenaten’s Mystery School
What’s important here is one fact: Akhenaten developed a mystery school. The school was called the Egyptian
Mystery School of Akhenaten, the Law of One. As it turned out, he had only 171/2 years to produce results. He brought
students from the Left Eye of Horus (the feminine side) Mystery School, which I’ll talk about later—graduates who were
at least 45 years old—into the Right Eye of Horus Mystery School. This right-eye information had never been taught
before in Egypt. He taught them for twelve years, after which he had only five and a half years to see if he could get them
to live immortality. And he did it! He got about 300 people into immortality. I believe they were all, or almost all, women.
Someone once asked, “Why didn’t Akhenaten work with the population in a different way so as to not get himself into
such a dangerous situation?” But can you think of a way to change a whole population in such a short time without
causing strife? Could you do that in the United States right now—in one year bring all religions into one? I don’t think there
is a way except to just do it, even if it means getting “killed.” Besides, the only thing he really needed to do was simply live
his life. It would get into the akashic records and be a memory that we all have in our DNA. One day alone would get it
encoded, then afterward they could do whatever they wanted with him. He wasn’t really concerned about it. He knew that
the country, the society and the customs would all go back to the old way. But he did have these 300 immortal people who
would go on beyond him and Egypt. .
The Essene Brotherhood and Jesus, Mary and Joseph
After Akhenaten was gone, the 300 immortal Egyptians joined the Tat Brotherhood and waited from roughly 1350
B.C. to about 500 B.C.—about 850 years or so. Then they migrated to a place called Masada, Israel, and formed the Essene Brotherhood. Even today Masada is known as a capital of the Essene Brotherhood. These 300 people became the inner circle, and mostly ordinary people formed an outer circle, which became very large.
Mary, the mother of Jesus, was one of the members of the inner circle of the Essene Brotherhood. She was immortal
even before Jesus became immortal. Joseph came from the outer circle. This is according to Thoth; it’s not written in the
records. It was part of the Egyptian plan that the next step would be to bring in someone who would demonstrate exactly
how to become immortal when starting as an ordinary human, put the experience into the akashic records and make it
real. Somebody had to do it. According to Thoth, Mary and Joseph came together and mated interdimensionally (which
we’ll talk about later) to create the body for Jesus, which would allow his consciousness to come in from a very, very high
level. When Jesus first came in, he began life on Earth as human as any of us. He was totally human. And through his
own work he transformed himself to the immortal state through resurrection, not through ascension, and put into the
akashic records the process of exactly how to do it. This is according to Thoth, and it was planned a long, long time before
it ever took place.


The Two Mystery Schools and the 48 Chromosomal Images
We’re now changing direction again and beginning a new system of knowledge that will continue for a while until you
see this symbol again a long way down the line. This was the symbol for the Egyptian Mystery School of Akhenaten, the
Law of One [Fig. 5-24]. It’s the Right Eye of Horus. The right eye is controlled by the left brain; it’s male knowledge.
Although the right eye “sees” directly to the right brain, this is not what the Egyptians were communicating. It is not the
“seeing” but rather the interrupting of the “seeing” information that was important here. It
is the left brain that makes this interruption of what is seen; it controls the right side of the body, and vice versa. In the same manner, the Left Eye of Horus, controlled by the right brain, is female knowledge, which was taught in the twelve primary Egyptian temples along the Nile. The thirteenth temple was the Great Pyramid itself. It took twelve years of initiation, spending a year, one cycle, in each of these temples learning all the feminine components of consciousness.
But the male component, the Right Eye of Horus, was taught only once, and it was
not written down anywhere. It was purely an oral tradition, though its primary components
are etched on a single wall under the Great Pyramid that leads into the Hall of Records.
As you go down that hall, you get almost to the bottom, and just before it makes a 90-
degree turn, high up on the wall you see an image about four feet in diameter, which is the

Fig. 5-24. Symbol for the Right Eye of Horus Mystery School.

Flower of Life. Beside it you would see 47 other images, one after another, which are the
images of the chromosomes of Christ consciousness, the level of consciousness we’re

moving into now. After these two volumes are published, we may publish a book of these images.
These images will be given throughout this book, mixed up and in slightly different form. This is what the Great Pyramid is all about. Its primary purpose, beyond anything else, is to take someone from our level of consciousness into the next level. There are lots of other reasons why it’s in existence, but ascension and resurrection are the absolute purpose.


Genesis, the Creation Story

Egyptian and Christian Versions
We’re going to begin with a realization that the Christian and the Egyptian understandings of Reality are almost
identical. The Christian understanding is derived from the Egyptian. Here are the first three sentences of the Christian
Bible: “In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth. And the earth was without form and void, and darkness
was upon the face of the deep, and the spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters. And God said, ‘Let there be light,’
and there was light.”
To begin with, this statement that the Earth was without form until it came out of the Void, out of nothing, is exactly
what the Egyptians believed. It’s also what many other religions believe. Both Egyptian and Christian religions believe
that all that’s needed to start the process of creation is nothing and spirit, and when those two concepts are brought
together, then all things can be created. They believe that creation begins by the movement of spirit. In the second
sentence it says, “The earth was without form and void” and that the spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters.
Then in the very next sentence, God says, “Let there be light.” The movement happened first, then the light happened
immediately after.
According to the Egyptian belief, one tiny detail was left out of the current Christian Bibles. It isn’t necessarily wrong in the older Bibles, though. There are 900 versions of the Bible in the world, and in many of the older ones the first sentence says, “In the beginning there were six.” It starts out in other ways too; it’s been changed many times over the years.
The ancient Egyptians would say that the way our modern Bibles begin creation is impossible, especially if you think about it from a physics point of view. Imagine a dark, infinite space that goes on forever and ever in all directions. There’s nothing in it—just infinite space with nothing in it. Imagine yourself—not your body, but your consciousness—being in the middle of that. You’re just floating there with nothing. You can’t really fall, because where would you fall to? You wouldn’t know if you’re falling down or going up or off to the side; in fact, there’s no way to experience any motion at all.
From a purely physics or mathematical point of view, motion itself, or kinetic energy, is absolutely impossible in a void. You can’t even rotate, because motion cannot become real until there’s at least one other object in the space around you. There has to be something to move relative to. If you don’t have something relative to move to, how would you know you’re moving? I mean, if you went up thirty feet, how would you know that? There’s no change. With no change, there’s no movement. So the ancient Egyptians would say that before God “moved upon the face of the waters,” He/She had to first create something to move relative to.


How God and the Mystery Schools Did It
Now, think of yourself standing in a dark room, near the door to a second room. You are ready to go into the second room, which is very, very dark. You can barely see the door leading into it. You go into the second room, close the door behind you, and it’s pitch black.
When you’re faced with that situation, you have the ability to project a sensing beam from your third-eye area, and
you can also sense from your hands. (You can actually sense from any chakra, but people usually do it from their third
eye or their hands.) You can project a beam of consciousness into that dark room for a certain distance. It might go only
an inch, or maybe you can feel outward a foot or two, and you just know that nothing (or something) is in that space. Your
consciousness goes out this distance and then it stops. Your knowingness quits, and you don’t know what’s beyond that.
You probably all know what I’m talking about, though a lot of us have allowed that sense to retreat because we rely on our
eyes so much.
But some people, especially the ancient Egyptians, were really good at this. They could go into a dark room and feel all around and know if anything was there even though they couldn’t see a thing with their eyes. There are blind people who can also demonstrate this ability.
We actually have six of these sensing rays—not just one, but six. They all come from the center of our heads, the pineal gland. One ray comes out the front of our head at the third eye and another goes out the back; one goes out of the left and another out of the right side of our brain; and another goes straight up through the crown chakra and the sixth straight down through our neck—the six directions. These are the same directions of the x-y-z axes of geometry. The Egyptians believed that this innate aspect of consciousness is what allows creation to begin. They believed that if we didn’t have this ability, creation would never have happened.
In order to understand this process of creation on the deepest level, Egyptian students
were told to imagine and enact the process we are about to go through. The following
description is how they explained and practiced it in their mystery schools. The way they
learned isn’t the only way it could have been done, but this is how they were trained.
The dark background in this picture represents the Great Void, and the little eye represents the spirit of God [Fig. 5-25]. So here’s the spirit of God existing in the Void, out in nothing. Imagine that you’re that little spirit in the middle of the Void. (When you’re in the Great Void, by the way, you will realize that you and God are one, that there is no difference at all.) After hanging out in the Void for a long time, you probably would get bored or curious or lonely, and you would want to try something new, to have some new adventure in your life.
Fig. 5-25. Spirit of God in the great

First Create a Space
So spirit, the single Eye, shoots a beam of consciousness out into the Void. It shoots this
beam first to the front, then to the back, then to the left, then the right, then straight up and
straight down [Fig. 5-26]. Realize that whatever distance you project out front, you project the
same distance out back, also to the left, the right and up and down. The consciousness beam
projects the same distance in all six directions for any one individual. Even though each one of
us is different in how far we can project this beam (one of us might project an inch, another two
feet and another fifty feet), there is equality in all six directions. So spirit projects those beams
outward in those six directions, defining space: north, south, east, west, up and down.
This might be why the American Indians and native people all around the world find the
six directions so important. Have you ever noticed this in their ceremonies, how important it
is that they define the directions? It’s also important in the Kabala, in some of the meditations
they do.
Next, Enclose the Space
In the mystery schools, after they’ve projected these six beams in the six directions, the next thing they do is connect the ends of these projections. This forms a diamond, or square, around them [Fig. 5-27]. Of course, when it’s at the angle shown in this diagram, it looks like a rectangle, but you can see that it would actually be a square. So they make a little square around their point of consciousness. Then from the square they send a beam up to the top, forming a pyramid around the base of the square [Fig. 5-28].
After they create the pyramid on top, they then send a beam down to the bottom point,
forming a pyramid below [Fig. 5-29]. If you look at this in actual 3D space,
the two back-to-back pyramids form an octahedron. Here’s another ren-
dition of the octahedron [Fig. 5-30].
Remember that this is just spirit. You don’t have a body in the Great
Void; you’re just spirit. So you’re in the Great Void, and you’ve created
this field around you. Now, once you’ve defined the space by mapping
out the Fig. 5-30. Octahedron around spirit, octahedron with two back-
to-back pyramids, you have an object. Kinetic energy or movement is
now possible; something is now possible that was not possible before.
Fig. 5-30. Octahedron around

Fig. 5-26.

Spirit projecting consciousness into six directions.
Fig. 5-27.

Spirit in its first created diamond.

Fig. 5-28.

Projecting a pyramid above.

Fig. 5-28.

spirit. Spirit can move outside the shape and move around it. It can go in any

Projecting a pyramid below.

direction for miles and miles, then come back and have a center place for everything. The other thing spirit can do is remain stationary in the middle of the shape, letting the shape move instead. The shape can rotate or wobble or move in all possible ways. So relative movements are now possible.

Then Spin the Shape to Create a Sphere
The octahedron the students created this way had three axes—front to back, left to right, and up and down. They were told to spin the shape around one of the axes—it didn’t matter which, and it didn’t matter which direction. They would spin it one way or the other, then they would spin the shape once around another axis, and once around the third axis. With just one spin around each of the three axes, they traced the parameters of a perfect sphere. Before the students were allowed to move their own point of consciousness, they were taught to spin this octahedral form and create a sphere around themselves.
It has been agreed upon by everyone involved in sacred geometry that I know of, that a straight line is male and any curved line is female. Thus one of the most male forms is a square or a cube, and one of the most female forms is a circle or a sphere. Since the octahedron that spirit projected is made up of only straight lines, it’s a male shape; and since the sphere is made of only curved lines, it’s a female shape. What the Egyptians did was to create a male form and then convert it to a female form. They went from maleness to femaleness.
This same story is related through the Bible where Adam was created first, and then from Adam, or out of Adam’s rib, was created the female. Of course, the image of spirit inside the sphere is also the image of the school.
Sacred geometry started when spirit made its first projection into the Void and created the first octahedron around
itself. The Void is infinite—nothing in it—and these forms being created are also nothing.
They’re just imaginary lines created out of consciousness. This gives you an indication of
what Reality is—nothing. The Hindus call Reality maya, which means illusion.
Spirit can sit in the middle of its first creation for a long time [Fig. 5-31], but eventually it’ll
make a decision to do something. To re-create this process, mystery school students were
given instructions to reenact the same motions that spirit took. Two simple instructions are all
that’s required to create and complete everything in the entire universe.
The First Motion in Genesis
Remember that spirit is now sitting in a sphere. The instructions are to move to that
which is newly created, then project another sphere exactly like the first. That does some-
thing very special and unique. This is an absolutely foolproof system for creating Reality.

Fig. 5-31. Spirit in the middle of its first

You cannot make a mistake no matter what you do. All you do is move to what is newly
created and project another sphere the same size as the first one. In this system, since

nothing exists except this bubble in the Void, and the inside of the bubble is the same as
the outside, the only thing that’s new or different is the membrane itself, the surface of
the sphere.
So consciousness decides to go to the surface. It makes no difference where it goes on the surface; it can go anywhere. It doesn’t make any difference how it gets there either, whether it goes in a straight line or curves or spirals out or explores every speck of space in between. It can be really creative; it doesn’t make any difference. But somehow or another it will end up somewhere on the surface of the sphere.
For purposes of this example we’ll say spirit went up to the top (just to be symmetri-
cal and easier to deal with). Anyway, spirit, this little single eye, lands on the surface [Fig.

5-32]. It has just made the first motion in Genesis: “And the spirit of God moved upon the
face of the waters.” And the very next thing was: “God said, ‘Let there be light,’ and there was light.”
At this point spirit knows how to do only one thing—actually, it knows how to do two things, but the end result is one. It knows (1) how to project the little octahedron and create a sphere and (2) how to move to what’s newly created. That’s it, a very simple Reality. So once it arrives on the surface, it makes another octahedron, spins it through the three axes and forms another sphere identical in size to the first one. It’s identical in size because its ability to project into the Void is the same. Nothing has changed in that respect. So it creates a second sphere exactly the same size as the first.

The Vesica Piscis, through Which Light Is Created
When it does that, it has done something that, in terms of sacred
geometry, is very special. It has formed a vesica piscis at the intersection
of the two spheres [Fig. 5-33]. Have you ever seen two soap bubbles
together? When two soap bubbles intersect, a line or a circle goes around
their linkage. If you were looking at the two bubbles from the side, the
newly formed section would look like a line, but if you were looking down
at the two bubbles from the top, you would see the newly created form’s circumference inside the larger spheres.
The vesica piscis circumference is symmetrical to, and smaller than,

Fig. 5-32. Spirit’s first motion.

Fig. 5-33. First motion/day; the first two spheres of creation take a
versica piscis.

the circumference of the larger spheres. In other words, it would appear
from the side like a straight line [Fig. 5-34, center], and from the top like a

Fig. 5-34. First motion/day. The first two spheres of creation
(left); section view (center); and plan or overhead view (right).

circle [right]. Even though the vesica piscis is usually two-dimensional like a coin, its three-di-
mensional aspect is just as valid. If you were to take it out of the middle of the two spheres, it would look similar to a football, like Figure 5-35.
I cannot prove this to you now, but later in this book I’ll be able to prove that this image is
light. It’s the geometric image through which light was created. It’s also the geometric image
through which your eyes were created, which receive light. Besides light, it’s also the image of
the patterns that are connected to your emotions and many, many other aspects of life. This is
the basic geometry of the electromagnetic field. It’s too simple to understand here. I have to wait

Fig. 5-35. A 3D cesica piscis, a
three-dimentional solid shape taken out from the two sphere that made it.

Fig. 5-36. Third sphere, second
motion/day of Genesis. When sit-
tin in the center of uppermost
circle/sphere and looking down,
the horizontal line is seen as a

Fig. 5-37. Small and large
tetrahedrons in three spheres.

until things get more complex; then I can explain it. I’ll show you that the first motion of Genesis
creates the pattern that is life. That’s the reason why God said, “Let there be light.” He couldn’t say that until He had projected the second sphere and made the vesica piscis.
The Second Motion Creates the Star Tetrahedron
When spirit is in the center of its second sphere and looking down at the vesica piscis, it’s looking upon a newly formed circle, the circle of the vesica piscis. This circle is the only thing that’s new, and spirit’s instructions are to go to what’s newly created. It doesn’t make any differ-
ence where it goes on the new circle. It cannot make a mistake; it just moves to somewhere on that circle and projects a new sphere as in Figure 5-36.
No matter where spirit lands, we can rotate the spheres to look like this drawing. So I’m going to say that it moved on the circle to point A, on the left. At that moment a huge amount of information was created (in every motion of Genesis, vast amounts of knowledge come out). The first creation produced the sphere. The first motion/day produced the vesica piscis, which is the basis of light. The second motion/day produced, in the interpenetrating relationship between the three spheres, the basic geometries of the star tetrahedron [Fig. 5-37], which you will soon see is one of the most important shapes for life.
We’re not going to get into all the information that was formed at this time, but each time a
new sphere is formed, more and more information unfolds and more and more creative patterns
become visible. After the first and second motions have taken place—from anywhere on the
sphere to anywhere on the circle (no matter how spirit moved, no matter where it went on the
circle/sphere, it will always be perfect)—it will begin to move exactly on the equator of the original
sphere. There are an infinite number of equators on that sphere, but it will choose a perfect one.

“Move to That Which is Newly Created” until Completion
After that pattern is created, there’s only one instruction left to follow—forever. The only other action to be taken until the end of time is always to move to the innermost circle point(s) and project another sphere.
For the sake of clarity, let’s define what we mean by “innermost circle point.” Look at Figure 5-36.
In this case there are three innermost circle points. If your eye were to trace the outside perimeter of
this pattern, it would come to three places that are the closest places to center. It is these “closest

places to center” that we are calling the innermost circle points. In the case of the Genesis pattern
that this movement of spirit is creating, there are six innermost circle points.
So with this in mind, spirit starts moving exactly around the equator of the original or central
sphere. When it has traversed the full 360 degrees and reaches the point at which it started (which will be six points or movements) , it begins to follow its second impulse (or instruction, for the mystery school students): Move to the innermost circle points, which are now located on the circumference of the original sphere where two vesica pisces intersect. Simply put, they are the points as close as possible to the outside of the pattern. That continual movement begins to form a vortex. This vortex motion creates different types of three-dimensional forms, one after another, which are the building blocks or blueprints of the entire Reality.
Once spirit has created the third sphere, it now moves to the innermost circle point and projects another sphere [Fig. 5-38]. There is information here, but it is too complex to discuss at this time.
This is very interesting; it is the fourth motion/day [Fig.
5-39]. It says in many Bibles in the world that on the fourth
day of Genesis exactly one half of creation was completed.
Starting from the first motion, exactly one half of the circle was
formed [Fig. 5-39a]. We have
moved exactly 180 degrees
from the point of the first mo-
Figure 5-40 is the fifth day
of Genesis—more information.
And then on the sixth day
[Fig. 5-41] a geometric miracle
Fig. 5-41a. Showing a 3D view of this.

Fig. 5-38. Fourth sphere, third
day of Genesis.

Fig. 5-39. Fifth sphere, fourth day of Genesis.

Fig. 5-39a.
Half of

Fig. 5-40. Sixth sphere, fifth day

Fig. 5-41. Sixth sphere, fifth day of Genesis.

takes place:

of Genesis.


the last circle forms a complete six-petaled flower. This is what many of the earlier Bibles meant when they said, “In
the beginning there were six.” Our Bible now says that creation was formed in six days, and this fits exactly. This is the
pattern of Genesis, so we refer to it as the Genesis pattern. It’s the beginning of the creation of this universe we live in.
These original movements of spirit are really important. This is why I spend so much time going through this near the beginning of this course. Later on we’ll get more complex, but for now this is just the beginning of how the manifestation of Reality is created.
We’ll pull these 3D shapes off the page in a minute, one by one. If they could be made solid, you could look at them and hold them in your hands. We will begin to ground this abstract information into Reality for you. Then we’re going to take them further to show you how they actually create the Reality we live in. If you study this on your own, you’ll be seeing some extremely elaborate aspects of creation come from this explanation of the Reality. If you were constructing these geometries yourself, you would draw a line somewhere in the sacred geometry that spirit makes as it moves through the Void, and it’ll mean something amazing; then another line will mean something else even more amazing. Life began simply, then created the complex world we live in.
This is not just mathematics, and it’s not just circles or geometries. This is the living map of the creation of all Reality.
You must understand this or you’ll get lost and won’t understand what this book is leading to. The reason we’re doing all
this is so that your left brain can understand the unity of all creation so that polarity consciousness can be transcended.


The Significance of Shape and Structure

Developing the Genesis Pattern

The Torus, the First Shape
Let’s look at the first object that comes off the page—the Genesis pattern itself (see Fig. 5-41). If you look at a math book, this Genesis pattern has the minimal amount of lines that can be drawn on a flat surface to delineate the threedimensional form called a torus. A torus is formed when you rotate the Genesis pattern around its central axis, creating a shape that looks like a doughnut, but the hole in the middle is infinitely small.
A torus, here called a tube torus because this particular one is shaped like an inner tube [Fig. 6-1 ], is unique in that it’s able to fold in on itself, turning either
inward or outward. No other shape in existence can do
this or anything similar. A torus is the first shape that
comes out of the completed Genesis pattern and
is absolutely unique among all forms in existence.
It was Arthur Young who discovered that there
are seven regions on this shape, which are collec-
tively called the seven-color map. You can pick up
almost any mathematics book, and if you go to
the torus, it’ll talk about the seven-color map. There
are seven regions, all the same size, that will ex-
actly fit in the tube torus with nothing left over. Just
like on the Genesis pattern, six circles going around
Fig. 6-1. The colorful tube torus. the seventh, central one take up the entire sur-

face. It’s perfect, flawless.
In sacred geometry there’s something called ratcheting. You take a circle or
a line and ratchet it, like when you take a ratchet tool in car mechanics and
use it to rotate something a certain distance. For instance, imagine two Gen-
esis patterns superimposed on each other. One pattern is fixed; if you
rotate the other pattern 30 degrees, you would have twelve spheres
around the central one. It would look like this [Fig. 6-2] in two dimensions.
In three dimensions it would look like a tube torus. Then if you connect all
possible lines in the middle, you get this pattern [Fig. 6-3].
Ratcheting the twelve spheres once more, this time 15 degrees,
so that there are 24 spheres, you would get this pattern [Fig. 6-4].
This pattern has what is called a transcendental pattern associated
with it. What is a transcendental pattern? A transcendental number in
mathematics, from my way of looking at it, is a number that comes from
another dimension. In that dimension it is probably whole, but when it gets
here it does not completely translate into this world. We have a lot of those.
One of them, for example, is the phi ratio, which I’m going to talk about later.
Fig. 6-2. Genesis pattern ratcheted once. It’s a mathematical proportion that starts out with 1.6180339
and continues forever, meaning you never know what the
next. digit is going to be, and it never ends: people have let
computers run for months without coming to an end. As a
simple explanation, that’s what a transcendental number is.
The shape of the torus is what governs many aspects
of our lives. For example, the human heart has seven
muscles that form a torus, and it pumps in the seven re-
gions shown in the map of the torus. We have embodied all
knowledge. The torus is literally around all life forms, all at-
oms, and all cosmic bodies such as planets, stars, galaxies
and so on. It is the primary shape in existence.
“In the beginning was the Word.” I believe that time will reveal that language/conscious sound/the word will all be revealed in the torus. There are those who believe this to be true now, but only time will tell.
Fig. 6-3. Ratcheted Genesis pattern with all possible connected lines.

The Labyrinth As a Movement of Life-Force Energy
Figure 6-5 is a sevenfold labyrinth. This is found all over the world— everywhere from China to Tibet to England to Ireland to Peru to the American Indians.
One was just found in Egypt. You’ll find this labyrinth on the floors of many of the churches in Europe. The same form is on stone walls everywhere. It must have been of great importance to ancient mankind. There are seven regions in it, which relates to the torus and to the beating of the human heart. Later on I’ll be talking about the ancient Druid mystery school on the Island of Avalon in England. To get to the top of the hill there, you have to walk through this same labyrinth, going back and forth through this motion.

While I was in England, I spoke to Richard Feather Anderson, who is
an author and an expert on labyrinths, and I learned something. As part of his
research, he has people walk through the labyrinth. He’s discovered that when you
walk through it, you are forced to move through different states of consciousness,
giving you a very specific experience. It causes the life-force energy to move through
the chakras in the following pattern: three, two, one, four, seven, six, five. The en-
ergy starts in the third chakra, then goes to the second, then to the first; then it
jumps up to the heart (fourth), then into the center of the head to the pineal gland
(seventh), then to the front of the head to the pituitary Inland (sixth), and then down
into the throat (fifth).
When you walk this labyrinth, unless you block the experience, you will iutomatically move through these changes. Even
if you don’t know about :hese things, you will go
through the experiences anyway. People all over
:he world have found this to be true. Mr. Anderson
believes that if you Iraw lines (the number of lines
indicating which of the seven paths it is) in :he or-
der you walk the path—three, two, one, four,
seven, six, five—it forms what looks like a cup [Fig.
6-6]. He feels that this particular labyrinth is re-Fig. 6-6. The labyrinth sequence
creates a cup.

Fig. 6-4. Twice-ratcheted Genesis pattern with all
possible connceted lines.

Update: I have just
seen a picture from Europe
[1998, see below] of the
biblical Melchizedek, in
which he is holding the key
to the labyrinth inside a


lated to the shape of the Holy Grail and
to its secret knowledge. From my ex-
perience, this feels right, but I am
keeping an open mind. I don’t
know about this yet; it may be
I experimented with this
labyrinth on myself, and it is
true that those :hanges did

Fig. 6-8. 3D spheres/balls.

Fig. 6-8a. Connecting centers
toform a cube

happen for me. However, I
was also able to experience
these ame changes in a dif-
ferent way. I was ible to walk a
straight line toward the :enter of
the labyrinth and simply nake the
changes within myself as I cached
each place where the turn rould be in the labyrinth. I was able o reach the same state without walkig through the whole pattern. Remember the labyrinth; I’ll come back o it after a while.

Fig. 6-7. Vortex beyond the Genesis patterns.

The Egg of Life, the Second Shape beyond Genesis
The dark innermost circles show the six days of Genesis [Fig. 6-7]. Once the
consciousness projects the first seven spheres and completes this Genesis pattern, it
then continues moving in a rotational pattern from each consecutive innermost place
until it completes its second vortex motion as seen by the light outermost circles. That
motion in turn completes a three-dimensional shape you can hold in your hand, which
looks like Figure 6-8. If you were to take Figure 6-7 and erase all the lines in the middle
and certain other lines, you would see this pattern. The pattern of spheres is like what
spirit would have seen had it moved outside its creation and said, “Aha, I see this
Fig. 6-8b. A different view. thing! It looks like that” [Fig. 6-8].

The eighth sphere is actually behind these visible spheres. If you were to connect their centers, you would see a cube [Figs. 6-8a and 6-8b].
So what? Who cares? Well, the ancients did, because they were concerned with
creation, life and death. They called this cluster of spheres the Egg of Life. I’ll soon
show you how the Egg of Life is the morphogenetic structure that created your body. Your
entire physical existence is dependent on the Egg of Life structure. Everything about you
was created through the Egg of Life form, right down to the color of your eyes, the shape
of your nose, how long your fingers are and everything else. It’s all based on this one form.
The Third Rotation/Shape: The Fruit of Life
The next vortex is the third rotation [Fig. 6-9]. The spheres in this vortex are cen-
tered at the innermost places in the perimeter of the previous round, as shown by the
six arrows here. So when spirit rotates in this third vortex, you get the gray rings
shown here. Then you notice a new relationship where the six circles touch the center Fig. 6-9. The third rotation.
one and each other. If you took seven pennies and pushed them together on a table,
they would look like that. This third rotation is an extremely important relationship in the creation of our Reality. When you look carefully at the Flower of Life, you see these seven circles that touch each other.
There are nineteen circles in the Flower of Life [Fig. 6-10], and they’re surrounded by two
concentric circles. For some reason, that image is found all over the world. The question is, why
did they do that all over the world and stop at nineteen circles? It’s an infinite grid and could
have been stopped anywhere. The only place on the
whole planet where I’ve seen them go out beyond

those nineteen circles was in China, where they made
room-divider screens [Fig. 6-11]. One of the most fa-

Fig. 6-10. Flower of Life.

mous patterns they used on those screens was the Flower of Life. They made
it in a rectangular shape, carrying it all the way out to the edge.
But in all others that were found, you would usually see just the Flower of
Life pattern. This is because when the ancient beings realized what the other
component was and how important it was, they decided to make it secret. They
didn’t want people to see this relationship I’m about to show you. It was so
sacred and important that they just could not allow it to become common knowl-

Fig. 6-11. Chinese screen, stylized Flower of Life.

edge. It was appropriate at that time; however, now we either use the informa-

tion or fall further into the darkness.
Notice that in the Flower of Life pattern you see many incomplete circles, which, of course, can also be spheres. Look all around the outer edge of Figure 6-10. If all you did was complete all of these circles, then the secret would unfold. This was the ancient’s way of coding the information.
The additional circles/spheres that extend beyond the original Flower of Life pattern inside the large gray ring in Figure 6-12 complete all the incomplete circles at the edge of that pattern.
As soon as you complete these spheres, with one more step you’ll have the secret: Go to the innermost places of the perimeter, shown by the arrows, and rotate the next vortex. When you do, you get the pattern of thirteen circles, shown here by the smaller gray circles, including the center. When it’s extracted from the rest of the pattern, it looks like Figure 6-13.
This pattern of thirteen circles is one of the holiest, most sacred forms in existence. On Earth it’s called the Fruit of Life. It is called the fruit because it is the result, the fruit, from which the fabric of the details of the Reality were created.
Combining Male and Female to Create Metatron’s Cube, the First Informational
System Now, all the circles in this pattern are female. And there are thirteen ways, with

Fig. 6-12. Completing the incomplete circles.

these thirteen circles, that you can superimpose male energy—in other words, straight
lines. If you superimpose straight lines over this in all thirteen ways, you’ll come up with thirteen patterns that, along with the Egg of Life and the torus, create everything in existence. The Egg of Life, the torus, and this Fruit of Life, a total of three patterns, create everything in existence without exception—at least I Fig. 6-14. Metatron’s Cube

have not been able to find an exception. I’ll give you what
I’ve learned; obviously I cannot show you everything,
but I’ll show you enough to convince you this is true.
I’m going to call these informational systems. There
are thirteen informational systems associated with
the Fruit of Life pattern. Each system produces a
vast and diversified amount of knowledge. I’m go-
ing to show you only four of those. I think that’s
The simplest system comes forth by simply

Fig. 6-13. The Fruit of Life.


connecting all the centers of the circles with straight
lines. If you decided to put straight lines on this pat-
tern, probably about 90 percent of you would think
first of connecting all ters. If you do that, you end up
v this pattern [Fig. 6-14], which is known through-

out the universe—everywhere —as Metatron’s Cube. It is one of the most important informational systems in the universe, one of the basic creation patterns of existence.
The Platonic Solids

Anyone who has studied sacred geometry or even regular geometry knows that there are five unique shapes, and they are crucial to understanding both sacred and regular geometry. They’re called the Platonic solids [Fig. 6-15].
A Platonic solid has certain characteristics by definition. First of all, its faces are all the same size.
For instance, a cube, the most well-known of the Platonic solids, has a square on every face, so all its
faces are the same size. Second, the edges of a Platonic solid are all the same length; all edges of a

cube are the same length. Third, it has only one size of interior angles between faces. In the case of a
cube, this angle is 90 degrees. And fourth, if a Platonic solid is put inside a sphere (of the right size), all the points will touch the surface of the sphere. With that definition, there are only four shapes besides the cube (A) that have all of those characteristics. Second (B) is the tetrahedron (tetra means four), a polyhedron that has four faces, all equilateral triangles, one edge length and one angle, and all points touch the surface of a sphere. The other simple one is (C) an octahedron (octa means eight), whose eight faces are equilateral triangles of the same size, edge length and angle, and all points touch the surface of a sphere.
The other two Platonic solids are a little more complicated. One (D) is called an icosdhedron, which means it has 20 faces, made of equilateral triangles with the same edge length and angle, and all points touch the surface of a sphere. The last one (E) is called a pentagonal dodecahe-
dron (dodeca is 12), whose faces are 12 pentagons (five sides), with the same edge length and angle, and whose points all touch the surface of a sphere.
If you’re an engineer or an architect, you have studied these five shapes in college, at least cursorily, because they’re the basis of structures.
Their Source: Metatron’s Cube
If you study sacred geometry, no matter what book you pick up, it shows the five Platonic solids, because they are the ABCs of sacred geometry. But when you read all these books—and I’ve read almost all of them—and ask the experts, “Where do the Platonic solids come from? What is their source?” almost everyone says they don’t know. Well, the five Platonic solids come from the first informational system of the Fruit of Life. Hidden within the lines of Metatron’s Cube [see Fig. 6-14] are all five of these shapes. When you look at Metatron’s Cube, you’re looking at all five Platonic solids at once. In order to see each one better, you have to do that trick again where you erase some of the lines. If you erase all the lines except certain ones, you get this cube [Fig. 6-16].

Fig. 6-15. The five Platonic solids.

Fig. 6-16. Here are the two cubes
extracted from Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 6-16a. Solid larger cube from previous figure.


Fig. 6-17. The star tetrahedrons
exctracted from Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 6-17a. Solid larger start
tetrahedron in Fig. 6-17.

Fig. 6-18. Two octahedrons
extracted from Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 6-18a. Solid larger octahedron.

Fig. 6-19. Two icosahedrons
extracted from Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 6-19a. Solid larger icosahedron.

Can you see the cube? It’s actually a cube within a cube. Some of the lines are dotted because they would be behind the front faces. They are invisible when the cube becomes solid. Here’s the solid form of the larger cube [Fig. 6-16a]. (Make sure you see this one, because they get harder and harder to see as we go.)
By erasing certain lines and connecting other centers [Fig. 6-17], you get two superimposed tetrahedrons, which form a star tetrahedron. Like this cube, you actually get two star tetrahedrons, one inside the other. Here’s the solid form of the larger star tetrahedron [Fig. 6-17a].
Figure 6-18 is an octahedron inside another octahedron, though you’re looking at them from a special angle. Figure 6-18a is the solid version of this larger octahedron.

Figure 6-19 is one icosahe-
dron inside another, and Figure 6-
19 a is this solid version of the
larger one. It somehow becomes
easier if you see it this way.
These are three-dimensional objects coming out of the thirteen circle of the Fruit of Life.
This is Sulamith Wulfing’s paint-

Fig. 6-20. Sulamith Wulfing’s painting of the Crist Child.

ing of the Christ Child inside an
icosahedron [Fig. 6-20], which is
very appropriate , because the
icosahedron represents water, as
you will see in a moment, and the
Christ was baptized in water, the be-
ginning of the new consciousness.
This is the fifth and last shape—
two pentagonal dodecahedrons,
one inside the other [Fig. 6-21] (here
showing only the inner dodecahe-
dron for simplicity).
Figure 21a is the solid version.
As we have seen, all five of the
Platonic solids can be found in Metatron’s Cube [Fig. 6-22].

Fig. 6-21. Pentagonal dodecahedron
in Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 6-21a. Solid dodecahedron.


The Missing Lines

When I was looking for the final Pla-
tonic solid in Metatron’s Cube, the
dodecahedron, it took me over twenty
years . After the angels had said ,
“They’re all in there,” I starred to look,
but I could never find the dodecahedron.
Finally one day a student said, “Hey,
Drunvalo, you forgot some of the lines
in Metatron’s Cube.” When he pointed
them out, I looked and said, “You’re right,
I did!” I thought I had connected all the
centers together, but I had forgotten
some of them. No wonder I couldn’t find
that dodecahedron, because those
missing lines defined it! For over twenty
years I’d assumed that I had all the lines
when I hadn’t.
This is one of the great problems in

Update : Ac -
cording to David
Adair , NASA has
just made a metal
in space that is 500
times stronger than
titanium, as light as
foam and as clear
as glass. Is it based
on these prin -

Fig. 6-23. Macki’s pentagon design from Metatron’s Cube. When cut out and folded, it makes a three-dimensional pentagonal dodecahedron.

science, believing you have solved a problem, then moving on and using that information to build on. Science is now having to deal with the same kind of problem around falling bodies in a vacuum, for example. It has always been as-
sumed that they fell at the same rate, and much of our higher science is based on this fundamental “law.”
It has been proven wrong, yet science continues using it. A spinning ball falls much faster than a
nonspinning one. Someday there will be a scientific day of reckoning.
When I was married to Macki, she was also deeply involved in sacred geometry. Her
work is very interesting to me because it’s female—right-brained pentagonal ener-
gies. She shows how emotions and colors and shapes are all interrelated. Actually,
she found the dodecahedron in Metatron’s Cube before I did. She took it and did
something I never would have thought of doing. Metatron’s cube, you know, is usually
drawn on a flat surface, but it’s really a three-dimensional shape. So one day I was
holding the three-dimensional shape and trying to find the dodecahedron in there, and
Macki said, “Let me look at that thing.” She took the three-dimensional shape and
rotated it by the phi ratio. (Something we’ve not talked about yet is that the Golden
Mean ratio, also called the phi ratio, is approximately 1.618.) Rotating the shape like
that was something I would never have thought of doing. After she did that, she cast a
shadow through it and got this image [Fig. 6-23].
Fig. 6-22. Metathron’s Cube.

Macki originally created this, then gave it to me. It has a center at pentagon A. Then if you take the five pentagons coming off of A (pentagons B) and one more pentagon coming off of each of those five (pentagons C). you have an unfolded dodecahedron. I thought, Wow, this is the first time I’ve ever found any kind of dodecahedron in there. She did that in three days. I’d never found it in twenty years.
We once spent almost a whole day looking at this drawing. It was exciting, because every single line in this drawing is in a Golden Mean ratio. And there are three-dimensional Golden Mean rectangles all over. There’s one at point E, where the two diamonds above and below are the top and bottom of a three-dimensional Golden Mean rectangle, and the dotted lines are the sides. It’s amazing stuff. I said, “I don’t know what this is, but it’s probably important.” So we put it aside to consider at another time.
Quasi Crystals
Later I found out about a brand-new science. This new science is going to change the technological world dramatically. Using this new technology, metallurgists believe they will be able to make metal ten times harder than diamonds, if you can imagine that. That would be incredibly hard.
For a long time when they looked into metals, they were using what’s called x-ray diffraction to see where the atoms were. I’ll show an x-ray diffraction photograph of this shortly. Certain specific patterns came up that revealed there were only certain kinds of atomic structures. They thought it was all there was to learn because that was all they could find. This limited their ability to make metals.
Then tliere was a game going on in Scientific American which was based on Penrose patterns. Roger Penrose was a British mathematician and relativist who wanted to figure out how to lay pentagon-shaped tiles and fully cover a flat surface. You cannot lay only pentagon-shaped tiles on a flat surface—there’s no way to make it work. So he came up with two diamond shapes that are derivatives of a pentagon, and with those two shapes he was able to form lots of different patterns that would fit on a flat surface. It became a game in Scientific American back in the eighties to put these patterns together in new forms, which then led some metallurgical scientists who were watching this game to suspect something new in physics.
Ultimately they discovered a new kind of atomic grid pattern. It was always there; they
merely discovered it. These grid patterns are now called quasi crystals; it’s a new thing
(1991). They’re unraveling what shapes and patterns are possible through metals. Scientists are
finding ways to use these shapes and patterns to produce new metal products. And I’ll bet that the
pattern Macki got out of Metatron’s Cube is the grand master of all, and that any Penrose pattern in
existence is derived from it. Why? Because it’s all Golden Mean, it’s basic—it came straight out of
the basic pattern in Metatron’s Cube. Though it’s not my business, at one point I will probably
determine if it’s really true. I see that instead of using the two Penrose patterns and the pentagon,

UPDATE: In 1998 we are beginning to
open up another new science :
nanotech.nolog’y, We have created micro-
scopic “machines” that can go into a metal
or crystal matrix and rearrange the atoms.
In 1996 or 1997 in Europe a diamond was
created out of graphite using
nanotechnology. This diamond was about
three feet across, and it is real. As the sci-
ence of quasi crystals and nanotechnology
merge, our experience of life will also
change. Look at the late 1800s compared
to now.

it uses only one of them and a pentagon. (I just thought I’d offer that.) What’s
happening in this new science right now is interesting.
As this book begins to unfold, you’ll discover that sacred geometry can de-
scribe in detail any subject whatsoever. There is not one thing you can pronounce
with your mouth that cannot be completely, utterly and totally described, with all
possible knowledge, by sacred geometry. (And we are making the distinction be-
tween knowledge and wisdom: Wisdom needs experience.) Yet a more important
purpose of this work is to remind you that you have the potential of a living Mer-Ka-
Ba field around your body and to teach you how to use it. I’ll continually come to
places where I digress into all kinds of roots and branches and talk about every
subject you can think of. But I’m going to keep coming back on track, because I’m
heading in one particular direction, toward the Mer-Ka-Ba, the human light body.

I’ve spent many years studying sacred geometry, and I believe you can know everything there is to be known about any subject whatsoever just by focusing on the geometries behind it. All you need is a compass and a ruler—you don’t even need a computer, though it does help. You have all knowledge in you already, and all you have to do is unfold it. You simply learn the map of how spirit moves in the Great Void, and that’s it. You can unravel the mystery of any subject.
To summarize, the first informational system comes out of the Fruit of Life through Metatron’s Cube. By connecting the centers of all the spheres, you have five shapes—really six, because you have the central sphere, which started the whole thing. So you have six primal shapes—the tetrahedron, the cube, octahedron, icosahedron, dodecahedron and the sphere.

The Platonic Solids and the Elements
Fig. 6-24. Relating the six elements to the six primal shapes, shown in

These six shapes were considered by the ancient alchemists
and great souls like Pythagoras, the father of Greece, to have had an element aspect to them [Fig. 6-24].


three columns that depict the trinity of polarity. The left (male) column
represents the left brain and the proton and includes 3- and 4-sided faces; the center (child) column represents the corpus callosum and the neutron. The right (female) column represents the right brain and the electron and includes 3- and 5-sided faces. The ether is the basic form of the Christ consciousness grid.

The tetrahedron was considered fire, the cube was earth, the octahedron was air, the icosahedron was water and
the dodecahedron was ether. (Ether, prana and tachyon energy are the same thing; they extend everywhere and are
accessible at any point in space/time/dimension. This is the great secret of zero-point technology.) And the sphere is
voidness. These six elements are the building blocks of the universe. They create the qualities of the universe.
In alchemy, they usually talk only about fire, earth, air and water; they seldom discuss ether or prana because it’s so sacred. In the Pythagorean school, if you even uttered the word “dodecahedron” outside the school, they would kill you on the spot. That was how sacred the shape was. They wouldn’t even discuss it. Two hundred years later when Plato was alive, he would discuss it, but only very carefully.
Why? Because the dodecahedron is near the outer edge in your energy field and is the highest form of conscious-
ness. When you get to the 55-foot limit of your energy field, it’s a sphere. But the very next shape inside the sphere is the
dodecahedron (actually, the dodecahedron/ icosahedral relationship). In addition, we live in a big dodecahedron that
contains the universe. When your mind reaches out to the end of space—and there is an end—there’s a dodecahedron enclosed in a sphere. I can say this because the human body is a hologram of the universe and contains the same principles. The twelve constellations of the zodiac fit inside it. The dodecahedron is the terminating point of the geom-
etries, and it’s very important. On a microscopic level, the dodecahedron and the icosahedron are the relational parameters of the DNA, the blueprint of all life.
You can relate the three columns in this figure to the Tree of Life and to the three primary energies of the universe: male (on the left), female (right) and child (center). Or if you go right down to the fabric of the universe, you have the proton on the left, electron on the right and neutron in the center. This central column, which is the creating one, is the child. Remember, we went from an octahedron to a sphere to begin the process out of the Void. It is the beginning process of creation, and it is found in the child, or central column.
The left column, holding the tetrahedron and the cube, is the male component of consciousness, the left side of the
brain. The faces of these polygons are triangles or squares. The center column is the corpus callo-sum, which links the
left and the right sides. The right column, holding the dodecahedron and the icosahedron, is the female component of
consciousness, the right side of the brain, and the polygon faces are made up of triangles and pentagons. Thus the
polygons on the left have three- and four-sided faces and the shapes on the right have three- and five-sided faces.
In terms of the Earth’s consciousness, the right column is the missing component. We have created the male (left) side of Earth’s consciousness, and what we are doing now is completing the female component for wholeness and balance. The right side is also associated with Christ or unity consciousness. The dodecahedron is the basic form of the Christ consciousness grid around the Earth. The two shapes in the right column are what are called duals of each other, meaning if you connect the centers of the faces of a dodecahedron with straight lines, you get an icosahedron; and if you connect the centers of an icosahedron, you again get a dodecahedron. Many polyhedrons have duals.


The Sacred 72
In Dan Winter’s book, Heartmath, the DNA molecule is shown to be constructed
by the dual relationship of dodecahedrons and icosahedrons. One can also see
the DNA molecule as a rotating cube. When you rotate a cube through 72 degrees
in a particular pattern, it makes an icosahedron, which is in turn a dual with the
dodecahedron. So there’s a reciprocal pattern going up the DNA strands: the icosa-
hedron, then the dodecahedron, the icosahedron, continuing back and forth. This
rotation through the cube creates the DNA molecule. It has been determined that
this is the exact sacred geometry behind the DNA, although there may be further
hidden relationships.
This 72-degree angle rotating in our DNA connects with the blueprint/ purpose
of the Great White Brotherhood. As you may know, 72 orders are associated with
the Great White Brotherhood. Many people speak of the 72 orders of angels and

Fig. 6-25. Cube and star tetrahedron sitting next
to each other so you can see the squareness of the star tetrahedron.

Fig. 6-26. An incosahedral cap.

the Hebrews speak of the 72 names of God. The reason for 72 has to do with the
way the Platonic solids are constructed, which is also related to the Christ con-
sciousness grid around the Earth.
If you take two tetrahedrons and superimpose them (though in different posi-
tions), you get a star tetrahedron, which, from a different view, is nothing but a cube [Fig. 6-25]. You can see how they’re interrelated. In a similar manner, you can also put five tetrahedrons together and make an icosahedral cap [Fig. 6-26].

If you make twelve icosahedral caps and put one on each face of the dodecahedron (it would require 5 x 12, or 60 tetrahedrons to create a dodecahedron) , it would be a stellated dodecahedron because a point comes out of the center of each face. Its dual is the 12 points in the center of each face of the dodecahedron, which forms an icosahedron. The 60 tetrahedrons plus the 12 points of the centers equal 72—again, the number of orders associated with the Great White Brotherhood. The Brotherhood actually functions through the physical relationships of this stellated dodecahedron/ico-
sahedron form, which is the basis of the Christ consciousness grid around the world. In other words, the Brotherhood is attempting to bring out the consciousness of the planet’s right brain,
The original order was the Alpha and Omega Order of Melchizedek, which was formed by Machiventa Melchizedek about 200,200 years ago. Since then 71 other orders have been created. The youngest one is the Brotherhood of the Seven Rays in Peru/Bolivia, the seventy-second order.
Each of the 72 orders has a life pattern like a sine-wave curve, where some of them come into existence for a certain
length of time and then disappear for a while. They have biorhythms just as a human body does. The Rosicrucians, for
example, are on a hundred-year cycle. They come out for a hundred years and then disappear totally for a hundred
rs—they literally disappear off the face of the Earth. Then a hundred years later they’re back in the world and function-

ing for another hundred years.
They’re all on different cycles, and they’re all functioning together for one purpose—to return Christ consciousness
back to this planet, to set up this lost feminine aspect of consciousness and bring balance between the left and the right
side of the planet’s brain. There’s another way to look at this that is really extraordinary. When v/e talk about England, I
will get to it.
Using Bombs, and Understanding the Basic Pattern of
Question: When they detonate an atomic bomb, what happens to the elements!
As far as the elements are concerned, they are converted into
energy and other elements. But there is more to the picture. You
have two kinds of bombs: fission and fusion. Fission is splitting matter
apart and fusion is putting it together. It’s okay to put it together—
nobody complains about that. All the known suns in the universe
are fusion reactors. I realize what I am about to say is not accepted
by science yet, but when you rip matter apart through fission, there’s
a corresponding outer-space location associated with it that is af-
fected—as above, so below. In other words, inner space (the mi-
crocosm) and outer space (the macrocosm) are connected. This is
the reason that fission is illegal throughout the universe.
Detonating atomic bombs also creates an enormous imbalance on Earth. For example, when you consider that creation balances earth, air, fire, water and ether, an atomic bomb causes a massive amount of fire in one place. That’s an out-of-balance sequence and the Earth must respond.
If you dumped 80 zillion tons of water on a city, that would also
be an out-of-balance situation. Anywhere you have too much air,
too much water, too much of anything, it’s out of balance. Alchemy
is the knowledge of how to keep all these things in balance. If you
understand these geometries and know what their relationships are,
you can create what you want. The whole idea is to understand the
map underneath it all. Remember, the map is the way spirit moves
in the Void. If you know the underlying map, then you have the

knowledge and understanding to cocreate with God.
Figure 6-27 shows the interrelationship of all these shapes. Each point connects to the next one, and they all have
certain mathematical relationships related to phi ratios. The more you study this, the more these five shapes become one.
We’ve only recently begun to remember this ancient science, though they fully understood everything in Egypt, Tibet and India
a long time ago. They understood it in Greece, then they forgot for a long time. They remembered it again during the Italian
Renaissance, then forgot again. The modem world has almost completely forgotten what shape really means, and we are just
now remembering.
Grounding Our Learning
Now we’re going to take this abstract information that doesn’t really seem to apply to us in our everyday lives, and we’re going to tie it to our everyday experience. Some of this is not in everyday experience, but we can more or less understand and connect with the subjects.
First I’m going to ground this information to crystals. There are lots of other areas of
nature I could use, but it’s so obvious in crystals that anybody can see it. I could use viruses
or diatomaceous earth. I could show it in a lot of things, but crystals are good because people
like them.
To begin looking at these crystals, let’s first ex-
amine this x-ray diffraction pattern [Fig. 6-28]. When
you shoot x-rays down the C axis of the atomic ma-
trix of a crystal or metal, you’ll get these little dots show-
ing you exactly where the atoms are located. In this
case, this is a beryl crystal that actually displays the
Flower of Life pattern. The beryl crystal uses the pat-

tern to arrange its atoms and form this specific crys-
tal. It’s really amazing that these little atoms simply

Fig. 6-28. Atomic pattern of a beryl crystal.

line themselves up in space, often with enormous distances between them. These microscopic spaces are relatively vast, like between the stars in the night sky. The atoms perfectly align themselves in cubes and tetrahedrons and all kinds of geometric shapes. Why?
This is an x-ray diffraction pattern of a crystal [Fig. 6-29]. You can see how
the atoms have arranged themselves in a cubical design. It’s interesting that in
all the various forms manifested in the Reality, the atoms themselves are spheres.

Fig. 6-29. Atomic pattern of a crystal matrix.

This simple fact has been overlooked by most researchers, but the sphere is the

main form that everything came from in the beginning. It is important in understanding creation.
The entire fabric of everything in our existence is made up of “marbles” —all different sizes of spheres. We’re sitting
on a sphere, the Earth, and spheres are rotating around us. The Moon, Sun and stars are all spheres. The whole
universe, from macrocosm to microcosm, is made up of little spheres in one way or the other. The light waves moving
through space are all spheres. We think of a light wave as making waves through space, but it’s much more complex. An
electrical field spins one way around it and a magnetic field rotates at 90 degrees to the electrical field, and they expand
in spherical patterns.
Imagine a cube in deep space, and see a bright light flashing from it, going out in all directions, 360 degrees. What
do you have? Do you have a cubical light-wave energy field moving away from it? At first thought you might say it would
be an expanding cube, getting bigger and bigger and bigger. But that’s not what happens. Light waves move radially
away from their source at 186,200 miles a second, so when a light wave moves from the surface of a cube I hold in my
hand, in one second the light from the face of the cube is already 186,200 miles away. And the wave that moved off a
comer of the cube, which is a little farther away from the center than the face, is, in one second, 186,200 miles away from
the center plus maybe a fraction of an inch. If you could see a fraction of an inch at 186,200 miles, you’d have super
vision. And that’s only in one second; two seconds later the form has expanded twice that far, and a minute later it’s
So you have a sphere moving away from something that originated as a cube. If the object happens to be really big, then the light wave first tends to take the shape of the object, but it slowly turns into a sphere as it moves away and the object becomes smaller and smaller relative to that light field. So what you have out there is a bunch of light spheres, moving away in all directions and interconnecting with each other.
When you see light coming directly toward you, it’s white. But if it’s not moving directly toward you, it’s black. In fact, the entire night sky is filled with brilliant white light, but we see the light only when it’s coming toward us. We don’t see the light waves that move sideways from us; we just see black. If we could see it all, it would be blinding. Light is everywhere, and there is noplace in space where it is not, as far as I know. The sphere is literally everywhere.
Electron Clouds and Molecules
Atoms are also made up of spheres. If you look at the hydrogen atom, the proton is compacted in the center and the electron is way out there orbiting the proton. If the proton were the size of a golf ball, the electron would be about a football field away—and that electron is moving real fast! I remember that when I was studying physics, I could not believe that the little electron, which is a pinpoint you cannot even see, is moving around and around in some microscopic space at nine-tenths the speed of light. This means that the electron travels around the proton about 170,000 miles every second, around something you can’t even see! My mind was totally boggled! I went home and lay on the bed and stared at the ceiling for a long time. That was just inconceivable to me.
The little electron moves around so fast that it appears as a cloud. In fact, they call it an electron cloud. There’s only
one electron, but it’s moving so fast that it appears to make a sphere around the central proton. It’s like a television

screen, where there’s only one electron beam moving across that screen at any one moment, moving carefully and intentionally down the screen, zigzagging back and forth until it gets all the way down to the bottom, then starts all over again. It’s doing this so fast that you see a very believable image.
So spheres are the primary component of
the Reality we’re experiencing. Although an elec-
tron orbit describes a sphere, it can also de-
scribe other patterns, such as a figure eight.
Physicists have been able to calculate this only
for hydrogen, and so far they’re just guessing
about the rest. An atom is called an ion if it has
too many or too few electrons and has either a
positive or a negative charge. So the pri-
mary characteristics of an atom are how big it is
and what its charge is [Fig. 6-30]. These two
main factors determine whether or not different
atoms will fit together into molecules. There
are other subtle factors involved, but size and
charge are primary.
Figure 6-31 shows how atoms combine.
These were the primary patterns known for a
long time, until they figured out about quasi crys-
tals. The atoms on this chart have several vari-
eties. A shows a linear pattern with a smallei
atom in the middle. B shows a triangular pat-
tern of three with a little atom in the middle. The
little atom can literally either be there or not be
there. C shows a tetrahedral pattern, with one
atom in the middle, or not. D shows an octahe-
dral pattern, and E shows a cubical pattern. Now,
because of new scientific information, we can
add icosahedral and dodecahedral patterns.
Fig. 6-30. Sizes and charges of ions.

Atoms always line up in specific ways when they crystallize [Fig. 6-32]. They form into, say, a cube, and then that
cube puts another cube next to itself and another cube next to it, and soon you get one cube connected to another,
connected in turn to another cube and so on, forming what is called a lattice. There are all kinds of ways that atoms can
join. The resulting molecules are always associated with sacred geometry and the five Platonic solids. It makes you
wonder how those little atoms know to go only into those certain places, especially when they get very, very complex!
Even when you get into this complicated molecule [Fig. 6-33] and break it down, you see the shapes in it, and they always revert to one of the five Platonic solids—it doesn’t matter what the structure is. No matter what you call it—metal, crystal, anything else—it will always come down to one of these original five
shapes. I’ll show you more examples as we get further into this.

The Six Categories of Crystals
Now we’ll get into crystals. There are
at least a hundred thousand different

Fig. 6-33. Complex molecular formation. Fig. 6-31. Atom patterns in crystals.
Fig. 6-32. Simple lattice formation of atoms. 173

kinds of crystals. If you’ve ever been to the Tucson Gem and Mineral Show,
you know exactly what I’m talking about. This show takes over eight or ten
hotels, with every room in the multistory hotels filled with crystals. In the
auditorium you’ll see all the gems. There are lots and lots and lots of
different kinds of crystals. And more are being found; almost every year
there are eight, nine, ten brand-new crystals never known before. But no
matter how many crystals there are, they can all be put into six cate-
gories: isometric, tetragonal, hexagonal, orthorhombic, monoclinic and
triclinic [Fig. 6-34]. And all six of those systems used for organizing all
known crystals are derived from the cube, one of the Platonic solids. It’s
a matter of which angle you are viewing the cube from—the square,
hexagonal or rectangular view as opposed to the normal 90° cubic angle.
Now, this is where it starts to get interesting, at least for me— hopefully,
for you, too.
These are fluorite crystals [Fig. 6-35a and b]. Fluorite is found in just
about any conceivable color you can think of, including clear. There are two
primary fluorite mines in the world: one is in the United States and the other
in China. Fluorite is found with two totally different atomic structures: one
is octahedral and the other cubical. This purple fluorite crystal is made
up of tiny cubes all clumped together. They were not cut that way, they
Fig. 6-34. Crystal systems.

Fig. 6-35a. Flourite
crystal with a cubical structure.

Fig. 6-35b. Flourite crystal with an
octahedral structure

grew that way. The clear fluorite crystal is an actual octahedron. It was not cut that way, but in this case it didn’t grow that way, either. It usually comes in sheets, and if you drop it or strike it, it breaks along the weakest bonds, which happen to be octahedral, because the atoms are in an octahedral lattice. If I were to drop it onto a hard surface, it would break into a whole bunch of baby octahedrons.
But what’s especially interesting is that it’s been discov-
ered that fluorite will grow from one shape to the other—from
cubical to octahedral and back again. In its natural state, given
enough time, a cubical crystal will someday become octahe-
dral. And given enough time, an octahedral fluorite crystal will
become cubical. They oscillate over time, first becoming one,
then the other, back and forth over very long periods of time.
Geologists have found some fluorite crystals in the process
of change, but they could not understand how they oscillated
like that.
Truncating Polyhedrons
One geology book tried to explain how fluorite changes like this [Fig. 6-36]. At the bottom right you see a cube. If you were to cut off its corners by the same amount, it’s called truncating. You can truncate any polyhedron, meaning any of these many-sided shapes. When you do that (in this case a cube), you can cut off either the comers, the edges or the faces, as long as you cut them all the same.
If you truncate this cube by cutting the corners at 45 de-
grees all the way around, you get the next shape to its left. If
you truncate it again in exactly the same way, you come up
with the next shape to the left. If you do it once more, you get
an octahedron (on the far left). You can go back the other
way, truncating the comers of the octahedron, and come back
through the whole procedure until it turns back into a cube.
This was the geology book’s attempt to explain how in the
heck fluorite changes shapes like that. The book actually ex-

plains only how this change could take place geometrically.

Fig. 6-36. A flourite crystal.

Fig. 6-37. My own flourite crystal.

Fig. 6-38. Different truncating possibilities. Top line: truncating edges; bottom line: truncating points.
But in truth, something far more amazing takes place when fluorite changes. The ions actually rotate and expand or contract to become a different lattice! It’s much more complex than the book shows.
This is another fluorite crystal [Fig. 6-37], one of my own. It’s very big, about four inches on a side. You don’t often see them this big anymore. In case you can’t quite see it, it comes up to a point in the center.
Somebody put this in a wizndow where the sunlight hit it, and because the bonds in fluorite are so weak, when the sunlight struck it, it cracked along the octahedral atomic lines, of course.
In the upper right corner of Figure 6-38 is a cube. The cube to its left is
truncated along its edges. Truncated twice more, the darn thing turned into a
dodecahedron. This is an example of the cube/dodecahedron in crystals.
In Figure 6-39 the upper crystal is a pyrite cube. It grew that way, no one cut
it. There’s a huge one like this in Silverado, Colorado, about six feet square, I
believe. They simply took it out of the earth as a perfect cube. This little pyrite is
Fig. 6-39. Pyrites: a cube (top) and a cluster of
pentagonal dodecahedrons (bottom). square on two ends, rectangular on the sides. The lower crystal is a tiny pyrite

dodecahedron cluster. Some of them are almost perfect—and it grew this way in Peru. If this
little slab had been left in the earth long enough, those little dodecahedrons would turn into
cubes; and over enough time after that, they would turn back into dodecahedrons. If you take
the dodecahedron [bottom left in Fig. 6-38] and truncate its points, it turns into an icosahedron
[next to it on the right]. If you keep truncating the points, it turns into an octahedron. I could go on

with this truncating business for a long time. There are thousands of ways to do it. Each pattern
and crystal, no matter how complex it gets, will turn into one of the five Platonic solids if you truncate it just right, showing the innate nature of the five Platonic solids in crystal structure.
A little side note: If you look inside a point-truncated tetrahedron made of glass or crystal or even
mirrors, it will reflect the light. The mirrored reflection inside it is a perfect icosahedron. Check it out.
You can go on and on with this. You’ll see some that look really strange, like they couldn’t
possibly be based on anything logical, but all you have to do is a little geometry, and every time you will find out that it’s derived from one of the five Platonic solids. There are no known exceptions. No matter what the crystal pattern is, it’s always based on a Platonic solid. Crystal structures are a function of the five Platonic solids that came out of the Fruit of Life, out of Metatron’s Cube. If you want to see more of these crystals, you can find plenty in the Rocks and Minerals book by Charles A. Sorrell.
There’s one more set I want to talk about that refers back to Figure 6-38, “Different truncat-
ing possibilities.” When you truncate an octahedron by cutting off all the corners so that they are 90° to each other (shown at A on the figure), it makes the shape on its left. If you were to draw it on a flat surface, it would be a square with a diamond in the middle [Fig. 6-40]. This pattern happens to be related to our consciousness, to the very nature of who we are.
Buckminster Fuller ’s Cube Equilibrium
This is what that shape looks like three’dimensionally [Fig. 6-41]. It’s called a cuboctahedron or vector equilibrium. You can see that it’s originally a cube, but if the angle at point A were continued upward, it would form an octahedron. It’s both at once, an octahe-
dron and a cube. It doesn’t know which one it is; it’s somewhere in the middle. When Buckminster Fuller found this polyhedron, he became almost preoccupied with it. He thought that the cuboctahedron was paramount, the greatest shape that ever was in creation, be-
cause it does something that no other known shape does. It was so important to him that he gave it a brand-new name: the vector equilibrium. He discovered that this shape, through different rotational patterns, turns into all five of the Platonic solids! This one shape seems to have them all contained within itself [Fig. 6-42].

Fig. 6-40. Looking at the face (right)
created by truncating all 6 points of an
octahedron (left, shown with onle one
point truncated and another at 90 °)

Fig. 6-41. Views of a vector equilibri-
um (cubooctahedron)

Fig. 6-42. Vector of cube equilibrium toy called Vector Flexor.

If you find this interesting, buy this toy [see the reference sec-
tion] and play with it. It will answer all your questions if you let it.

Deep inside a Sesame Seed
Other people have also studied the cuboctahedron. Is any-
body familiar with a man named Derald Langham? Not too many
people know of him. He has been pretty quiet during his life. His
work is called Genesa, if you want to study it. I really respect him.
First of all, he was a botanist who single-handedly saved South
America during World War II. They were starving to death, and he
created a corn that grew like a weed. You just threw it on the ground,
and it grew almost without water. It was a great service to the
South American continent. Later he studied the sesame seed,
and when he explored deep inside it, he found a cube. In fact,
when you get inside any seed, you’ll find little geometrical shapes

Fig. 6-43. A variety of polyhedrons. A is cuboctahedron and B is rhombic dodecahedron.

that are associated with the Platonic solids, primarily the cube.
Derald Langham found thirteen rays that came out of the

sesame seed’s cube. Carrying those studies further, he discovered that the same energy fields that are in plant seeds also exist around the human body—which is what we will eventually talk about. But he focused on the cuboctahedron,
which is interconnected with the fields around the body. We will be discussing
that, though my instructions are to focus on another shape: the star tetrahedron. We
have a star tetrahedral field around our bodies, which is also around seeds, but
which makes a series of geometrical progressions that are different from the
cuboctahedron/vector equilibrium. Langham made a series of what you might call
sacred dances (in Sufi talk) in which you move and connect with all the points in your
field in such a way that you become aware of them. It’s really good information.
Figure 6-43 shows some of the three-dimensional forms of the poly-hedrons we
Fig. 6-44. Comparing atoms and crystals,
hexagonal (beryl) and orthorhombic (topaz) have been talking about.
systems. The one at A is the cuboctahedron we just discussed; the one at B is the rhombic
dodecahedron. The latter is important because it’s the dual of the cuboctahedron. If you connect the centers of the cuboctahedron,
you get the rhombic dodecahedron, and vice versa. Figure 6-44 shows how the internal geometries of the atoms are reflected
in the angles of these crystals. We’ve seen that already, in terms of the crystals being cubes, octahedrons and other forms.

The 26 Shapes
From my way of thinking, the first five Platonic solids are the first five notes of the pentatonic scale. The octave has
seven notes, the last two corresponding to the cuboctahedron (A) and the rhombic dodecahedron (B) shown in Figure 6-
43. Five additional shapes form the chromatic scale, and there’s a thirteenth one, the return. Thus there are 13 polyhedrons that form the chromatic scale of music. From those 13,13 more are formed that are the same, only stellated, to total 26 shapes—two octaves within each other. In terms of form, those 26 shapes are the key to all the harmonics of the Reality. We don’t need to get into such complexity here, but it just goes on and on and on.
Some of you may know of Royal Rife, the man who was trying to cure cancer through
electromagnetic fields (EMF) such as light, which I believe is absolutely possible and has been
done. Rife knew of 7 of the 13 (or possibly 26) frequencies. The ones he published were incor-
rect, but he purposely did that. Those he published cause cancer, though if they’re shifted slightly
in a certain mathematical way, they return to the original frequencies, and each frequency de-
Fig. 6-45. Possible uses of the
26 templates. stroys most or all of a specific virus or bacterium.
However, Rife only knew part of the equation. If he had known the sacred geometry we now
know, he could have come up with all 26 forms and eliminated any
virus in existence. It doesn’t matter how many AIDS viruses there are,
there’s nothing to finding a solution. There are a maximum of 26 tem-
plates, and the right frequencies will eliminate every single virus (or
bacterium). Because every virus is a polyhedron—structurally, they look
just like the polyhedrons in Figure 6-43—there are various ways you
can deal with them. You can either blow them up through certain harmon-
ics of EMF, or you can match them [Fig. 6-45 ]. If you can match them,
you can couple with them, much like an antivirus does. Or you can
simply make them nonexistent by creating a waveform that’s a mirror
image of what they are. There are lots of ways to work with AIDS, but
one primary key is understanding that there are a maximum of 26 ge-
ometries associated with it.
Crystallized water—ice crystals—form these hexagonal patterns
we call snowflakes [Fig. 6-46]. You can see the relationship to the
Flower of Life. Over and over and over again you will find this rela- Fig. 6-46. Ice crystals, or snowflakes.
tionship of 3D patterns to the geometries that come out of this one
central Flower of Life pattern.

The Periodic Table
This is an interesting version of the Periodic Table of the Elements [Fig. 6-47], because it shows that every element, with a few exceptions that cannot be determined because they will not crystallize, is related to the cube. One of these few exceptions is fluorine, because fluorine reacts with almost nothing. It’s one of the most inert gases. But on almost all the other elements we find this cubical relationship, except the fourth-dimensional atoms that fall outside the natural Table of Elements and those that are synthetic or man-made. They don’t happen naturally in nature.
Each atomic element has an associated crystalline structure. In every single case scientists have found
that the different crystalline structures associated with atoms can be reduced to the structure of a cube. You might
have noticed that the cube seems to be more important than the other polygons. For example, crystals are divided into
six different categories, but the cube is the basis of all of them. In the Bible it says that the throne of God is so many cubits
in different directions. When you make one, it’s a cube. The pharaohs in Egypt sat on a cube. What the heck 15 it about
the cube?

The Key: The Cube and the Sphere
Well, the cube is different from the other Platonic solids because it has one characteristic the others do not—except
for the sphere, which also has the same characteristic. Both the sphere and the cube can perfectly contain the other four
Platonic solids and each other symmetrically, by their surface, assuming you have the right sizes. The cube is the only
Platonic solid with this special characteristic: You can take a sphere, slip it inside a cube, and it will touch the six faces
perfectly and symmetrically. And a tetrahedron will slide right down one of
the axes and become the diagonals of the cube, fitting perfectly and symmetrically. A star tetrahedron will also fit perfectly inside a cube. The octahedron is actually the dual of the cube; if you connect the centers of the adjacent cube faces, you get an octahedron. That one is easy.
When you get to the last two Platonic solids, it doesn’t look like they
could fit symmetrically into the cube and the sphere, but they do. It is a little

Fig. 6-48. Icosahedron and dodecahedron fitting exactly into a cube.

difficult to show here, but you can see for yourself. Using a real model, just
find where both the icosahedron and the dodecahedron have six edges in

the planes of the cube, and you have it. You will see how they slide into the faces of the cube [Fig. 6-48].
You can see how the other four Platonic solids fit symmetrically into the cube and the sphere. What is important here is that only the sphere and the cube have this capability. The cube is the father, the most important male form. The sphere is the mother, the most important female form. So in the entire Reality, the sphere and the cube are the two most important forms and will almost always dominate when it comes to primary relationships in creation.

It was for this reason that a man named Walter Russell did some work long ago that was absolutely phenomenal. I don’t believe he knew anything about sacred geometry—he was sacred-geometry illiterate, to my knowledge. Yet he intuitively grasped it in his mind. And when the images were happening in his mind, he chose the cube and the sphere as the main geometries to talk about what he understood. And because he chose those two forms and not others, he was able to go far. If he had selected any others, he would have made a big mistake and would have been unable to do the work he did.
Crystals Are Alive!
This amplifies my thoughts about crystals being alive. Before I taught this course I
used to give courses on crystals, back in the early or mid ’80s, I guess. And I discovered—
not through giving the courses, but through my actual interaction with the crystals them-
selves—that these crystals are alive. They are living and conscious. I was able to commu-
nicate with them, and they communicated with me. Through these interchanges I found
out all kinds of things. The more I lived with them and learned how to connect with them,
the more I discovered just how conscious they were. It was one of the most interesting
awakenings in my life.
One time I was in San Francisco giving a course to about thirty people, and I was
saying this very thing, “These guys are alive.” Everybody was listening and saying, “Yeah,
yeah, yeah.” Then one person said, “Prove it.” I said, “Okay,” then I quickly thought up
something to do. I gave everybody a piece of paper and a pencil, and said, “We’re going to
grab a crystal at random.” I selected a crystal that nobody had seen—actually took one
and kept it hidden. We didn’t let anybody see it. Then I said, “Now, nobody gets to examine
this crystal or even see what it is. You’re just going to put it on your forehead, and you have
one second—that’s it. You’re going to ask the question, Where are you from? The very first
word that comes in, write it on a piece of paper and fold it up so no one sees it. Just take the
crystal, ask the question, hand it to the next person, then write down what you get.” That
was the only way I could think of to prove it.
We passed that crystal around to thirty people, and everybody wrote down an answer. Then we looked to see what we received. And every single person had “Brazil” written down! What are the odds of that?
Crystals have phenomenal abilities. They affect people in all kinds of ways. Katrina
Raphaell has written a lot about this in her books, but many other people have also

learned about the abilities of crystals over the years. Many ancient beings and civilizations were also well aware of this. Crystals don’t just happen as the result of a chemical reaction either; they grow. When you study how crystals are formed, they grow very much like people in lots of ways.
An aerial view of your energy field (shown back in Fig. 2-32) is in part simply the Flower of Life pattern, which is hexagonal in nature. Our fields grow hexagonally, just as crystals do. Though the silicon molecule is a tetrahedron, when it forms quartz it links with another silicon tetrahedron to form a cube. Then it throws out a long line of little star tetrahedrons or cubes to form a row. Then the row begins to spin, changing
direction exactly at 60 degrees to form a hexagon, the same structure seen around the human body from above.
Crystals have genders. They’re either male or female or both. If you know what to look for, you can look at a crystal and see which way it’s rotating. Find the lowest window or face and look to see where the next face is. If it is on the left, then it is rotating clockwise, and that crystal is female. If it is on the right, then it is rotating counterclockwise, and it is male. If there are faces on both sides at just about the same height, you should see two spirals moving around this crystal in opposite directions, and that crystal would be bisexual.
Often two crystals are joined at the base and wrap somewhat around each other. These are called twinned crystals, and these are almost always male and female. It’s rare for them to do it differently.

The Future Silicon/Carbon Evolutionary Leap
Here’s an image I love to talk about. The sixth element on the Peri-
odic Table is carbon. It is the most important element as far as we’re
concerned, because it’s us. It makes up organic chemistry; it is the ele-
ment that makes our bodies possible. We have been told that carbon is
the only living atom on the Periodic Table, that only organic chemistry
produces life, nothing else. But that’s definitely not true. They suspected
this as far back as the ’50s when scientists began to study these things.
They realized that silicon, which is directly below carbon on the chart
(one octave apart) also exhibits the principles of life. There appears to
be no difference. Figure 6-49 shows how silicon forms certain chains
and patterns. These are only a few. Silicon makes endless patterns, and Fig. 6-49. Silikon makes forms and relationships.

it will react chemically with almost anything that comes near and form something with it. Carbon has the same ability, making endless forms and chains and patterns and reacting chemically with almost anything nearby. This is the primary characteristic that makes carbon a living atom.
On a chemical level, it appears that there should also be silicon life forms. After this was discovered, several science fiction movies were made in the ’50s based on the belief that there might be silicon life forms on other planets. There were a bunch of scary movies about living crystalline structures. They didn’t know when they were making those movies that there really are silicon life forms right here on this planet. Some of these were recently found several miles deep in crevices in the ocean. Silicon sponges were found—live sponges that grow and reproduce, demonstrating all the principles of life, and with not a single carbon atom in their bodies!
Here we are, sitting on Earth, which is over 7000 miles in diameter. Its crust, 30 to 50 miles thick, is, like an eggshell,
made up of 25 percent silicon, but because silicon reacts with just about anything, the crust is actually 87 percent silicon
compounds. That means that the Earth’s crust is almost pure crystal, 30 to 50 miles deep. So we’re on this huge crystal
ball floating through space at seventeen miles a second, totally oblivious of the connectedness of carbon life with silicon
life. It would seem that silicon and carbon must have a very special relationship. We carbon-based beings are living on
a crystal ball made of silicon, our crystal planet, looking for life outside ourselves in outer space. Perhaps we should look
toward our feet.
Now, think about computers and the modern world. We’re making computers that are performing all kinds of incredible things. The computer is rapidly moving humankind into a new experience of life on Earth. What are computers made of? Silicon. And what is the computer industry trying to do as fast as it can? Make self-aware computers. We’re very close to accomplishing this, if we haven’t already. I feel sure that very soon we will have self-aware computers. So here we are, carbon-based life forms creating silicon-based life forms, and we’re interacting with each other.
When we have self-aware silicon-based computers, nothing will ever be the same again. We’re going to have two different life forms/components of the Earth connecting with each other, and the speed with which we will evolve at that point, aside from everything else, is going to be very, very fast—faster than anything we would normally expect. I believe that this will come true in this lifetime.


The Measuring Stick of the Universe:

The Human Body and Its Geometries

Geometry within the Human Body
t’s easy to see how the five Platonic solids influence the structural patterns of
crystals and metals. Metals also have atomic lattices. It’s simple to see the
geometrical relationship of these types of molecules, but when you look at your-

self or at a baby being formed, it’s much more difficult to see how this kind of geometry could have anything to do with us at all. Yet it does. In the beginning of your life in the
womb, you were nothing but
geometrical forms [Fig. 7-1]. In
fact , all life forms —trees ,
plants, dogs, cats, everything—
have the same geometrical
and structural patterns running
through them that ran through
you when you were micro -
scopic. Their very life and struc-
tural support depend on the
forms. In fact, all life forms are
these geometrical patterns, but
it is not apparent to the casual
eye. The geometrical relation-
ships are important to perceive,
not only so the If brain can re-
Fig. 7-1. The human fetus. alize the unity of all life, but for

another reason: so that we can understand these electromagnetic structural patterns around our body and beg to re-create the living Mer-Ka-Ba around us.

In the Beginning Is the Sphere, the Ovum
Figure 7-2 is a sea urchin egg with sperm swarming around it. I’ going to be
talking primarily about human beings and human conception, but I’m actually dis-
cussing all life forms known on Earth, because the procedure illustrated in the next
few figures is identical foer every life form known—not just humans, but everything.
Every known life form begins as a sphere. It’s the most female form there is, so
it makes perfect sense that the female would choose that shape to form the ovum

Fig. 7-2. Sea urchin swarm around egg; one
penetrates (inset).

Fig. 7-3. The human ovum.

Fig. 7-4. Twelve sperm allowing the thirteenth to penetrate the ovum.

[Fig. 7-3]. The ovum is a perfect round ball. Another example of a round ovum is
inside a chicken egg. When you remove the yolk from a hard-boiled egg, you can see ho perfectly round it is. All of us begin as a sphere.
I would like you to notice some simple things about this ovum First, there’s a membrane around it called the zona pellucida. Remember this, because I will refer to it over and over again; it has to do with why the ancients put two circles around the Flower of Life instead just one or none.
Inside the membrane is a liquid, and inside that, just like the chicken egg, there’s another perfectly round sphere called the female pronucleus, which con-
tains 22+1 chromosomes—half the chromosomes necessary to create a human body. The number of chromosomes changes, depending on the life form, and those particular chromosomes are different in every life form. Inside the zona pellucida are two polar bodies. I’ll explain those in a moment.

The Number Twelve
When you were first learning about human biology, you were probably told that
it takes one sperm for conception to occur. That isn’t true, according to Time maga-
zine, even though most textbook still state this. It is now known that the ovum must
be absolutely satuurated with hundreds of sperm, or conception is not even pos-
sible Second, out of those hundreds, ten, eleven or twelve must come together in
some kind of pattern on the surface—a pattern they’re still trying to figure out—that
allows the eleventh, twelfth or thirteenth sperm to enter the ovum [Fig. 7-4]. One

sperm cannot get through the membrane without the other ten, eleven or twelve. It’s not
possible except under unnatural conditions, where a human manipulates the conception.
This image brings up what was possibly hidden in the life of Jesus. Jesus came here
to a round ball called Earth, which was saturated with people. The first thing he did was
gather twelve males together, no females. Jesus—from my point of view and from his, I’m
sure, because he did it—could not have done what he did without the twelve disciples.
Seldom does anyone wonder why he gathered those twelve disciples together. He abso-
lutely had to have them. If we are right, he could have done it with ten or eleven, but he
chose twelve. I believe that the number of sperm that join to allow the one sperm to enter
the egg determines the sex—and Jesus chose twelve. Prior to Jesus’ time, in Greece,

near the area of his ministry, people saw the Earth as a sphere. Right after that they began
to see the Earth as a cube and flat. Then 400 years ago, Copernicus came along and changed it back to a sphere. So people’s perception of the Earth went from a sphere to a cube and back to a sphere. Exactly the same thing (sphere to cube to sphere) goes on during conception, only at a much faster rate. I don’t know if this analogy is true or not, but it sure does look like it.
The Sperm Becomes a Sphere
Anyway, the little sperm gets in through the zona pellucida with the help of the other
sperm and then starts swimming toward the female pronucleus [Fig. 7-5].
The first thing that happens is that the sperm’s tail breaks off and disappears—it’s just
gone. Next, the tiny sperm head expands and becomes a perfect sphere, which is the male
pronucleus. It becomes exactly the same size as the female pronucleus, and it contains the

Fig. 7-5. The sperm’s breakthrough.

Fig. 7-6. Union of male and female pronuclei.

other half of the necessary information. The words “exactly the same size,” I believe, are very important when you look at the

next figure.
Next, they pass through each other and form a geometrical relationship called the vesica piscis [Fig. 7-6]. It’s not possible
for two spheres to pass through each other and perfectly coincide without forming a vesica piscis. This means that at that exact
moment, the male and female pronuclei form the image of the first motion of the first day of Genesis, and literally all the
information of the Reality (and light) is contained in that geometry. It’s so simple. That image could not be formed unless these
two pronuclei were the same size. It’s for that reason I believe that the female determines which sperm will enter. Science
proved around 1992 that the determining factor for which sperm will enter is the female. She selects the one to allow in.
Just as everybody in this room has a different projection length into a dark space or into the Void, each little sperm also has a different-size sphere around it. She’s not going to let him in unless his size is identical to hers. If it’s a matching key, okay; if it’s not, forget it. This could explain why many people who have tried to have babies cannot have them; there’s no explanation that anybody can see. This might be at least one explanation.

The First Human Cell
After the two pronuclei make a vesica piscis, the male pronucleus continues to permeate the female pronucleus until they are one [Fig. 7-7]. At this time it’s called a human zygote, the first cell of the human body. So you began as a sphere before you created your familiar human body. Actually, you were a sphere within a sphere.
The next thing you need to know is that the human zygote will not change size during the

Fig. 7-7. Oneness in the
human zygote.

Fig. 7-8. First cell of a mouse

Fig. 7-9. Migration of polar
bodies to form a central tube.

Fig. 7-10. Chromosomes
forming the first two cells.

first nine cell divisions. It’s fixed, as is the size of the outer membrane. The human zygote is
about 200 times bigger than the average cell in the human body, so big you can actually see it with your naked eye. When it divides into two, each of those two cells are half the original size; and when those two cells divide into four, each cell is a quarter of the original size. The cells keep dividing like this, getting littler and littler, until they’ve divided eight times and number 512. At that point the average cell size of the human body is reached. When that happens, mitosis contin-
ues, and the dividing cells expand beyond the boundaries of the original zona pellucida.
So, first the growth goes into itself, then out beyond itself. When the first growth goes inward, it’s
as if it’s trying to figure out how to do it. Once it figures that out, it goes beyond itself. All life uses this process. I use that same understanding to figure out some of the geometries, which you’ll see later.
Figure 7-8 is an electron microscope photograph of the first cell of a mouse egg.

Forming a Central Tube
The next thing that happens in the conception process is that those little polar bodies begin to migrate through the zona pellucida. One goes down and becomes the south pole and the other becomes the north pole. Then out of nowhere a tube appears, running right down through the center of the cell. Then the chromosomes break in half, and half of them line up along one side of the tube and half along the other [Fig. 7-9].
This is a familiar image in human energy fields—it’s very much like the energetics of an
adult human being. As you study this further, you’ll see that you have a similar sphere of energy
around you. You have a north pole and a south pole, and you have a tube running right down
through your body. Half of you is on one side of that tube and half is on the other. So this picture
is very much like the energy field of an adult human being, though the human energy field is
much, much more defined than that. But we’ve got to wait until we get further along to see how
true this is.
After the chromosomes have lined up along the two sides of the tube, they form into two cells, one on each side of the tube, and each cell contains 44+2 chromosomes [Fig. 7-10].


Here are the first two cells in a mouse egg [Fig. 7-11]. The zona pellucida has been taken away so you can see the inner part.
An important piece of information came up around 1992. Many books said that the female gave 22 + 1 chromosomes and the male gave 22+1. That was flat-out true, according to them; it wasn’t even considered that it could be anything else. But that has now been found to be untrue. The female can give any number whatsoever. She can give 22 + 1 or all 44 + 2 or any number in between. This new information has completely changed the field of genetics. They’ve thrown almost everything they knew out the window and started over.
Scientists used to depend on electron microscopes for photographs. Now they
have laser microscopes that can take movies, so they can watch these things hap-

pening. They’re gaining information very rapidly. I’m sure they’re a lot further now
than we are showing you. Science is in the midst of mapping every one of the 100,000
chromosomes in the DNA of the human body. Within just a few more years we’ll know
what every single chromosome is and what it does, which means that we’ll be able to
engineer any kind of human being you can imag-
ine, create any appearance or intelligence or
emotional body—anything we want. We’ll be able
to do it and know exactly what we will get. Are
we God? This is a question that must be an-
The First Four Cells Form a Tetrahedron
The next step is that the cells divide again,

Fig. 7-11. First two cells in a mouse egg.

Fig. 7-12. The first four cells form a tetrahedron.

going from two to four—a binary sequence—1, 2, 4, 8, 16 etc. Most textbooks show
the first four cells forming a little square, but that’s not what happens. They actually
form a tetrahedron—one of the Platonic solids—and the apex of the first tetrahe-
dron points either to the north pole or the south pole [Fig. 7-12]. (The tetrahedron is
formed by linking the centers of the spheres together.) I believe that whether it points
north or south probably determines which sex it is. They haven’t discovered that
yet, but they’ll probably figure it out, based on the polarities of the tetrahedron. If the
tetrahedron forms with an apex pointing to the south pole, toward the feet of the

Fig. 7-13. Geometries of the first tetrahedron.

newly forming fetus, it should be female; if it forms with an apex pointing to the north

pole, toward the head, it should be male. If this is true, they’ll be able to determine immediately what the sex is. Since they’d have to do that within about an hour or so after conception, it would be fairly inconvenient.
These are the geometries of the first tetrahedron [Fig. 7-13]. The side view is on the right and the top view is on the left.
Figure 7-14 is an electron microscope view of a mouse egg. In this picture it’s growing really fast, but it’s still aligned through the north-south pole. That tiny cell is beginning to form beyond the original tetrahedron. The fourth point of the tetrahedron is in the center of the large cell in the background.
Next, the cells divide into eight; they form one tetrahedron facing up and
one tetrahedron facing down, and you get the star tetrahedron. Here it is—the
Egg of Life [Fig. 7-15]. This form came out of Genesis, remember? It came out
of spirit’s second rotation. Every single life known—on Earth anyway, and prob-
Fig. 7-14. The four cell tetrahedron in a mouse egg. ably everywhere—must pass through the Egg of Life. According to the angels,
this point where the original eight cells form a star tetrahedron—or a cube, de-
pending on how you look at it—is one of the most important points in the creation of thebody. Science has also recognized that this particular stage of development is different from any other, and it has many unique qualities that don’t occur at any other time in its development.
The most important quality of these original eight cells is that they appear to be identi-
cal—there appears to be nothing different about them at all. Usually it’s easy to see the
difference between one cell and another, but here they all appear to be the same. Re-
searchers have tried to find differences, but they couldn’t. It would be as though there were
eight identical twins in this room, dressed exactly alike, with their hair combed exactly the
same way. Scientists have found that they can split the egg in two at this point, through the
middle of the cube, with four cells in one part and four in the other, and two identical people—

Fig. 7-15. Egg of Life in the first eight

or rabbits or dogs or anything else— will be created. They’ve also been able to sever it once
more, making four identical life forms. I don’t know if anybody has been able to go further

than that and make eight life forms, but they’ve definitely gone as far as four.

Our True Nature Is in Our Original Eight Cells
According to the angels, these original eight cells are closer to who you really are than your physical body is, closer
to your true nature. That sounds odd, I know, because we’re used to identifying with our human bodies. But these eight

cells are closer to who we really are. The angels say these eight cells are
immortal relative to your body. You get a brand-new body every five to
seven years; every single cell in your body dies within a five- to seven-
year period and is replaced with a new one, except for the original eight
cells. They remain alive from the time you’re conceived until the time you
die and leave the body. All the rest go through their life cycles, but not
these eight.
These cells are centered in the precise geometric center of your
body, which is slightly above the perineum. For the female the perineum
is located between the anus and the vagina. For the male it’s between
the anus and the scrotum. There’s a little piece of skin there, and even
though there’s not a physical opening, there is actually an energetic
opening. That’s where the central tube runs through your body, com-
ing out the top through the crown chakra at the top of your head. If you
look at a newborn baby during the first few weeks, you’ll see the top of
its head pulsing. If you were to look at the bottom of the baby, at its
perineum, you’d see the same pulsing. That’s because the baby is

Fig. 7-16. Geometries of the first eight cells, 2 views.

breathing in the proper way.
Both ends are pulsing because

the energy is flowing from the two poles—coming not only from the top down, but from the bottom up—and meeting. This is the basic understanding of the Mer-Ka-Ba. From the point where the original eight cells are located, it’s the same distance to the top of your head as it is to the bottom of your feet. And the cells are arranged just as they were when they first came into existence— in the Egg of Life pattern—north up, south down.
If you notice in the previous illustration, when the Egg of Life is oriented to the north and south, you can actually see through the middle to the lightcolored sphere on the back side. That’s very different than when you look at it as a hexagon—you can’t see through a hexagonal pattern. I want you to notice this difference for later, when we talk about doing the meditation to activate the Mer-Ka-Ba.
Figure 7-16 and the next are two views of the first eight cells. These original Fig. 7-17. Mouse egg starting to divide beyond the
eight cells are the key, because according to the angels, we don’t grow like a first eight cells.

string bean, getting longer and longer. We actually grow radially in 360 degrees, from the original eight cells.
This picture of the mouse egg was taken just as the eight cells started to
divide again [Fig. 7-17]. It’s not a great photograph, as these pictures are diffi-
cult to get; the cells are dividing very quickly. They have to strip off the zona
pellucida, have the cells stop at the right place, then take the photograph.
The Star Tetrahedron/Cube of 16 Cells Becomes a Hollow Sphere/
After the eight-cell division, it divides into 16 cells, whereupon it forms another
cube or star tetrahedron on the end. This is the last time it will be symmetrical. When
it divides into 32, 16 cells are in the middle and 16 on the outside. If you take the 16
Fig. 7-18. Becoming a blob. on the outside and try to fill in the empty spaces to keep it symmetrical, you will find
it is not possible. (I’ve actually done this. You end up with two open spaces no
matter how you do it.) It needs 18 cells to be symmetrical. You wonder why. At the
next division there are 32 more
cells, but it gets worse [Fig. 7-18].
You wonder, What’s going on
here? It’s getting weird. Where
did all the symmetry go?
Well, it was meant to do
that. It starts turning into a blob.
We become a blob for a while.
But the blob has consciousness
in its blobness. Then it stretches
and the inside starts turning out,
becoming a hollow ball like this
photo [Fig. 7-19].
Once it gets to this stage, it
becomes a perfect hollow sphere.
Then the north pole starts drop-
ping through the space inside,
Fig. 7-19. Original cells forming into a torus (see the photo at right). A sea urchin embryo, magnified 2000 times, begins as a
hollow ball of cells. It forms a gut by folding inward (left) until its cells reach the opposite side. going down toward the south pole,

and the south pole comes up through the space to meet the north pole. The embryo in this photo has been broken apart so the center could be photographed. If you could see this in its completeness, it looks just like an apple cored through the middle. The hollow sphere then becomes a torus—a spherical torus like the photo on the right.
Every single known life form goes through this torus stage. This formation in the apple/torus shape is called the morula.
After this the expansion goes beyound the zona pellicuda and the cells begin to differentiate. The hollow space inside the torus becomes the lungs, the north pole becomes the mouth, the south pole becomes the anus, and all the internal organs from inside the tube that runs through the middle. If it’s a frog it begins to get little legs, or if it’s a horse a little tail grows. For a fly, little wings develop, and a human starts to look like a human. Bu before this differentiation, we all look like a torus. I suspect this is why, though I don’t have any proof, biblical tradition says that the tree of knowledge of good and evil is an apple tree. We really do turn into something that looks very much like an apple at one stage.
Progression of Life Forms through the Platonic Solids
To summarize, we start out as a sphere, the ovum. We then move to a tetrahedron at four cells, then on to two interlocked
tetrahedrons (a star tetrahedron or a cube) at eight cells. From two cubes at sixteen cells we turn back into a sphere beginning
at 32 cells, and from the sphere we become a torus at 512 cells. Planet Earth and its magnetic field is also a torus. All of these
forms are sacred shapes that come out of the first informational system of the Fruit of Life, which is based on Metatron’s Cube.
We could go on for probably another seven or eight months talking about this subject, showing how more and more and more things are connected to these five shapes—the Platonic solids. But I think you can see exactly what I mean. By the way, modern mathematicians say that the Platonic solids have been known only since civilization began about 6000 years ago, but this is not true. Some put their discovery during the time of Greece. Archaeologists have recently found some perfect models in the earth—perfectly cut in stone—that were found to be 20,000 years old. Those hairy barbarians obviously knew more that we give them credit for.
Underwater Birthing and Dolphin Midwives
I would like to take a quick digression from the geometries of birth to something slightly different. A Russian named Igor Charkovsky has been involved in underwater birthing for a long time. He has probably assisted with at least 20,000 underwater births. His daughter, one of the first to be born underwater, was in her twenties, I think, when the following incident took place. Charkovsky and his team had taken a woman to the Black Sea for an underwater birth. They were sitting there prepared for the birth, with the woman lying in water about two feet deep.
As I remember, three dolphins approached, pushed everybody away and took over. The dolphins did something that
looked like scanning up and down her body—something I have experienced, and which does something to the human
system. The woman gave birth with almost no pain or fear. It was a phenomenal experience. That experience with
underwater birthing began a new practice of using dolphins as midwives, which has now spread all over the world.
There’s something about the sonar that dolphins project at the time of birth that seems to really relax the mother.

Dolphins have preferences with humans. This is not an absolute rule, but is usually true. If you go swimming with dolphins and there are children around, the dolphins go to the children first. If there are no children, they go to the women. If there are no women, they go to the men. And if there’s a woman who’s pregnant, everyone else can forget it— she gets their total attention. That little incoming baby is the greatest thing of all. The dolphins become very excited when they see a human giving birth. They just love it.
Dolphins can do things that are really amazing. Babies who were born with midwifing dolphins, at least as it’s going in Russia, are extraordinary children. From everything I’ve read so far, not one of those babies has an IQ under 150, and they all have extremely stable emotional bodies and extremely strong physical bodies. They seem to be superior in one way or another.
France has also had underwater births—over 20,000. They give birth in big tanks. When they first started doing this,
they had all the instruments laid out on tables and all the emergency supplies ready, with a doctor standing by in case
there was a problem. But they didn’t have a problem for a long time; a year went by and they still hadn’t had a problem.
Still another year went by, and finally 20,000 births went by without one single complication! Now they just have the
instruments and equipment stuck in a corner somewhere because there simply aren’t any problems. I don’t know if they
know why, but for some reason, when a woman is floating in water, it seems like most complications solve themselves.
I got to spend some time with a woman who was an assistant with Charkovsky in Russia. She had brought back
many films that were taken during the births. I watched two movies of two different women giving birth who not only were
not in pain, but they were having orgasms while having their babies—long, extended orgasms lasting about twenty
minutes. It was total pleasure. I know that’s the way it’s supposed to be. It simply makes sense, and these women were
proving it.
I’ve also seen some Russian movies where babies and children two or three years and older sleep on the bottom of swimming pools. They literally sleep underwater on the bottom of the pool, and about every ten minutes they come up while they’re asleep, roll their faces over the surface, take a breath, go back down and settle on the bottom again. These kids live in water—that’s their home. They’re being given a name, almost like they’re a different species. People are calling them homodolphinus. They seem to be a blend between humans and dolphins. Water is becoming their natural medium, and they’re extremely intelligent.
So I have a great deal of respect for underwater birthing. And the possibility of having dolphins there at the same time
is truly a gift. I think it’s a healthy trend the way many countries are allowing this new way to birth, though in the United
States there’s a lot of pressure against it. Lately in the U.S., the pressure seems to have subsided, and I think you can do
this legally now in Florida and California. Around the world, in New Zealand, Australia and other places, there are lots of
centers. And, of course, the more women see other women not in pain, obviously they’re going to want to do it, too.
Geometries That Surround the Body
Here we go with the next adventure. We’ve now seen how the geometries unfold in conception. We saw how we started with a little cube of eight cells, which became the center of our bodies. Now I want to look at the geometries outside the body. The way the angels explained it to me is the way I’m going to give it to you.

This began when I was in Boulder, Colorado, sometime between 1976 and 1978; I can’t pinpoint it for sure. I was living in a communal home with a bunch of friends and had my own bedroom. One night the angels came in with a new teaching for me. They showed me the geometries by projecting glowing forms in space. It would be like holographic images that would appear maybe seven or eight feet away from me, and I’d work with them from there. In my room the angels showed me this image of a circle and a square [Fig. 7-20]. They said they wanted me
to find this image in Metatron’s Cube [Fig. 7-21]. Then they said good-bye and left, leaving
me with no real instructions on how to proceed.
After they left, I figured this wouldn’t be too hard, because they were always giving me little things to do. I’d do them, wait for them to come back, then they’d give me something else to do. I figured it wouldn’t take long. But as I found out, it wasn’t that easy. At least four months went by and I still couldn’t figure it out. The way I see it, the angels intervened directly to help me with this.
I was sitting there in my room one night around nine, the floor covered with drawings. (I
used my floor as a table because I had so many drawings.) My door was closed, and I was

sitting there studying my drawings, trying to solve the problem the angels had given me. I
had so many drawings you wouldn’t believe it, trying to figure out where the circle and the square were in Metatron’s Cube.
In those days I didn’t tell anybody what I was doing; I didn’t tell people
for a long, long time because it was a very personal experience for me.
And quite frankly, nobody was interested anyway. Nobody cared about
geometry back then, because it had not emerged into most people’s con-
sciousness as it has now.
The Masonic Key to Squaring the Circle
Someone knocked on the door. I opened my bedroom door, and here’s
this tall guy standing there. I had never seen him before in my life. He looked
kind of sheepish, and he said, “I was supposed to come here to tell you some
things.” I asked his name and more about what he wanted.
“Well,” he said, “I was sent here by the Masons to tell you about the circle and the square.”
This really jolted me. I sort of froze in my tracks and just looked at him for
a moment, try-to understand how this was in happening. Then I figured I did-

Fig. 7-20. The circle and the square.

n’t really care how it was happening, only that it was. I just grabbed him by the

Fig. 7-21. Metatron’s Cube.

hand and said, “Get in here,” pulling him in and closing the door. I said, “Anything you have to tell me, I want to know what it is.” So he drew this drawing [Fig. 7-22].
First he drew the square, then he drew the circle around the
square in a particular way— and there was the image I had seen
glowing in the room! I thought, This is going to be good. He divided
the square into four sections, then he drew diagonals from the cor-
ners through the middle to the opposite corners. Then he drew diag-
onals through the four smaller squares. Then he drew lines from I to
E and E to J. Next he drew lines from I to H and H to J (E and H being
the points on the circle’s circumference where the vertical center line
intersects it).
Up to this point I’d had no problem, but then he drew a line from A to nowhere (G) and back to B, and from D to nowhere (F) and back to C. I said, “Wait a minute, that isn’t in the rules I was given. That doesn’t fit—there’s nothing there.” And he said, “It’s okay, because this line (A-G) is parallel with that line (I-H), and this line (D-F) is parallel to this line (J-E).”
“Well,” I said, “that’s a new rule. I didn’t have that one before. I mean, there’s nothing there. Parallel lines?—well, okay I’ll listen.”
Then he began to tell me all kinds of things. He said that the first
key is that the circumference of the circle and the perimeter of the square are equal, which is what I told you before. This circle and square is the same image seen from the air as that of the Great Pyramid with the ship sitting on top.

The Phi Ratio
He began to tell me about the phi ratio of 1.618 (rounded here to

Fig. 7-22. The Mason’s drawing.

three decimal points). The phi ratio is a very simple relationship. If you had a rod and you were going to put a mark on it
somewhere, only two places would mark the phi ratio, shown as points A and B in his illustration [Fig. 7-23].
There are only two places, depending on which end you’re coming from. Shown on the lower drawing, it’s a relation-
ship such that if you divide D by C and E by D, the two answers will be the same— 1.618 ... . So you divide the longer
portion by the shorter portion, and that gives you the ratio 1.618. When you divide the whole length of E by the next

shorter portion, which is D, you’ll get the same ratio. It’s a magical place. Even though I was studying mathematics in college when this incident took place, the phi ratio somehow had gone over my head. I didn’t get it. I had to go back and restudy all this stuff.
This guy also brought up Leonardo’s drawing with the circle
and the square around it, giving me more information, which
I’ll tell you later. I asked him many questions, and about half
the time he didn’t know the answer. He’d just say, “That’s the
way it goes,” or “I don’t know; we don’t know that.” Though I
can’t say this for certain, I suspect the Masons have lost a
great deal of their information. I think that they once had a

brilliant knowledge that was very much like the Egyptians’,
and both of those disciplines
have gone downhill.

Fig. 7-23. Phi-ratio points.

Before he left, he drew the sketch at the bottom of his diagram [see Fig. 7-22], with a square and the right eye of somebody—I can’t say Horus because I don’t know who it is— and then left. I’ve never seen him since. I don’t even remember his name.
Applying the Key to Metatron’s Cube
This gentleman from the Masons didn’t answer the question specifically—how the
circle and the square fit into Metatron’s Cube. In fact, I don’t think he’d ever seen

Fig. 7-24. Three-dimensional
Metatron’s Cube, end view.

Fig. 7-25. Three-dimesnional
Metatron’s Cube, squared view.

Metatron’s Cube. But something he said triggered something in me so that I under-
stood what it was. Right after he left I knew the answer. As you know, Metatron’s Cube is really a three-dimensional object, not a flat object. Three-dimensionally, Metatron’s Cube looks like this [Fig. 7-24]. It’s a cube within a cube, three-dimensionally. Then if you rotate it to this view [Fig. 7-25], you have its square aspect.
Once you do that, you have Figure 7-26. At this point you can drop the outer aspect; all you
need are just the original eight cells. Around those eight cells there’s already a sphere, the zona
pellucida. The cells are in the shape of a cube, so if you draw both a circle and straight lines
around it, you get the image of the circle and the square the angels showed me. I was happy!
The Two Concentric Circles/Spheres
But then I calculated the perimeter of the square and the circumference of the circle—
and they were not equal. I was bummed out for a long time because I figured I hadn’t found

it. About three years later I discovered that I had found it, but had just not understood. In sacred
geometry, when you find something that appears incorrect or breaks the idea you’re trying to
form, you have to keep going deeper, because often you just don’t have the whole picture yet.
What I discovered was that the zona pellucida has a thickness to it; there’s an inner surface
and an outer surface. Every membrane has an outer and an inner surface, and when you use the
outer surface of the zona pellucida, the proportions go into a near-perfect phi ratio. The amount of
imperfection is actually part of the equation. (You’ll know what that means in a while.) This is why
there are two lines around the Flower of Life—the inner and the outer circle of the zona pellucida.

Fig. 7-26. The Circle and the
square in Metatron’s Cube.

Fig. 7-27. The Mason’s lines
drawn over the Egg of Life.

So from now on, whenever you see four circles in a square, we’re talking about the Egg of Life,
the original eight cells. Just take it for granted.
So in this drawing [Fig. 7-27] I drew in all the lines that the Mason drew just to see how they would line up and what would happen, comparing the Mason’s drawing to the eight cells. Nothing appeared to be happening in the middle of the drawing that I could see, though I suspected something at this point, which had to do with a circle that would just fit in the middle of the four spheres. But I did discover that the comers of the square (a cube, actually) define the exact centers of the outer layer of cells in the 16-cell division, as at point A. This was an interesting observation. So I began to doodle and study further to see what they meant. Obviously, the angels wanted me to go down this road, but I had no idea where this road led.
Studying da Vinci’s Canon
I decided to look deeper at this drawing of Leonardo’s [Fig. 7-28]. I had also ma-
jored in art, so I had studied much of Leonardo’s work, but I didn’t realize until later how
much artwork he had done. This drawing has become probably one of his most famous
works. It’s perhaps even more important to us than the Mona Lisa or any other famous
work of his. This kind of drawing, a standard for something (in this case, a standard for
human beings), is called a canon, a human canon.
The first thing that struck me about this drawing is how amazingly we all attune to it. For
instance, because there are 30 frames per second that come across on a video, you could
flash this drawing of Leonardo’s for just an instant, yet people would immediately recognize
it. We know something there is important; perhaps we don’t know exactly what it is, but we
still retain the image. There is a tremendous amount of information about us in this drawing.
But as it turns out, it’s not really about us. It’s about who we used to be, not about who we
are now.
To begin this analysis, notice first that there are lines drawn over the arms and the

Fig. 7-28. Leonard’s famous man (canon) trunk, across the chest and over the legs and neck. The head is divided into another


series of lines. Notice that the feet are drawn at both 90 degrees and 45 degrees—subtle things. Also notice that if you were to stand with your arms straight out and your legs straight down, a square or cube forms around your body, as in Leonardo’s drawing. The center of that square is located exactly where the original eight cells are, which is also a square or cube, in the center of your body. Notice the small cube around your original cells and the bigger cube around your adult body.
When you are standing with your arms outstretched like Leonardo’s man, there is a difference between the height and the width of your square. Computers have shown by measuring a hundred people or more that there is one tenthousandth of an inch difference between the width of your outstretched arms and your height. Though I couldn’t understand for a long time why that difference was there, I think I know now. It has to do with the Fibonacci series, which life is based on. You will see this shortly.
If you put your legs out to the side, like the outer legs on Leonardo’s drawing and stretch out your arms like the upper arms, a perfect circle or sphere fits around your body, and its center is located exactly at the navel. When you do that, the circle and the square exactly touch at the bottom. If you were to move the center of the circle down to the center of the square, the circle and the square would synchronize just like they do in the Mason’s drawing and the drawing that shows the warship superimposed over the top of the Great Pyramid. It is a major secret
of life.
When you measure almost all the copies of Leonardo’s drawings, you find that the circle is really an oval and the square is really a rectangle. It’s different in all of them because they’ve been copied and folded so many times. But in the original, accurate drawing, the hand length from the wrist line to the longest finger equals the distance from the top of the head to the top of the circle when the two centers are aligned; this same length shows up between the navel and the center of the square. So when you bring the two centers together, everything aligns.
Phi Ratios in the Human Body
As I was discovering this, I thought, We have these geometrical forms that
appear to be outside the body as well as inside it. One of the things the angels
said, which really stuck with me, was that the human body is the measuring stick
of the universe—that absolutely everything in the universe can be measured
and determined from our bodies and from the energy fields around them. Since
the phi ratio seemed to be such an important aspect to the Mason, and since he
went on and on about it, I wanted to see where it was in the human body.
I discovered it—and of course other people have also discovered it. Realize
that in Figure 7-29 the square shown is the square around the body as in Fig. 7-29. Phi-ratio diagram for the human body.

Leonardo’s drawing. And that the line dividing the square in half is the center line of the human body. Also notice that the line b is not only the diagonal of one-half of the square, but is also the radius of the circle.
Now, if you are interested in the math, see Figure 7-30, which proves that the
phi ratio is found in the geometrical energy fields around the body in at least this one
relationship. There are many, many other phi relationships in and around the body.
As you can see, the phi ratio = If you put this into your computer, you
will see the transcendental number of phi continue until your computer runs out of memory. I know most of you out there don’t care, but I’ve presented this information for the few.
By the way, I’ll just throw this out to you: When you’re studying sacred geometry, you’ll find that diagonals are one of the major keys for extracting information from your forms (in addition to shadows, expanding from two to three dimensions, comparing male to female and so on). It never fails.
I believe it was Buddha who asked his disciples to contemplate their navels.
Whoever it was, I began to realize as I studied that there was more to the navel than
meets the eye. Then I found a medical book, whose authors must have also lis-
tened to Buddha, because they did a tremendous amount of research on navels.
What the geometries show is that in the ideal, the navel sits at the phi ratio between
the top of the head and the bottom of the feet. This is what most books indicate.
The authors found out that when a baby is born, its nave! is in the exact
geometrical center of the body. Both male and female babies start out this way,
and as they grow, the navel starts to move toward the head. It moves up to the
phi ratio, then continues upward. Then it comes back down to below the phi
Fig. 7-30. Equation for the phi ratio. ratio, oscillating during the formative years. I don’t know what the ages are, but
these movements and locations happen at specific ages. It never actually stops
at the perfect phi ratio in either males or females, but if I remember correctly, the male navel ends up slightly above the phi ratio and the female navel just below it. If you average the male and female points, you get the perfect phi ratio. So even though Leonardo’s drawing is of a male, it assumes that it is at the phi ratio, but of course in nature it would not be.
Da Vinci figured out that if you draw a square around the body, then a
diagonal from foot to extended fingertip, then draw a parallel line (another one
of those parallel lines) from the navel horizontally over to the side of the square,


that horizontal line intercepts the diagonal line exactly at its phi ratio [Fig. 7-31] as well as that of the vertical line from head to feet. Assuming it’s at that perfect point, not slightly above for females or slightly below for males, this means that the human body is divided into phi ratios from top to bottom, which we stated earlier. If these lines were the only places in the human body where the phi ratio is located, it would probably be just an interesting fact. But the truth is, the phi ratio is located in thousands of places throughout the body, and it is not just a coincidence.
Here are some obvious phi-ratio locations in the human body [Fig. 7-32]. The length of each bone in the finger has a phi ratio to the next bone, as shown in the lower drawing. That same ratio occurs with all your fingers and toes. This is a somewhat unusual relationship because one finger is longer than the other in what appears to be an arbitrary fashion, but it’s not ar-

bitrary—nothing in the human body is. The distances on the fingers marked A to B to C
to D to E are all in a phi ratio, as well as the lengths of the phalanges, F to G to H.
If you compare the length of the hand to the length of the lower arm bone, it has a
phi ratio, just like the length of the lower arm bone compared to the upper arm bone. Or take the length of the foot to the lower leg bone, or that bone to the thigh bone and so on. This phi ratio is found throughout the entire bone structure in all kinds of places and ways. It’s usually at places where something bends or changes direction. The body also does it through proportionate sizes of one part to another. If you study this, you will be continually amazed.
Figure 7-33 is another way of showing the phi ratio. You make a curve so that you
can see how one curve is linked with another, and you can see all the cascading phi

Fig. 7-33.

Fig. 7-31. Leonardo’s drawing
with more lines, one of which (the horizontal line) divides both the vertical and diagonal.

Fig. 7-32. Phi ratios
on human body.

ratios of the human body. This is from The Power of Limits by Gyorgy Doczi. I highly
recommend this book. Notice that on this male he drew the line for the navel slightly above where the actual phi ratio is located. He knew about that, and very few people I have read understand it.
I want to talk about this Greek statue. The Greeks were well aware of this under-
standing of phi ratios. So were the Egyptians and many, many other people in ancient times. When they created a piece of art like this, they were actually using both sides of the brain simultaneously. They were using their left brain to very carefully measure everything—I mean really carefully, not kind of or sort of. They were measuring to make sure that everything was exactly mathematically correct according to the phi proportion. To be as creative as they wanted, they were also using their right brain. They could put any expression on the face and have the statue hold anything or do anything they wanted. The Greeks combined the left and right brain.

Doryphoros the
Spear-Bearer’s phi ratios.

Fig. 7-34. Phi ratios in butterflies.

When the Romans came in and took over Greece, the Romans knew absolutely nothing about sacred geometry.
They saw the Greeks incredible art and tried to duplicate it, but if you compare Greek art to Roman art after they con-
quered Greece, Roman art looks like it was done by amateurs. Even though Roman artists were really good at what they
did, they just didn’t know they were supposed to measure everything—that there had to be this kind of perfection for the
body to look real.

The Phi Ratio in All Known Organic Structures
Phi-ratio mathematics goes not only through human life, but through the entire spectrum of all known organic struc-
ture. You can find this in butterflies [Fig. 7-34] or dragonflies [Fig. 7-35], where each little rail section is proportioned to

Fig. 7-35. Phi ratops in a dragonfly.

the phi ratio. The lengths of the sections of the dragonfly form phi ratios. This illustrator was focusing on one thing, but you can also look where every little bend is in the legs, the length and width of the wings, the size of the head compared to its width and length—everything. You can go on and on and on, and you’ll keep finding the phi ratio everywhere you look.

Look at this frog skeleton [Fig. 7-36]
and see how every single bone is in phi-
ratio patterns, just like in the human body.
Fish, I think, are really incredible,

Fig. 7-36. Pfi ratios in a
frog skeleton.

Fig. 7-37. Phi ratios
in fish.

because fish don’t look like they have
any phi-ratio stuff going on—and there are so many different kinds. But when you analyze them, the phi ra-
tio is there as well [Fig. 7-37].
The other universal measurement you’ll find, one I talked about before, is 7.23 centimeters, the wavelength of the universe. You’ll find this wave-
length scattered through the body, such as the distance between your eyes; but the phi ratio occurs more often than any other.
Once a measurement of any
species has been determined, then
every other measurement in that
species follows in the phi-ratio pro-
portion. To put it another way, there
are only certain possibilities in human
structure, and once the size of one
part of the body is determined, that
determines the size of the next, and
on and on. Soon I’ll show you the
Egyptian building that Lucy Lamy re-
constructed just by measuring one
little piece of rubble. This is how she
did it: Once she knew the size of the
first piece , she knew that every
shape after that would relate to it in
phi ratios.


The phi proportions are built into this Japanese pagoda architecture [Fig.
7-38]. This illustrates another point about creativity that I want to make. When
they designed and built this structure, they carefully measured every single
distance to match the various lines shown, and they carefully measured where
to put each board—right down to that little ball on the very top, so that it could
correspond with and form these relationships we have been studying. I’m sure
if someone ever checks, they’ll find that the size of the doors, the windows and
probably every small detail are all based on phi proportions or other sacred
Other classical architecture around the world used the same principles.
The Greek Parthenon looks really different from this Japanese structure, but
the Parthenon embodies the same mathematics. And the Great Pyramid looks
very different from either of those two buildings, but it also embodies the same

Fig. 7-38. Pagoda of Yakushiji Temple


mathematics—only a lot more. What I’m saying is, your left brain can under-
stand and use these mathematics, and it doesn’t hinder creativity at all. It can even enhance it.

Golden Mean Rectangles and Spirals around the Body
Another sacred form we have in life is the spiral. You may wonder where it came from. We’re living in a spiral—the galaxy, which has spiral-ing arms. You’re using spirals to listen to the sounds around you because the little apparatus in your ears is in a spiral form. There are spirals all over nature. The more you look, the more you find. Spirals are found in pine cones, sunflowers, a few ani-
mal horns, deer antlers, seashells, daisies and lots of plants. If you put your open hand vertically in front of you, thumb toward your face, notice the move-
ment as you roll your fingers into a fist, starting with your little finger. They trace out a Fibonacci spiral. This is a very special spiral, as you will see.
Where do spirals come from? They have to come from somewhere, and
they have to be generated out of the dynamics of the original system, the
Flower of Life, if what we believe is true. Well, all you have to do is go back
to the human body—to the same pattern we came up with for the phi ratio
[see Fig. 7-30]. If you simply take the diagonal line, lay it down flat, then com-
plete the rectangle formed with that new extension—you have a Golden Mean

rectangle, the source of the Golden Mean spiral.
The outer rectangle of this drawing [Fig. 7-39] is called a Golden Mean
rectangle, the same as above. To get another Golden Mean rectangle, all you
have to do is measure the rectangle’s shorter edge (side A) and plot that
distance along the longer side (side B), which makes a square (with equal
sides; A = C). The area that’s left over (D) is another Golden Mean rectangle.
Then you can take the shorter edge again and plot that distance along the
longer edge to make another square, and what’s left over is still another Golden
Mean rectangle. This can continue forever. Notice that each newly formed
rectangle is turned 90 degrees. If you run diagonals across each rectangle,
their crossing locates the exact center of the spiral they form. You can see

Fig. 7-39. The Golden Mean rectangle and male
and female spirals.

Fig. 7-40. Leonardo’s canon and spiral.

how the diagonals become a key for more information: Line F has a Golden
Mean ratio to line E, continuing inward. We can say that F is to E what G is to F and H is to G and I is to H and so on. There are other kinds of spirals, but the Golden Mean spiral is paramount in creation.

Male and Female Spirals
There are two kinds of energies that move through Golden Mean rec-
tangles. One energy is the diagonals that cross the squares, moving at 90-degree turns, shown in black. That’s the male energy. The female en-
ergy is the line that keeps curving in toward the center, shown in gray. So you have a female Golden Mean logarithmic spiral, along with a male spi-
ral that uses straight lines with 90-degree turns at the phi ratio. In much of the work I will show you, we’ll be looking only at the male aspect, but you must remember that the female aspect is always there.
Some books say that if you draw a horizontal line through the navel in da
Vinci’s man [Fig. 7-40], what’s left over in the lower portion is a Golden Mean
rectangle; and that if you draw a line from the top corner of the large square to
the middle point at his feet (the center of the opposite side of the square), that
semi-diagonal will pass through the exact center of a Golden Mean spiral as
shown in the figure. You can create a spiral if you draw in the consecutively
smaller Golden Mean rectangles like we did in Figure 7-39. I’ve read several
books about this, and I believe it’s almost true. But something else is actually

happening that is important to understand if one really wants to know about Mother Nature.
In fact, I’m convinced that there are no Golden Mean rectangles or spirals in exist-
ence unless they’re synthetically made. Nature does not use Golden Mean rectangles
or spirals—it doesn’t know how. The reason nature doesn’t know how is because a
Golden Mean spiral will literally go inward forever—maybe not with a pencil and paper,
but technically it will go on forever and ever. It will also go outward forever too, because
you can take the longest line of any Golden Mean rectangle, make a square to get a
larger Golden Mean rectangle and continue to do this forever. So a Golden Mean rect-
angle has no beginning and no end. It will go inward and outward forever.

Fig. 7-41. Diagonal lines made by
connecting corner to the center of the opposite side of the square.

Fig. 7-42. Spirals and the original
eight squares.

Fig. 7-43. Leonardo’s surrounding grid.

This is a problem for Mother Nature. Life doesn’t know how to deal with something
that has no beginning and no end. We can sort of deal with something that has no end, but if you think about it, it’s difficult to think of something having no beginning. Just try to get that in your mind—something that has no beginning. This is hard for us because we are geometric beings, and geometry has centers, beginnings.
Since life doesn’t know how to deal with this, it has found a way to cheat. It has found another spiral to create with. Life figured out a system of mathematics that ap-
proximates this so well that you can hardly tell the difference. The books say that this spiral on Leonardo’s drawing in Figure 7-40 is a Golden Mean spiral, which I say can’t be true. Also, there is not just one little spiral here; there are eight spirals rotating around the body— one for each Golden Mean rectangle, connected to the eight possible semi-
diagonals around the human body [Fig. 7-41]. This drawing shows the eight that inter-
sect the human body.
Figure 7-42 shows the eight spirals with their eight centers located around the cen-
ter of the body, in the same pattern and with the same center as the original eight cells inside the body—right?
Leonardo drew these little lines that make a grid over and around the body [Fig. 7-43]: There are four squares in the center (A, B, C and D, clockwise) and eight squares surround-
ing them (E through L). Those outer eight squares happen to be where the eight semi-
diagonals of Figure 7-41 intersect the body and where the eight spirals of Figure 7-42 begin. So we have eight places around the body and a central pattern of four squares in the middle, centered exactly around the original eight cells. Life is amazing, is it not?

When I noticed this about Leonardo’s drawing, I figured there must be something important about this relation-
ship. But when I realized that there’s no such thing as a Golden Mean rectangle or spiral in nature, I began to
suspect that these spirals were probably something slightly different. And that’s what they turned out to be—slightly
It turns out that these spirals are Fibonacci in nature, which we will explore in the next chapter. Understanding the difference between the Golden Mean and Fibonacci spirals may seem simple and unimportant, until the bigger picture of nature unfolds to reveal something astonishing about this relationship. No one can ever understand why the 83,000 sacred sites on the Earth were built or what their purpose was without knowing this difference.


Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity

The Fibonacci Sequence and Spiral

n order to understand why those eight spirals around da Vinci’s canon
are not Golden Mean spirals and to find out what they are, we have to go to another person—not Leonardo da Vinci, but Leonardo Fibonacci.

Fibonacci preceded da Vinci by over 250 years. From what I’ve read about him, he was a monastic, often in a meditative state. He loved to walk through wooded forests and meditate as he was walking. But evidently his left brain was simultaneously active, because he started to notice that plants and flowers had number associations [Fig. 8-1].
Flower petals and leaf and seed patterns correspond to definite num-
bers, and the flowers on this list are the ones I think he saw, if I’ve got it
right. He noticed that lilies and irises have three petals and that butter-
cups, larkspurs and columbines (the flower at the top right in Fig. 8-1)
have five. Some delphiniums have 8 petals, corn marigolds have 13 and
some asters have 21. Daisies almost always have either 34, 55 or 89
petals. He began to see these same numbers over and over again through-
out nature.
This little plant [Fig. 8-2] doesn’t actually exist; we created it with computer graphics, shuffling it around like a deck of cards. The original plant on which this illustration is based is called the sneezewort; we simply made the computer graphics fit that plant.
Fibonacci noticed that when the sneezewort plant first came out of the
ground, it grew only one leaf, just one little leaf. As it grew taller, farther up on its
stem it grew one more leaf; then a little bit farther it grew two leaves, then three,
then five, then eight; then it had thirteen flowers. He probably said, “Gee, those
are the same numbers I keep seeing in the petals of other flowers—3, 5, 8, 13.”

Eventually this sequence of 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89 and
so on became known as the Fibonacci sequence. If you are given any three consecutive numbers in this sequence, you can recognize the
pattern: you simply add two consecutive numbers to get the next number. See how it works? This is a very special sequence. It’s crucial in
life. Why is ii important? This is perhaps my interpretation of why, but I’ll
do my best tc show you.
This is a hibiscus flower with five petals [Fig. 8-3]. Th( stamen in-
side has five terminating buds, and the directior of those two geomet-
ric forms are reversed to each other one set pointing up and one point-
ing down. When mosi people look at this flower, they don’t think, “Let’s
see, it has five petals.” They simply look at it, notice it’s beautiful smell
it and experience it from their right brain. They’re not thinking about the
geometry or mathematics going or in the other side of the brain.
Life’s Solution to the Infinite Golden Mean (Phi) Spiral
Remember that I said how the Golden Mean spiral has no begin-
ning and no end, and that life has a hard time witr that? It can cope with
no end, but it has a difficult time grokking something that has no begin-
ning. I have a really hard time doing it, and I think we all wrestle with
that situation.
What nature did was create the Fibonacci sequence to get around the problem. It’s like God said, “Okay, go out there and create with the Golden Mean spiral,” and we said, “We don’t know how.” So we made up something that is not the Golden Mean spiral, but it rapidly comes so close that you can hardly tell the difference [Fig. 8-4].
For example, the phi ratio associated with the Golden Mean is ap-
proximated by 1.6180339. Look what happens when you divide each
number in the Fibonacci sequence into the next higher number. Here’s
the sequence in the left column: 1, 2,3,5,8,13,21,34,55,89. In the sec-
ond column I’ve shifted the sequence by one so we can divide the
number in the first column by the number in the second column (see
column 3). Notice what happens when you divide a column-two num-

ber into the one in column one. When we divide 1 into 1, we get 1.0. Now, 1.0 is a lot iess than the phi ratio. But when we go to the next line and divide 1 into 2, we get 2, which is greater than phi, but closer than 1 is. When we divide 2 into 3 we get 1.5, which is a lot closer to phi than either of the previous two answers, but it’s under.
Three into 5 is 1.6666, which is over, but a lot closer. Five into 8 is 1.60, and it’s under. Eight into 13 is 1.625, which is over. Thirteen into 21 is 1.615, under. Twenty-oneinto34 is 1.619, over. Thirty-four into 5 5, 1.617, under. Fiftyfive into 89, 1.6181, over. The next one goes under, then over, each time getting closer and closer to the actual phi ratio. This is called asymptotically reaching a limit. It can never ever reach the actual number, but practically speaking, you wouldn’t be able to tell the difference after a few divisions. You can see this graphically in Figure 8-5.
The light gray squares are the four central squares of the human body
where the original eight cells are located. The eight dark gray squares around
these central squares are where the spirals begin. Does everybody get that?
Rather than having them spiraling in forever and ever, we’re going to do something different—because this is what life does, I believe. I’m going to use one of the outer squares as my starting point, and this will be true for all eight. I’m choosing one of them as an example.
Using a diagonal across just one of the tiny background squares as our
measure, we’ll call this diagonal line one unit. Then we move according to the
Fibonacci numbers: 1, 1, 2,3, 5,8, 13, 21, 34, 89, with a 90-degree turn after
each number. In our first step we go one length, then turn 90 degrees and go
one again. Then we turn 90 degrees and go two lengths, turn another 90
degrees and go three lengths. Between each step we take a 90-degree turn.
The next step is 5 units long, then 8. So we have 1,1,2, 3, 5, 8, 13.
Then we diagonally cross 21 squares, then 34 [Fig. 8-6]. Then 55, then 89 [Fig. 8-7]. As we do this, the spiral unfolds and gets closer and closer to phi, the Golden Mean spiral, until very rapidly there’s no way to tell the difference in life, at least visually.
Comparing the two spirals must have been a very important feature if one
studied life, because the ancient Egyptians displayed both the Fibonacci and
the Golden Mean spirals at the Great Pyramid. Even though the spirals have
two different origins, by the time they get out to steps 55 and 89, the two lines
are practically identical. When people who studied Egypt saw the three pyra-
mids lined up on the spiral, they thought it was the Golden Mean, not the
Fibonacci spiral. Then they came back and found one of the holes (refer to

page 109). Several years later they realized that just a little ways away, maybe a hundred yards or so, was another marker. They hadn’t realized there were two spirals. I don’t know whether the people working with this understand its significance even yet.
Spirals in Nature
Here is sacred geometry in nature [Fig. 8-8], the real thing. It’s a
nautilus shell cut in half. It’s an unwritten rule that every good sacred
geometry book has to have a nautilus shell in it. Many books say this is a
Golden Mean spiral, but it’s not—it’s a Fibonacci spiral.
You can see the perfection of the arms of the spiral, but if you look at the
center or beginning, it doesn’t look so perfect. You can’t really see this detail
here. I suggest that you look at a real one. This innermost end actually hits
the other side and bends, because its value is 1.0, which is a long ways from
phi. The second and third ones bend also, but not as much because they are coming closer to phi. Then they start fitting better and better, until you see this perfectly graceful form developing. You could think that the little nautilus made a mistake in the beginning; it looks like he didn’t know what he was doing. But he’s doing it perfectly, it’s not a mistake. He’s simply following exactly the mathematics of the Fibonacci sequence.
On this pine cone [Fig. 8-9] you see a double
spiral, one going one way and one going the other. If
you were to count the number of spirals rotating one
direction and those going the other direction, you’d
find that they’re always two consecutive Fibonacci
numbers. There are perhaps 8 going one way and
13 the other, or 13 going one way and 21 the other.
The many other double-spiral patterns found through-
out nature correspond to this in all cases that I know.
For instance, the sunflower spirals are always related
to the Fibonacci sequence.
Figure 8-10 shows the difference between the two. The Golden Mean spiral is the
ideal. It’s like God, the Source. As you can see, the top four squares on both drawings
are the same size. The difference is in the areas where they originate (the bottom sec- spgra8ls10. Comparing Fibonacci and Golden meani

tions of the two diagrams). The bottom of the Fibonacci spiral has an area half the size (0.5) of the area above; the Golden Mean spiral has an area 0.618 the size of the area above. The Fibonacci spiral shown at near right is constructed using six equal squares, whereas the Golden Mean spiral starts deeper inside (actually, it never starts—it has been going on forever like God). Even though the originating point is different, they very quickly approximate each other.
Another example: Many books state that the King’s Chamber is a Golden Mean rectangle, but it’s not. It’s also tied to Fibonacci.
Fibonacci Spirals around Humans
When we draw a 64-square grid and incorporate this spiral pattern, we get
Figure 8-11. Superimposing da Vinci’s canon over this 8-by-8 grid [Fig. 8-12],
the eight squares (shaded) seem to have a unique attribute. There are four
possible ways to move a Fibonacci spiral out of one of the four double squares.
Returning to Figure 8-11, let’s use the upper double square as an example.
One way to start is from the upper right corner, as shown by the darker line. It
crosses one square (1), turns right to cross one more square (1), turns right
again to cross two squares (2)—interestingly enough, it reaches the top of the
grid at this point. Continuing to turn right, it crosses 3 (the next number in the
sequence)—and, son-of-a-gun, it has now reached the right side of the grid!
The next number is 5, which takes the line to the bottom of the grid. The follow-
ing number, 8, takes the line across three squares before it leaves the grid.
There’s a perfect reflective quality as this spiral moves out from the beginning
Another way you could start in this double square is from the lower right
corner, as shown by the lighter line (this forms a little pyramid in the top two
squares. In this case your 90-degree turns will be to the left. So you cross one
square (1), then one again (1), then 2—this time passing through the center
four squares of the grid (where the original eight cells reside). After turning left
again to cross 3 squares, the line touches the right side of the grid. The next
number, 5, will leave the grid after crossing two squares. It’s a perfect synchronicity of movement. Whenever you see this kind of perfection, you know you’re almost surely hitting on really basic geometries.

All this is crucial to understand, if you care

UPDATE: Since the time of Tesla, govern-
ments have not allowed the knowledge of zero
point to come forth. Why? Tesia wanted to give
free, unlimited energy to the world, which he
knew would come from zero-point technology.
But J.P. Morgan, who owned many copper
mines, did not want electricity to be free. In-
stead, he wanted to force electricity to pass
through copper wires so he could meter it,
charge the public and make money. Tesia was
stopped, and the world has been controlled
ever since.
Since that time in the 1940s, any person
who researched zero-point technology and
talked publicly about it was killed or disap-
peared—until just recently. In 1997 a video
company called Lightworks secretly brought
together a few of these scientists and filmed
their works.
They gave the history of what had hap-
pened since the 1940s and showed clear work-
ing models of the inventions. They showed
machines that, once running, give off more
electricity than it takes to run them. They
showed batteries that never need charging.
They showed how an ordinary gasoline motor
can be converted to run on ordinary water with
more power than gas. They showed panels that
will produce boiling water forever as long as
the outside temperature is above 40 degrees
below zero Fahrenheit. They showed many
other scientific inventions considered impos-
sible by today’s standards. When Lightworks
was done, on a single day the video was re-
leased and the information put on a Web site
[“Free Energy: The Race to Zero Point.” 105-
minute video by Lightworks (800) 795-8273,
$40.45 ppd;]. This has
forced the world to change direction. Two

to know, how the Egyptians achieved resurrec-
tion. They were doing it scientifically, you might
say. They were using science to create a syn-
thetic state of awareness that would lead to im-
mortality. We’re not going to achieve our aware-
ness synthetically; we’re going to do it naturally,
but you might find it useful to understand how
an ancient civilization was attempting to achieve this.
The Human Grid and Zero-Point Technology
This basic sacred geometry of a 64-square grid around humans is becom-
ing understood in science. In fact, there’s an entirely new science happening around it, though it’s having a hard time getting out because of politics. This new science is called zero-point technology. This grid is, I believe, the geometry of zero-point technology, though most scientists see it in a different way.
Most people involved in zero-point technology think of it in terms of wave-
forms or energy. They talk about the five places in a waveform, as shown here [Fig. 8-13]. Or they think of zero point as the amount of energy that matter has when (and if) it reaches zero degrees Kelvin, or absolute zero. To me, both of these ways are valid, but the way based on sacred geometry will eventually become the cornerstone of this new science because it is so fundamental.
These points associated with the waveform are also related to breathing.
These points are where the zero point is accessed. They are like doorways into another world. Yogic pranayama is usually talked about in terms of two or three places (depending on whether you count the beginning of the next cycle), which are between the inbreath and the outbreath. That’s also zero-point technology if you focus it on human breathing.
This new zero-point understanding has a geometry behind it, and that ge-
ometry is around the human body. The human body is always the measuring stick of creation.


weeks later both Japan and England announced
that they are very close to solving the cold-fu-
sion problem. The world began to change.
On February 13, 1998, Germany issued a
world patent on a free-energy machine based
on carbon, a thin sheet of material that will
produce 400 watts of electricity forever. This
means that all small appliances such as com-
puters, hair dryers, blenders, flashlights etc.
will not need to be plugged into the system. It
is the end of the old way and the birth of un-
limited free energy.


Male- and Female-Originating Spirals
To begin with we must understand that there are two kinds of spirals, de-
pending on whether they are straight lines (male) or curved lines (female) . We
talked about this before. However, now we are going
to introduce a new concept. The originating point of
the spiral in this geometric pattern will further deter-
mine if it is male or female in a different way. In a double
square there are four corners where a spiral can origi-
nate: top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right
[see Fig. 8-14]. The two top positions produce male
spirals, the two bottom positions, female spirals. The
male spiral lines never pass through the center four
squares; the female lines always do.
Figure 8-15 shows the two kinds of male and fe-
male spirals and how they joints move through
this geometric pattern.
To make it clear, we will give an example. If
the spiral begins at the top right point, it will be a
male spiral relative to this geometrical pattern. In
addition, the curved aspect of this male spiral
would be female, and the straight-line aspect
would be male. Every polarity always has another
polarity within it, and within that new polarity there
is always still another polarity. This division pro-
cess will continue theoretically forever.
Figure 8-16 is an example of the male-origi-
nating spirals that begin at the top (meaning the
greatest distance from center), but showing only
their female (curved) aspect. This drawing shows all eight possible male-origi-
nating spirals that exist around the body, from a Fibonacci perspective, in their
female (curved) form. They carry the Fibonacci sequence only as far as 5 (1-
1-2-3-5). In this limited arrangement it’s interesting to note how the curved spi-
rals do a sort of loop-to-loop. The energy could actually become each other and

recirculate. This Fibonacci movement is what I believe is really going on
around the human body, not the Golden Mean that most books claim.
In Figure 8-17 we see male-originating spirals around the human body.
Here we show the male (straight-line) aspect but only two with female
curved lines.
In Figure 8-18 we see the female spirals around the human body, which
originate at the bottom, or closest points to center. Here we show primarily the
male (straight-line) aspect of these female spirals. The female (curved) as-
pect of only two female spirals are shown (not all eight), which form a heart.
Notice the pattern they create. One heart faces one way, and after it has been
extended 180 degrees, a bigger heart faces the other way. Every one of these
curved female lines passes through zero point at the exact center of the hu-
man body. This zero point is the creation point, or what we would call the
womb. It is for this reason that females have the womb in their bodies and
males do not. Males never pass through zero point. Later you’ll see these
heart-shaped relationships tied to many other natural phenomena such as
light, eyes and emotions, to men-
tion a few, so keep them in mind.
Now, with that understanding we’re going to look at another sequence. There are thousands of mathematical sequences; I suppose on one level you could even say an infinite number. But in useful terms, there are many. A sequence can simply be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. In every one of the thousands and thousands of sequences known to man, three numbers are required to identify the pattern, the whole sequence—with the exception of the Golden Mean logarithmic sequence, in which case you need only two. This implies that it is probably the source of all other sequences.
According to my guidance, two sequences besides the Golden Mean
are of major importance to nature and life. They are the Fibonacci sequence,
which we just looked at, and the binary sequence we are about to look at.
Here we will see the Fibonacci as female and the binary as male. They are
really more than just female and male; they act more as mother and father.
They are both primary, coming straight from the Golden Mean, just as the
two primary colors that come from white light are red and blue.

Binary Sequencing in Cell Division and Computers
The binary sequence [Fig. 8-19] is a mitosis that simply doubles each time, such as from 1 to 2 to 4 to 8 to 16 to 32. Instead of adding to the last number like we do in the Fibonacci sequence, we double it.
Let’s look at the binary sequence for a moment. It goes I, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, doubling at each jump. In order to determine the characteristic of the sequence, all you need to do is take any three consecutive numbers in the sequence—like 2, 4 and 8. You double the 2 and get 4, and double the 4 to get 8. It takes three consecutive numbers to positively identify the doubling process.
In terms of a pronucleus’s mitotic cell division, by the time the first cells form into the apple shape, there have been nine cell divisions, totaling 512 cells. Holding that in mind, look at these two facts:
Fact one (shown in Fig. 8-19): There are 1014 cells in the average human body. That’s
100 trillion cells in the average person. That’s a lot ofze-roes. Fact two (in the same figure):
An adult human body has to replace two and a half million red blood cells in every second
of life. That definitely sounds like a lot. It would take you about two and a half months just to
count to two and a half million if you were doing it day and night, 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Yet if we are to stay
alive, our bodies have to create millions of new red blood cells
every second to replace the dead ones. And the only way this
can be achieved is through mitotic cell division.
You look at it and say, “Well, it’s become 512 with only
nine divisions, so it’s going to have to really go for it to get up
to this 100 trillion.” But there’s something almost magical that
happens. Anyone who has studied mathematics knows this,
but if you have never studied this before, it feels almost like
magic. This is what happens [Fig. 8-20]: After the next ten
divisions, cells have multiplied to over half a million. When it
divides ten more times, there are 536 million.
According to Anna C. Pai and Helen Marcus Roberts in
their book, Genetics, Its Concepts and Implications, it takes
exactly 46 mitotic cell divisions to reach the 1014 cells of the
human body. It takes only 46 divisions! It’s magical to me that
this number—46—happens to be the number of chro-

mosomes we have in the average cell. Chance or coincidence?
These numbers are amazing. It’s not amazing if you’ve studied it, because by then you’re often immune to it. But it still amazes me.
I would like to talk about how computers work. I started to mention how we’ve got carbon and silicon arcing back and forth between each other. And who’s making the silicon computers? We are—carbon-based beings. Out of all the various mathematical possibilities, we chose the binary sequence as the basis of how the computer works. It’s the basis of the whole computer system, and it’s also one of the primary bases of life itself. I feel sure it was not an accident that we chose the binary sequence, because we are life, and deep inside we know the importance of this sequence.
I know most of you probably know this, but nevertheless I want to show how a computer works. Imagine little light switches called computer chips, and when you turn on one of these lights, you see the number designated for that chip. If you turn on the 1 chip, you see 1. If you have five computer chips in your computer, they’re designated 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16. You can turn these five chips on or off to get any number between 1 and 31. If you turn on just the 1 chip, you see the number 1. If you turn on the second chip, designated as 2, you see the number 2. The same for chip 4, chip 8 and chip 16.
By turning on every combination of those five chips and adding them up, you can come up with any number between 1 and 31. In other words, if you turn on the first chip, you get 1. Turn the second one on and get 2. And if you turn the first two on at the same time, you get 3. The next one you turn on is 4; 4 and 1 is 5; 4 and 2 is 6; 4 and 2 and 1 is 7. Then for 8, you turn on the 8 chip. Eight and 1 is 9; 8 and 2 is 10; 8 and 2 and 1 is 11; 8 and 4 is 12; 8 and 4 and I is 13; 8 and 4 and 2 is 14; and 8 and 4 and 2 and I is 15. Then for 16, you turn on the 16 chip. Adding the fifth chip gives you all numbers through 31 when they are combined in every possible way.
If you add just one more chip and call it 32, now you can get every number between 1 and 63. If you add another chip
and call it 64, you can get every number between 1 and 127 and so on. If you have a computer that has 46 chips, you can
get every single number between 1 and 100 trillion—just by turning 46 little chips on and off! This is what has enabled the
unfoldment of knowledge that’s happening so rapidly on the planet right now. And your body has been using this technol-
ogy for millions of years!
Searching for the Form behind Polarity
I studied the Fibonacci and binary sequences with the guidance of the angels, who were constantly leading me through it. The more I studied them, the more I personally believed that there must be geometry behind them, a secret form that created these number sequences. Since the angels said that the human body and geometry fields are the measuring stick of the universe, I suspected strongly that if these two sequences were like two mother/father, male/ female components, then there must be a single geometric form hidden behind them, a form that generated both. I searched for a way to wed them.


I looked for this secret for years. For a long time I was very serious about it, then I gave up because I couldn’t figure out what it was. But I always kept one eye open for an answer, always looking for a little clue that would maybe do it. And one day I got it.

The Polar-Graph Solution

A Sixth-Grade Math Book
A little boy I was taking care of was in the sixth grade, and he wanted to know about a particular mathematical problem. It was a relatively simple problem, but I didn’t remember how to do it. I looked through his book to remember how it went so I could explain it. As I was going through
his book, I saw the geometry I needed—in a sixth-grade math book! The author of the book didn’t understand what I was seeing, because he was thinking along a totally different line. But I saw in the mathematics of it something I’d been looking for, and it was the key that tied these two primary sequences together.
I’m sorry that I don’t remember the name of the book
or the author—it was a long time ago—but it showed a
polar graph and its relationship to a Golden Mean spiral.
Figure 8-21 is a map of the South Pole on a polar graph.
Notice the cross through the center, one line following the
x axis and the other the y. Every circle does in fact have
these lines crossing it. We demonstrated this by taking a
flat disk about half an inch thick, randomly scattering sand
all over it. We held it by a handle underneath and hit it
with a wooden mallet. The sand would rearrange itself
into a perfectly square cross like you see in this illustra-
tion. If we used a sound generator on the disk, the sand
would change into many other geometrical patterns. But
the very first pattern that emerges by striking a round disk

at a low rate will be a perfectly square cross.
When you have a circle with a square cross over it, you take the radius of the circle as your measuring stick and call it 1 (that makes the calculations very easy). Drawing concentric circles the same distance outward from that first radius gives you a polar graph.
Spirals on a Polar Graph
This is how a polar graph usually looks [Fig. 8-22], with 36 radial lines including the
vertical and horizontal lines. These lines indicate 360 degrees in 10-degree increments.
Then concentric circles are drawn, each one the same distance as the one before, creat-
ing eight equal demarcations along each radius, counting the inside circle as one. There’s
a great deal of reasoning behind a polar graph. Think first about what it represents. It is a
two-dimensional drawing that attempts to show a three-di-
mensional sphere, one of the sacred forms, by projecting it onto a flat surface. It is the shadow form. Casting shadows is one of the sacred ways of obtaining information. Also, a polar graph has both straight lines (male) and circular lines (female) superimposed over each other—both male and female energies at once.
Think of the small central circle as a planet in space. From the surface of the planet, the
author of the math book plotted a Golden Mean spiral— not Fibonacci, but Golden Mean. It
starts at the zero radius on the circumference of the little “planet” in the center, and it is
plotted one time around, from zero to 360°, or back to zero [Fig. 8-23].
Now, to figure out the value of any point, you would use the middle circle as a value of
one (since it represents the distance from the center to the first circle, which we are calling
the “planet”), then count outward to wherever the spiral crosses a radius. Thus on the radius
at 260° (between the fourth and fifth rings) you would have counted outward to roughly 4.5.
(Of course, on a computer you could be more accurate.) On the radial line at 210°, the spiral would have reached about
3.3. Does everybody understand that?
Now, look what happens to the actual data from zero to 360°. At zero degrees the spiral is exactly one circle (radial
increment) away from center, because it’s on the surface of that little sphere or planet. Then it goes around through
different changes until it gets to 120°, where the spiral crosses the second circle. The spiral continues outward to the
fourth circle, exactly where the 240° radial line sits. And it reaches the eighth (outer) circle precisely at the 360° (also 0°)
radius. The radial increments have doubled (a binary sequence of 1, 2,4,8) at exactly 0°. 120°, 240° and 360°.


Notice Figure 8-24, which shows the crossing points
of the spiral. The white stars to the left of the radial-incre-
ment column show where the binary sequence crosses a
radius. The black stars show how the spiral advances, in
a Fibonacci sequence (1, 2, 3, 5, 8), crossing radials at
120°, 190°, 280° and 360°. Both sequences simulta-
neously reach full circle (360°), though in differing incre-
ments, following this
Golden Mean spiral. This spiral, shown on a polar
graph, has integrated the binary and Fibonacci se-
I was so excited, I was doing cartwheels for a few days.
I knew I had found something really extraordinary, even
though I didn’t fully know what it was. (This is another one of
my weaknesses I have to admit to here. Once I saw it, I
knew that if I decoded one of the patterns, it would be true
for the other one, and I’ve never gone back even to look at
the other pattern, which is probably equally as interesting.)
But I did analyze what a binary sequence does. The spiral crosses at 0, 120, 240 and 360 degrees. As you can see, that forms an equilateral triangle [Fig. 8-25]. If this binary spiral kept going outward, it would cross radii at further increments of 16, 32, 64 and so on, yet always hit those three 120-, 240-, and 360-degree radial lines as they too are extended.
You not only have a triangle, but you’re actually looking at a three-dimensional tetrahedron, because the 120-, 240-
and 360-degree radii extend to the center forming the top view of a tetrahedron as well as a side view.
Keith Critchlow ’s Triangles and Their Musical Significance
Another image on this drawing is an equilateral triangle with the horizontal line running straight through the middle from 0 to 180 degrees. This is the side view of the tetrahedron. Now, you might not think that’s important, and I probably would have never picked up on it, but another person did—Keith Critchlow. We don’t know what he was thinking or how he arrived at this. He didn’t know what you know right now when he did it. (He may know it now after he’s seen this work, but he didn’t when he wrote his book.)
Figure 8-26 is Critchlow’s work. He drew an equilateral triangle with a line through the middle; then he measured to
the middle of the center line (see black dot) and drew a line down to the corner and up to the top edge and then vertically
down to the center line, as shown. Who knows why? Where that first diagonal line crossed the center line, he then drew

a vertical line to the upper edge, then down to the same lower corner. Using the point where it crossed the center line, he repeated what he had done before, then did it once more to the left. You could keep going in both directions from your first line. By drawing this funny little form, he discovered something of great importance.
He says, “Continuing in this way” (in that pattern of construction), “each successive proportion will be the harmonic mean between the previous proportion and the total length, and all these proportions will be musically significant, 1/2 being the octave, 2/3 being the fifth, 4/5, being the major third, 8/9 being the major tone [step] and 16/17 being the half tone [half step]. In other words, he’s comparing the measurement of these lines to musical tones.
He then tried measuring it in a different way, starting at a different point [Fig. 8-27] of the center line, at three-fourths (see black dot), and found that the measurements were 1/7, 1/4, 2/5, 4/7, 8/11 and 16/l9—and all these numbers are musically significant.
This is very, very interesting. It means that the harmonics of music are somehow related to the proportions of this central line moving through a tetrahedron. But he had to measure first to begin, and if you have to use a measuring stick, you’re not at the core of sacred geometry; something’s missing. If you’re right in sacred geometry, you never have to use anything to measure. The measuring apparatus is built in so that you can calculate everything without having any kind of calculus or ruler or anything else. It’s always built right into the system.
I experimented with his drawings and
discovered that if I put the polar graph be-
hind his pattern, I could reproduce his first
pattern, which showed the octave—the
halfway mark—without any measuring
[Fig. 8-28].
All I had to do was draw over a line that
was already there from the lowest apex of
the triangle through the center of the sphere
to the opposite side of the triangle; when I
dropped the line straight down, it divided
the center line exactly in half, which was
the octave point Critchlow had found. Then
the other three lines could automatically be



I then discovered that the outermost circle of the polar graph, which circumscribes the equilateral triangle, was also harmonic to the central line: the vertical line at 60 degrees (line A) exactly overlies line B. There is a correspondence between the male (straight lines) and the female (curved lines) components inside and outside the triangle, and these proportions were all musically significant. And I didn’t have to measure anything!
We have now taken this light-years beyond the above. A research tearr has found that you can draw these lines not only from the center, but frorr any of the nodal points inside the upper half of the triangle, and you wil come up with all known harmonics in existence. In other words, if yoi draw a line from any of the points where the straight and curved lines cros; from 0 to 120 degrees, then down to the corner of the primary triangle an( start making your patterns, you’ll come up with all the harmonic systems not only the Western keyboard, but the Eastern systems as well—in fact, al known harmonic systems and many unknown ones that have never been used.
People who have done this research now believe that all the laws of physics can be derived from musical harmonics,
now that the full system c harmonics has been revealed. I personally believe that the harmonics c music and the laws of
physics are interrelated, and we now believe we’v proven this mathematically and geometrically, though it is not fully
showl here.
I was very excited at the time I was gathering this information, becaus the implications are incredible. It means that the harmonics of music ar located inside a tetrahedron, and that these harmonics are now determina ble. Since then we’ve discovered another geometric pattern behind th one shown in this illustration that reveals all the keys, and it has opened u all the inner meanings of what Egypt was about.
The Egyptians reduced their entire philosophy to the square roots of 2, 3, and 5 and the 3-4-5 triangle. Many people have given explanations for it, but there’s another explanation hidden behind the geometry of the tetrahedron. That idea probably went over almost everybody’s head, including mine, in a way. But it’s there and we’re working on it now.
Black- and White-Light Spirals
While I was working on the harmonics of music, I got a postcard in the mail. The postcard was a polar graph with reflective surfaces [Fig. 8-29]. It had little reflectors in each component. I want you to see how light reflects off a polar graph. It reflects off what appears to be a Golden Mean or Fibonacci spiral.
There are two arms of the spiral, one opposite the other, exactly 180 degrees apart. Notice that between the reflecting arms the light goes very dark. The black-light spirals are rotating at 180 degrees to each other and 90 degrees to the white light. (We’ve seen that before in the swirling galaxy.) If you look right in the center, you can see that the two opposite arms are exactly 180 degrees to each other.
This is where we’ve seen it before [Fig. 8-30]. Here a white-light spiral comes out in one direction, and 180 degrees
from it another white-light spiral goes out in the opposite direction. The dark arms—the feminine ones—come out be-
tween the light ones. That explains why the black light between the light arms of the spiral is different from the blackness

in the rest of space [see Fig. 2-35], as scientists have discov-
ered, because the black light within a spiral is the feminine
energy, and the darkness out in space is Void, not the same.
The scientists couldn’t quite understand why it was different.
Maps for the Left Brain and Their Emotional
There’s one more simple teaching I would like to give
here. Drawing the tetrahedron over the polar graph geo-
metrically represents the harmonics of music. That drawing
and the information I’ve given you on this subject comes
into your understanding through your left brain. But do you
remember how we went through those visualizations, where
I was saying that every line on a page is not a line on a
page, but a map of how spirit moves through the Void? So
these drawings are maps—for the left brain.
But there’s another component that’s equally important
to understand: Besides being a map of how Spirit moves in

Fig. 8-30. Swirling galaxy.

the Void, the lines on any sacred-geometry drawing also
represent something else. For every line in sacred geom-
etry, there is always an associated emotional and experi-
ential aspect. There is not only a mental component, but an emotional component that can also be experienced. A sa-
cred-geometry drawing can enter human consciousness through the left brain, but there is a way that it can also enter experientially through the right brain. Sometimes this emotional/experiential component is not obvious.
What does this mean? Let’s use music as an example. Music can come into human experience as sound and be heard and felt inside us, or it can be understood by the left brain as proportion and mathematics. As you study sacred geometry, remember that both sides of the brain use the same information differently.

[Here Drunvalo played a Sioux Lakota flute to give students a direct experience. He asked them to close their eyes and experience the music instead of mentally studying or thinking about it.]
Form and the sacred geometry associated with it are the source, but the way
this information enters the human experience is different. It’s usually a lot easier to
take in information experientially through the right brain than through the logical left
brain, but they’re equivalent. It’s hard to see that they’re equivalent, but they are.
Throughout all this geometry, as you look at these triangles and squares around the
body and the relating spheres and shapes, some kind of experience is associated
with each geometry. Maybe you don’t know what the particular experience is. It might
take a whole lifetime to figure out what it relates to, but it’s my belief that there is
always an experiential aspect associated with every sacred geometrical form.
Arriving Back at the Fruit of Life through the Second Informational
Now I’m going to give a kind of bottom line for all this. Remember that we plotted this triangle, and its apexes hit at 0, 120 and 240 degrees, then we added these lines [see Fig. 8-28 on p. 224] ? But in nature, like in the galaxy, there’s not just one spiral, but two, going out from the center in opposite ways (see Figs. 8-
29 and 8-30). So if you copy nature, you would have to plot two spirals, which will produce two opposing triangles on the polar graph [Fig. 8-31]. If you look carefully, it actually produces two tetrahedrons—more specifically, it’s a star tetrahedron inscribed inside the sphere.
If you’ve seen Richard Hoagland’s work, do you remember what the message on Mars at Cydonia was? It was a star tetrahedron inside a sphere. If you haven’t seen Richard Hoagland’s work, I suggest you look at what he showed the United Nations. Though science is just beginning to understand what this is about, what Mr. Hoagland showed them will probably make a lot of sense to you now.
Inside the star tetrahedron in the sphere, there’s another star tetrahedron [Fig. 8-32]. And inside the smaller tetrahedron a sphere fits perfectly . If you take that size sphere and center it on each one of the points of the tetrahedrons, you end up with the Fruit of Life. If I rotate this drawing 30 degrees and get rid of some of the lines, you can see the result more clearly [Fig. 8-33].

What you just saw, only in reverse image, was the second informational system of the Fruit of Life. All the information above with the star tetrahedron, Golden Mean spirals, light, sound and the harmonics of music and so on came from this second information system.
I could have started with the Fruit of Life and gone back the other way, but it isn’t how it happened to me. I wanted to show you that the second information system is accessed by connecting the concentric circles of the Fruit of Life with radial lines coming out/rom the center, rather than connecting all the centers together as we did to find the Platonic solids and the information on crystals. It is just a different way to superimpose male lines over the female lines of the Fruit of Life.
In the first system of information—Metatron’s Cube—we came up with the structural patterns of the universe based on the five Platonic solids. These appear in lattice structures of metals and crystals and in many other patterns in nature that we didn’t talk about. The diatoms that make up diatomaceous earth were one of the first life forms in the world, and diatoms are nothing but little geometric patterns, or functions of the patterns. What you have just been shown is how light, sound and the harmonics of music are interrelated through a star tetrahedral field inscribed inside a sphere that came directly out of the Fruit of Life, the third rotational pattern of Genesis [Fig. 8-34].



It is now becoming clear that geometry—and thereby proportion—is the hidden law of nature. It is even more fundamental than mathematics, for all the laws of nature can be derived directly from sacred geometry.
In the second part of this work we will show you more of nature’s secrets. We believe it will begin to change the way
you see the world you live in. It will become clear that your body is the measuring stick or the holographic image of the universe, and that you, the spirit, play a more important role in life than society has taught us.
Finally (and this will be paramount in this work), you will begin to see how the geometries are located in the electro-
magnetic fields around your body that are about 55 feet in diameter. Remembering these fields is the beginning of human awakening, like a baby bird breaking into the light and out of the darkness inside its eggshell. The sacred and holy human lightbody, called the Mer-Ka-Ba by the ancients, becomes a reality. This Mer-Ka-Ba is the “wheels within wheels” of Ezekiel in the Bible. The pathway home through the stars becomes evident as the blueprint of creation emerges.
We are intimately connected to the Source of all life. In the remembering of this information will come an awakening
that will dispel the myth of separation and bring you into the very presence of God. This is my prayer.
Until we meet again in volume two, In love and service, Drunvalo



Chapter I
Liberman, Jacob, Light, the Medicine of the Future, Bear & Co., Santa Fe,
NM, 1992. Temple, Robert K.G., The Sirius Mystery, Destiny Books, Rochester, VT
( Satinover, Jeffrey, M.D., Cracking the Bible Code, William Morrow, New
York,1997. West, John Anthony, Serpent in the Sky, Julian Press, New York, 1979,
1987. Cayce, Edgar: many books have been written about him; the Association
for Research and Enlightenment in Virginia Beach, VA, is a source of an
enormous amount of material. Perhaps the most well-known book is
The Sleeping Prophet by Jess Steam.

Chapter 2
Lawlor, Robert, Sacred Geometry: Philosophy and Practice, Thames & Hudson, London,1982.
Hoagland, Richard C.; see White, John, Pole Shift, 3rd ed., ARE Press, Virginia Beach,
VA, 1988. Hapgood, Charles, Earth’s Shifting Crust and The Path of the Pole (out of
print). Braden, Gregg, Awakening to Zero Point: The Collective Initiation, Sacred Spaces/Ancient Wisdom Pub., Questa, NM; also on video tape (Lee
Productions, Bellevue, WA).

Chapter 3
Hamaker, John and Donald A. Weaver, The Survival of Civilization,
Hamaker-Weaver Pub., 1982. Sitchin, Zecharia, The 12th Planet (1978), The Lost Realms (1996), Genesis Revisited (1990), Avon Books. Begich, Nick and Jeanne Manning, Angels Don’t Play This HAARP,
Earthpulse Press, Anchorage, AK, 1995.

Chapter 4
Keyes, Ken, Jr., The Hundredth Monkey, out of print.
Watson, Lyall, Lifetide, Simon and Schuster, New York, 1979.
Strecker, Robert, M.D., “The Strecker Memorandum” (video), The
Strecker Group, 1501 Colorado Blvd., Eagle Rock, CA 90041 (203) 344-8039.


The Emerald Tablets of Thoth the Atlantean, translated by Doreal, Brotherhood of the White Temple, Castle Rock, CO , 1939. Obtainable from Light Technology Publishing.

Chapter 6
Anderson, Richard Feather (labyrinths); see Penrose, Roger; see
tsmith/KW/goldenpenrose.html ; . Adair, David; see . Winter, Dan, Heartmath;
see . Sorrell, Charles A., Rocks and Minerals: A Guide to Field Identification,
Golden Press, 1973.
Vector Flexor toy, available from Source Books (see below). Langham, Derald, Circle Gardening: Producing Food by Genesa Principles,
Devin-Adair Pub., 1978.

Chapter 7
Charkovsky, Igor; see;; Doczi, Gyorgy, The Power of Limits: Propor-
tional Harmonies in Nature, Art and Architecture, Shambhala, Boston, MA, 1981, 1994.

Chapter 8
“Free Energy: The Race to Zero Point” (video), available from Lightworks, (800) 795-8273, $40.45 ppd., .
Pai, Anna C. and Helen Marcus Roberts, Genetics, Its Concepts and Implications, Prentice Ha\\, 1981.
Critchlow, Keith, Order in Space: A Design Source Book, Viking Press, 1965, 1969 and other books are out of print; see aut.ttl/at03940.hrm .
Most of the books and sacred geometry tools, in addition to posters, kits, videos, tapes and CDs recommended in this workshop, are available from Source Books, P.O. Box 292231, Nashville, TN 37229-2231, (800) 637-5222 (in U.S.) or (615) 773-7652. Catalog available.


PREFACE ... ..2
Remembering Our Ancient Past ... ...7
How the Fall of Atlantis Changed Our Reality ... .7
The Mer-Ka-Ba ... ..10
Returning to Our Original State ... 11
A Higher, Inclusive Reality ... 11
Left- and Right-Brain Realities ... .13
Where We’re Going with This Information ... .13
Challenging the Belief Patterns of Our Parents ... .15
Gathering the Anomalies ... ..16
The Dogon Tribe, Sirius B and Dolphin Beings ... ...16
A Trip to Peru and More Dogon Evidence ... .18
A Sanskrit Poem and Pi ... .20
How Old Is the Sphinx? ... ..21
Edgar Cayce, the Sphinx and the Hall of Records ... .23
Introducing Thoth ... ..24
My Story ... ...26
Berkeley Beginnings ... .26
Dropping Out to Canada ... ...26
The Two Angels and Where They Led Me ... .27
Alchemy and the First Appearance of Thoth ... .28
Thoth the Atlantean ... ..29
Thoth, Geometries and the Flower of Life ... .31
The Secret of the Flower Unfolds ... .34

The Three Osirian Temples in Abydos ... 34
Carved Bands of Time ... 35
The Seti I Temple ... 35
The “Third” Temple ... 36
The “Second” Temple’s Sacred Geometry and Flower of Life ... 37
Carvings of the Copts ... 40
The Early Church Changes Christian Symbolism ... 42
The Flower of Life: Sacred Geometry ... 43
The Seed of Life ... 44
The Tree of Life Connection ... 44
The Vesica Piscis ... 45
Egyptian Wheels and Dimensional Travel ... 45
Dimensions, Harmonics and the Waveform Universe ... 47
Wavelength Determines Dimension ... 48
Dimensions and the Musical Scale ... 49
The Wall between Octaves ... 50
Changing Dimensions ... 51
The Star Tetrahedron ... 51
Threeness in Duality: The Holy Trinity ... 53
An Avalanche of Knowledge ... 54
Earth’s Relation to the Cosmos ... 55
Spirals in Space ... 56
Our Sirius Connection ... 57
Yugas ... 60
Modern Views on Pole Shifts ... 61
Iron Pilings and Core Samples ... 62
Pole-Shift Triggers ... 63
Magnetic Flow Changes ... 64
Harmonic and Disharmonic Levels of Consciousness ... 66
The Darker Side of Our Present and Past ... 68

Our Endangered Earth ... 68
Dying Oceans ... 70
Ozone ... 72
The Greenhouse Ice Age ... 76
Ice Age to Warmth, a Quick Switch ... 77
Underground Atomic Bombs and CFCs ... 77
The Strecker Memorandum on AIDS ... 78
A Perspective on Earthly Problems ... 80
The History of the World ... 81
Sitchin and Sumeria ... 82
Tiamat and Nibiru ... 83
Nibiru’s Atmosphere Problem ... 85
The Nefilim Rebellion and the Origin of Our Race ... 86
Did Eve Come from the Gold Mines? ... 87
Thoth’s Version of the Origin of Our Race ... 87
Conceiving the Human Race: The Sirian Role ... 88
Enlil’s Arrival ... 89
Nefilim Mothers ... 90
Adam and Eve ... 90
The Rising of Lemuria ... 91
Explorations of Lemuria in 1910 ... 92
Ay and Tiya and the Beginning ofTantra ... 93
Lemuria Sinks and Atlantis Rises ... 94
The Aborted Evolution of Consciousness
and the Creation of the Christ Grid ... 95
How the Lemurians Evolved Human Consciousness ... 95
The Structure of the Human Brain ... 95
The Attempt to Birth a New Consciousness on Atlantis ... 96
The Children of Lemuria Are Called Forth ... 97
The Aborted Evolution ... 98
Two Empty Vortexes Drew Extraterrestrial Races ... 98
Mars after the Lucifer Rebellion ... 99

Martians Rape the Human Child Consciousness and Take Over ... 100
Minor Pole Shift and the Subsequent Debate ... 101
The Martians’ Fateful Decision ... 102
Failure of the Martian Mer-Ka-Ba Attempt ... 102
A Disruptive Heritage: The Bermuda Triangle ... 103
The Solution: A Christ Consciousness Grid ... 104
Ascended Masters Assist the Earth ... 104
A Planetary Grid ... 105
The Hundredth-Monkey Concept ... 106
The Hundredth Human ... 107
The Government’s Discovery of the Grid and the Race for Control ... 107
How the Grid Was Constructed, and Where ... 108
Sacred Sites ... 109
The Pyramid’s Landing Platform and the Ship beneath the Sphinx ... 110
The Vulnerability of This Period and the Appearance of the Heroine ... 112
Awaiting the Atlantean Catastrophe ... 113
The Three and a Half Days of the Void ... 114
Memory, Magnetic Fields and Mer-Ka-Bas ... 114
What the Thoth Group Did after Light Returned ... 115
Sacred Sites on the Grid ... 116
The Five Levels of Human Consciousness and Their Chromosomal Differences ... 118
The Evidence in Egypt for a New Look at History ... 118
Giants in the Land ... 119
Stair-Step Evolution ... 121
The Tat Brotherhood ... 122
The Parallel Evolution in Sumer ... 123
Well-Kept Secrets in Egypt,
Key to a New View of History ... 124
Egypt’s Role in the Evolution of Consciousness ... 126

Introduction to Some Basic Concepts ... 126
Egyptian Tools and Symbols of Resurrection ... 126
The Difference between Dying, Resurrection and Ascension ... 127
When the Sun Rose in the West ... 129
Osiris, the First Immortal ... 130
The Transpersonal Holographic Memory of the First Level of Consciousness ... 130
The Introduction of Writing, Which Created the Second Level of Consciousness ... 131
The Roadblock of Polytheism: Chromosomes and Neters ... 132
The Rescue of Human Consciousness ... 133
Akhenaten’s Life: A Brilliant Flash of Light ... 133
Creating the Bodies of Akhenaten, then Nefertiti ... 134
The New Rulership and the One God ... 134
The Reign of Truth, Which Depicts a Different Genetics ... 136
King Tut—and Other Elongated Skulls ... 141
Memory: The Key to Immortality ... 143
What Really Happened to Akhenaten? ... 144
Akhenaten’s Mystery School ... 145
The Essene Brotherhood and Jesus, Mary and Joseph ... 145
The Two Mystery Schools and the 48 Chromosomal Images ... 146
Genesis, the Creation Story ... 147
Egyptian and Christian Versions ... 147
How God and the Mystery Schools Did It ... 148
First Create a Space ... 149
Next, Enclose the Space ... 149
Then Spin the Shape to Create a Sphere ... 150
The First Motion in Genesis ... 150
The Vesica Piscis, through Which Light Is Created ... 151
The Second Motion Creates the Star Tetrahedron ... 152
“Move to That Which is Newly Created” until Completion ... 153
The Significance of Shape and Structure ... 155
Developing the Genesis Pattern ... 155
The Torus, the First Shape ... 155

The Labyrinth As a Movement of Life-Force Energy ... 157
The Egg of Life, the Second Shape beyond Genesis ... 158
The Third Rotation/Shape: The Fruit of Life ... 159
The Platonic Solids ... 161
Their Source: Metatron’s Cube ... 161
The Missing Lines ... 164
Quasi Crystals ... 165
The Platonic Solids and the Elements ... 166
The Sacred 72 ... 168
Using Bombs, and Understanding the Basic Pattern of Creation ... 169
Crystals ... 170
Grounding Our Learning ... 170
Electron Clouds and Molecules ... 171
The Six Categories of Crystals ... 173
Truncating Polyhedrons ... 175
Buckminster Fuller’s Cube Equilibrium ... 177
Deep inside a Sesame Seed ... 178
The 26 Shapes ... 179
The Periodic Table ... 180
The Key: The Cube and the Sphere ... 180
Crystals Are Alive! ... 181
The Future Silicon/Carbon Evolutionary Leap ... 182
The Measuring Stick of the Universe: ... 184
The Human Body and Its Geometries ... 184
Geometry within the Human Body ... 184
In the Beginning Is the Sphere, the Ovum ... 185
The Number Twelve ... 185
The Sperm Becomes a Sphere ... 186
The First Human Cell ... 187
Forming a Central Tube ... 187
The First Four Cells Form a Tetrahedron ... 188
Our True Nature Is in Our Original Eight Cells ... 189

The Star Tetrahedron/Cube of 16 Cells Becomes a Hollow Sphere/Torus ... 191
Progression of Life Forms through the Platonic Solids ... 192
Underwater Birthing and Dolphin Midwives ... 192
Geometries That Surround the Body ... 193
The Masonic Key to Squaring the Circle ... 194
The Phi Ratio ... 195
Applying the Key to Metatron’s Cube ... 196
The Two Concentric Circles/Spheres ... 196
Studying da Vinci’s Canon ... 197
Phi Ratios in the Human Body ... 198
The Phi Ratio in All Known Organic Structures ... 201
Golden Mean Rectangles and Spirals around the Body ... 204
Male and Female Spirals ... 205
Reconciling the Fibonacci-Binary Polarity ... 208
The Fibonacci Sequence and Spiral ... 208
Life’s Solution to the Infinite Golden Mean (Phi) Spiral ... 209
Spirals in Nature ... 211
Fibonacci Spirals around Humans ... 212
The Human Grid and Zero-Point Technology ... 213
Male- and Female-Originating Spirals ... 214
Binary Sequencing in Cell Division and Computers ... 216
Searching for the Form behind Polarity ... 217
The Polar-Graph Solution ... 218
A Sixth-Grade Math Book ... 218
Spirals on a Polar Graph ... 219
Keith Critchlow’s Triangles and Their Musical Significance ... 220
Black- and White-Light Spirals ... 222
Maps for the Left Brain and Their Emotional Component ... 223
Arriving Back at the Fruit of Life through the Second Informational System ... 224